JP7358140B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a change effect on a meter after the action of a role object, and the degree of change in the meter after the movement of the role object differs depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed before the movement of the role object. (For example, see Patent Document 1.)

JP 2018-7755 Publication

However, the game was not sufficiently interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance and a changing performance in response to the preview performance;
a movable body that is operable;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that indicates whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect;
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The first change performance is a performance executed during variable display, the second change performance is a performance executed during the advantageous state,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode that are different from each other,
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to the player in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to the specific mode by executing the first change production;
a predetermined effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect to notify a second content that is advantageous to the player and is different from the first content;
a movable body performance using the movable body in which at least some performance aspects are common when the first change performance is executed and when the second change performance is executed;
In response to the execution of the movable body performance, it is possible to perform an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the movable body performance,
When the display mode of the predetermined display changes from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode, without the movable body effect,
When the display mode of the predetermined display changes from the first predetermined mode or the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, accompanied by the movable object effect,
When the special effect is executed in response to the first change effect causing the display mode of the predetermined display to change to the specific mode without changing from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode ; When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect; when the special effect is executed in response to the display mode changing from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode and changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode; The advantageousness of the first content to be notified is different,
The specific performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific performances including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance,
The image display means includes:
As the specific image, at least a first specific image can be displayed while the first specific effect is being executed, and a second specific image can be displayed while the second specific effect is being executed;
It is possible to display the specific image in a normal mode and the specific image in a special mode that suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal mode;
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state,
The image display means is capable of displaying the specific image by adding a first special effect element when displaying the specific image according to the special mode;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that is capable of producing effects. The performance execution means is equipped with an executable performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the performance execution means displays a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the background (images, active display, etc.)) (for example, the meter effect shown in Figure 13-8, the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side), the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side)) active display effect, etc.) and the display mode of the predetermined display changes to a specific mode (for example, the meter value changes to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.) Correspondingly, there is a special effect that notifies the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) and a second situation that is different from the first situation (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH). (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) during the interval period of prize winning, jackpot game state, etc.). second content that is advantageous for the player, which is different from the first content (for example, increasing the total number of prize balls (or increasing the total number of prize balls), moving to the next round, etc.) (e.g., the total award ball number update effect using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) etc.), and at least when the changing effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, total award pitch update effect, etc.) is executed. Special performances that have some common production modes (for example, role effects that move the movable body 026SH32 shown in Figures 13-8 (B) and 13-9 (B), etc.).The special performances are examples of inside (sometimes called a specific production) is executed,
In response to the execution of the specific production, it is possible to execute an effect production that enhances the production effect of the specific production,
moreover,
A specific performance execution means (for example, a process including super reach A to C at step 097IWS104 in the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image), and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) during execution of a specific effect. ) and an image display means capable of displaying (for example, a part of the production control CPU 120 that selects a process table including super reach A to C and chance up production in step 097IWS104 and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image while the first specific effect is being executed, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) while the second specific effect is being executed. A second specific image (e.g., image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during execution of the specific image in the normal mode (e.g., white) and the expectation that the second specific image is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that the degree of advantage is high, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, the display mode of character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 does not change.) When displaying a specific image according to a special mode, the image display means A specific image can be displayed by adding a production element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, it is different from the first special production element. It is characterized in that a specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16).

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance and a changing performance in response to the preview performance;
a movable body that is operable;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that indicates whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect;
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The first change performance is a performance executed during variable display, the second change performance is a performance executed during the advantageous state,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode that are different from each other,
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to the player in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to the specific mode by executing the first change production;
a predetermined effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect to notify a second content that is advantageous to the player and is different from the first content;
a movable body performance using the movable body in which at least some performance aspects are common when the first change performance is executed and when the second change performance is executed;
In response to the execution of the movable body performance, it is possible to perform an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the movable body performance,
When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the first predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect; The degree of advantage of the first content notified by the special performance is different when the special performance is executed in response to the change of the display mode from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode,
The specific performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific performances including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance,
The image display means includes:
As the specific image, at least a first specific image can be displayed while the first specific effect is being executed, and a second specific image can be displayed while the second specific effect is being executed;
It is possible to display the specific image in a normal mode and the specific image in a special mode that suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal mode;
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state,
The image display means is capable of displaying the specific image by adding a first special effect element when displaying the specific image according to the special mode;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that has an effect. The performance execution means is equipped with an executable performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the performance execution means displays a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the background (images, active display, etc.)) (for example, the meter effect shown in Figure 13-8, the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side), the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side)) active display effect, etc.) and the display mode of the predetermined display changes to a specific mode (for example, the meter value changes to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.) Correspondingly, there is a special effect that notifies the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) and a second situation that is different from the first situation (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH). (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) during the interval period of prize winning, jackpot game state, etc.). second content that is advantageous for the player, which is different from the first content (for example, increasing the total number of prize balls (or increasing the total number of prize balls), moving to the next round, etc.) (e.g., the total award ball number update effect using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) etc.), and at least when the changing effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, total award pitch update effect, etc.) is executed. Special performances that have some common production modes (for example, role effects that move the movable body 026SH32 shown in Figures 13-8 (B) and 13-9 (B), etc.).The special performances are examples of inside (sometimes called a specific production) is executed,
In response to the execution of the specific production, it is possible to execute an effect production that enhances the production effect of the specific production,
moreover,
A specific performance execution means (for example, a process including super reach A to C at step 097IWS104 in the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image), and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) during execution of a specific effect. ) and an image display means capable of displaying (for example, a part of the production control CPU 120 that selects a process table including super reach A to C and chance up production in step 097IWS104 and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image while the first specific effect is being executed, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) while the second specific effect is being executed. A second specific image (e.g., image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during execution of the specific image in the normal mode (e.g., white) and the expectation that the second specific image is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that the degree of advantage is high, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, the display modes of character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 do not change.) When displaying a specific image according to a special mode, the image display means A specific image can be displayed by adding a production element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, it is different from the first special production element. It is characterized in that a specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16).

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above has an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, etc.), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state, etc.), and the special state. A state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of controlling the game state is provided in a special state that is easily controlled by the state (for example, the second KT state, etc.), and the The second situation is that the game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, a small winning prize during a small winning RUSH), and the performance execution means As the predetermined effect, the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) is displayed in response to the game medium passing through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state. The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls) may be notified by changing the display mode (for example, adding the number of prize balls due to the small winning prize).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in a gaming machine that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled by the special state. .

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the specific performance may be a performance that causes a movable body for performance (for example, movable body 026SH32, etc.) to operate.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by using the movable body for presentation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the first situation and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation have different production modes. It may be something in common. As described above, for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed instead of the total award ball count update image 026SHKSEF.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the first situation and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation are different from each other in production mode. At least a portion may be different. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) and the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF in FIG. 13-9(C) differ in at least a part of the presentation mode.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(6) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can play games, and is a performance execution means that can execute a performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect execution means executes a change effect (for example, FIG. 13-8 etc.) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.). 13-14 (left side), active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side)), and the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value 4 (MAX), the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), the first content that is advantageous for the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) Change the display mode of special effects to be announced and specific displays different from the above-mentioned predetermined display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, add the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, round a predetermined effect that notifies the player of a second content that is advantageous for the player and is different from the first content (for example, a small winning prize during a small winning RUSH, an interval period of a jackpot game state, etc.) (For example, the total award pitch number update effect using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) , at least a part of the production mode is common between when the change production (for example, meter production, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined production (for example, total award pitch update production, etc.) is executed; It is characterized in that a performance (for example, an accessory performance that moves the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B), etc.) is executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(7) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) that can execute a changing performance in response to the execution of a specific performance. etc.), and the change effect includes a first change effect (for example, as shown in FIG. meter effect, background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side), active display effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), and a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize pitch display) 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, the total award ball number update effect using the total award ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in Figure 13-9, etc., 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. )", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), a special effect that notifies the player of the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) By executing the second change effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to provide a second content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player (for example, the total number of prize balls (or the total The feature is that the system notifies players of an increase in the number of prize balls (increase in the number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means 8 to 14 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-136430,
As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are things that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as "fluctuation") of identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game There are machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled).
In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information on the variable display device, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is stopped. A winning occurs according to the display result derived when the game stops, a predetermined game medium is paid out according to the winning, and when a specific winning occurs, the gaming state is changed to a predetermined gaming value to the player. There are some machines that are configured to give the same amount of money to players (so-called slot machines).
Note that gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to hit a winning ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. This means that rights are generated, and that the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily established.
In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. A “jackpot” occurs when the Note that the derivation display means to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a jackpot occurs, for example, a jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game enters a jackpot game state in which it is easy to hit a winning ball. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are won in the big winning hole, the big winning hole is closed. The number of times the big prize opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the grand prize opening will be closed when the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize opening may be referred to as a round. Moreover, a game in a round is sometimes called a round game.
In addition, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the final stop symbol (for example, the center symbol among the left center right symbols) is stopped and shaken continuously for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches a specific display result. The jackpot may occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols are changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. A performance performed in a state where sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach performance. In addition, the reach state and its appearance are called the reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a variable reach display. Then, if the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes a "miss" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying finding out how to generate a jackpot.
In such a gaming machine, a specific image can be displayed during execution of a specific effect, and a specific image in a normal mode and a specific mode in a special mode that suggests that there is a higher expectation that the machine will be controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. Some devices are configured to be able to display images, and when displaying a specific image in a special mode, a special effect element is added so that the specific image can be displayed. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses that when a first try performance (a specific image in a special mode) is executed, try information (special performance elements) is displayed to notify the player that there is a high possibility of entering a specific gaming state. It is stated that the try information is not displayed when the second try effect (specific image in the normal mode) which is less likely to result in a specific game state than the first try effect is executed.
However, when a specific image in the normal mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the specific image is a preview image whose mode changes depending on the degree of expectation that the specific image will be controlled to an advantageous state. I can't get attention.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can make a player recognize that a specific image is a preview image and can draw the player's attention to the specific image.

(8) Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of controlling whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state. A specific performance execution means that can execute the suggested specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) (for example, a process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS104 in the performance control CPU 120, and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed) an image display means (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) that can display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) during the execution of a specific effect. For example, in step 097IWS104 of the performance control CPU 120, a process table including super reach A to C and chance up performance is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including a second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and the image display means displays a specific image as a specific image. At least, the first specific images (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, image A4) can be displayed during execution of the second specific effect. , image B1, image B2, image B3), and a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (which suggests that there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode). For example, specific images in blue, green, red, rainbow colors) can be displayed, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to be advantageous (for example, in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-18 -16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means displays the first special effect element (for example, blue, green, red) when displaying the specific image in the special mode. , an effect image with a rainbow display color) can be added to display a specific image, and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, a white effect image) can be added. A special feature is that a specific image can be displayed by adding a display color effect image (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above, the image display means may be displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors, ), the first specific image can be displayed, and a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) of a display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image is added. The first specific image may be displayed (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image by the display mode of the added first special effect element.

(10) In the gaming machines of (8) to (9) above, the image display means is capable of displaying an image of a common aspect (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, When displaying images of a common mode, it is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding a common first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a rainbow display color) (FIG. 18 18-4 and FIG. 18-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that an image of a common mode is displayed as a specific image.

(11) In the gaming machines of (8) to (10) above, execution of a notification effect capable of executing a notification effect (for example, outputting a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element. The notification effect execution means does not execute the notification effect when the specific image is displayed with the second special effect element added (for example, the part that executes step 097IWS311 in the effect control CPU 120). , the performance control CPU 120 may be configured such that when the result in step 097IWS310 is Y, the process does not proceed to step 097IWS311. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware only when the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is high.

(12) In the gaming machines of (8) to (11) above, the image display means is configured to display an effect (for example, a chance It may be configured such that the close-up effects A7, B7, C5) can be executed (see FIGS. 18-4 to 18-6). According to such a configuration, a sense of anticipation can be maintained even when a specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element.

(13) In the gaming machines of (8) to (12) above, the specific performance execution means executes the performance in the first period (for example, the performance in the first half of the performance period of Super Reach A to C) and the performance in the first period. The performance of the second period (for example, the performance of the second half of the performance period of Super Reach A to C) including the performance of notifying whether or not it will be controlled in an advantageous state after the period (for example, notification of success/failure results). The image display means can display a specific image during the first period and restrict display of the specific image during the second period (see FIG. 18-8). may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to concentrate on whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(14) In any one of the above (8) to (13) means 1 to 6, any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to As a variable display performance, there is a part where setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed), and the performance mode of the predetermined performance is , a special mode that suggests that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9), and a specific mode that indicates a setting (for example, a specific pattern) When the predetermined production execution means is capable of executing both the predetermined production of the special mode and the predetermined production of the specific mode (for example, At the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display (timing before the variable display mode becomes reach), it is possible to execute the predetermined presentation of the special mode with priority over the predetermined presentation of the specific mode. (For example, in the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-15 of the first embodiment, if the performance control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery of the reach preview, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the reach based on the pattern PT-9 in Even if the execution of the notice (high) is decided with priority over the setting suggestion, or the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 will not be won. If not, 103SGS301 determines execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 with priority over setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4./Direction etc. The control CPU 120 determines execution of the performance based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a rate that satisfies the relationship of reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low). (see FIGS. 17-20 of Modification Example 1). According to such a configuration, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent a predetermined performance of a specific aspect from being executed and the performance from becoming inappropriate.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing the output period of a security signal. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs before the set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs after the set value is determined. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of the special variable winning ball device in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over-winning. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion performance determination table when over-winning. It is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing when winning a small hit. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion production determination table when winning a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number display suggestion production processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number emphasis production processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number emphasizing effect determination table. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance mode of a setting value suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance aspect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of right-handed hitting information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while executing the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 3. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game related to the characteristic part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production mode setting processing concerning characteristic part 020SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display compatible display control processing related to the feature section 020SH. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table of a variable display compatible display. It is a flowchart showing an example of a suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. It is a flowchart showing an example of a suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decision table of various suggestion productions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change production execution process of the display corresponding to variable display which CPU120 for production control performs during variable display. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the transition of the performance screen during the small hit RUSH mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance which changes the display mode of the pending display during chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of a fake effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value suggestion performance during chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of probability change suggestion performance during chance time mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of small hit release timing and execution timing of various suggestion productions. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature section 022SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot type determination table of the characteristic part 022SH. It is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing at the time of starting a jackpot. It is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen from normal mode to small hit RUSH mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the chance time mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of bonus rush icon control processing in variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the production screen according to Modification 1 when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the structure of a part of game board 2 of the game machine concerning feature part 026SH. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a meter performance executed in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining meter production etc. It is an explanatory diagram explaining meter production etc. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating background effects and the like. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating active display effects and the like. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C), (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. It is an explanatory diagram showing a received command buffer at the time of motion winning. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during variable display. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the production type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a table A for determining the effect (ready-to-reach notice) type, and (B) is a diagram showing a table B for determining the type of effect (setting suggestion). (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display performance determination process as modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when table C for performance type determination is used. (A) is a diagram showing a performance period of a performance during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notices and setting suggestions in the first and second periods for setting values 1 and 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is the diagram when the fluctuation pattern is set to super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution determination rate of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period with the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the first period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and second period for setting value 1 and setting value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach in Example 3, It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6 in super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the first period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a presentation period of a variable display presentation as a fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance determination process according to a fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for setting value 1 and setting value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4. A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period with normal reach and setting value 1 and setting value 6. (C) is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period with setting value 1 and setting value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is super reach and setting value 1 and setting value 6. It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 1st period. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a presentation period of a variable display presentation as a second modification. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for setting value 1 and setting value 6, common to all fluctuation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for all fluctuation patterns common to normal reach and super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6 in common, (C) is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6. It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in three periods. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows chance up production setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a chance up production decision table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a chance up production decision table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a chance up production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance up image and the success/failure result notification during execution of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of super reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right strike indicator 26 is provided to encourage a right strike operation in which a firing operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and its lighting is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and a second hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to display an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is provided to encourage a right-handed hitting operation. In addition, the lighting of the right hit notification LED 37 is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided below the image display device 5. The game ball that has entered the first starting prize opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting prize opening, and is configured to prevent game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area from entering the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 that prevents game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, it is possible to fire the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed shooting). The game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting prize opening only when the player performs the following operation.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the row of nails 19 is provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting prize opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the first starting winning hole may be provided on the left side of the gaming area so that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning hole may be configured such that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole. The opening may be provided on the left side of the gaming area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

A special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the passage gate 41. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 extends in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member, which is formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game balls flow down, in the front and rear directions, thereby changing the bottom surface. A large prize opening located at the lower part of the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the player, and the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is brought into the open state.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 that forms a special winning hole for small winnings, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. As shown in , the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and extend in the front and back direction with a plate-shaped bottom member that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game ball flows down. By moving forward and backward, the special winning hole and the second start winning hole located below the bottom member can be put into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. ). The special variable winning ball device 17 controls the bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, and the special winning opening, which becomes the winning area, is opened. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 6B hits the normal symbol display 20 and a symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, Opening control is executed to open the second start-up winning opening, which becomes the winning area.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so the game balls that fall onto the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state, the game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged next to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win and the variable winning ball device 6B does not win. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting prize opening is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen into the second starting prize opening will enter the second starting prize opening and become the special variable winning ball. Game balls do not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning hole is in an open state, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning a prize opening is not also in an open state, the game ball will move on the bottom member of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 and fall as it is toward the out opening.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. There is. In this example, the regulation piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanderes with a movement in the front-back direction component, and the time taken for the ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there is no regulating piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is placed on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is placed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device starts from the variable winning ball device 6B. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the player 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening is provided in the grand prize opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to close and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the grand prize opening and obtain a prize ball, so it is difficult for the player to be in a disadvantageous condition.

A switch (second count switch 24) that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning hole is provided in the special winning hole. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is small compared to when the game ball enters the big winning hole. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning hole is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to close and the special winning hole is in the closed state, it is impossible for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning hole. be in a disadvantageous condition.

In addition, a second starting opening switch 22B is provided in the second starting winning opening that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be collectively referred to as starting winning hole or starting opening.

In addition, this pachinko game machine 1 includes a passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when playing a jackpot game or in the KT state (so-called small winning time), the player can aim at the right side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, since the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays the role of a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the game enters the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a frame LED 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. .

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". . Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "losing" symbol. In addition, even in the first special pattern game, it may be configured such that the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, variable probability state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.). , jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), probability variable control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

In the KT state, KT control is executed which makes it easier to get a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of prize balls even in the small winning game state, so it is an advantageous state for the player, although the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the jackpot playing state.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period of varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state (time saving state), and the "general symbol hit" in the regular symbol game is executed. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is also executed by improving the probability that the game will occur more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, KT state, and high base state continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the special symbol game being executed a predetermined number of times and the next jackpot game state being started. do. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (number-cutting probability variation, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, and the display result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot" state. The probability that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed) It is a state in which

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". If a predetermined special symbol (a small prize symbol, for example "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small prize". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or dots on the frame LED 9 are performed. etc./turning off the light, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switches (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, and solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it into a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or a solenoid for a big prize opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further performs audio control of a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37. It supplies it to the board 13, and supplies an LED signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37 based on the LED signal in the manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of LED lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 serves as an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game is realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game is realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process for each timer interrupt, control of the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of the gaming state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is used to output a test signal so that the control status of the game machine can be checked from outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state, during a jackpot game, during a small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a first starting winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning in the first starting winning opening, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the first pending storage number. When a starting prize enters the first starting winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information in the first pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, a transmission is performed to send a production control command to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the first pending memory number, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. Settings are made. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is controlled by the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the first starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, it is determined whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", or whether it is a "jackpot". The type of jackpot in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are created using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit". It includes processing to decide either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying. It includes processing to do. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation process ends. do.

In addition, in this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process moves to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first While the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a small win may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol and the interruption period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the swinging of the decorative symbols, resulting in a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win in the small win control and no special effect is performed, so the small win ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win a prize in the small win control and an effect that emphasizes the small win control is executed, the small win ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Furthermore, the length of the small win fanfare period as the small win opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state, similarly to the above small win ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". This first special symbol stopping process includes stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and stopping displaying (deriving) a confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the first special symbol. Contains processing to perform settings. Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", a setting process for starting a jackpot game is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is "small win", processing for starting a small win game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state will also be updated if the game is controlled to a variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, and if the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is replaced with "second", the second special symbol process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In addition, in this example, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed by moving to the second special symbol fluctuation processing. While the first special symbol is being displayed, a small win may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled as a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not a small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small hit end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Regarding the small win control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small win fanfare period and the small win ending period may also be configured to vary depending on the gaming state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, and if the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, the processing for starting the jackpot game is performed. , the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. When returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. , ends the jackpot opening process.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3". The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing for making various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such settings are made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

The small win release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small win release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process includes a process to measure the elapsed time since the special winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the special prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small winning end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as actions are performed to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 8, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14 . Various performance controls during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LEDs, are executed by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a firing control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected to the effect control board 12, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and frame LED 9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with various circuits for control. The main board 11 is mainly used for a function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting signals from switches arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of an effect control board 12, etc. , a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , and control the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has control functions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various winning information regarding winnings is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with a microcomputer 100 for game control, which receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, as well as various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting data to the terminal board 21TM016, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed in the center of the main board 11. (for example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area") The number of game balls entering the game ball is tallied, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and hand ratios based on the tally is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and this winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the gaming hall. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is checked what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the game balls are entering the general prize opening as often as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, settings such as jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 when the pachinko game machine 1 is not supplied with power supply voltage, a clerk at the game parlor or the like operates the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, power-on operation and initialization operation can be easily performed.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It can only be operated by a store clerk who has a designated key. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a clerk at the game parlor who has a key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by using a predetermined key, but it is also possible to execute this switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation). It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or OFF state even if no force is applied by an employee of the game parlor or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game parlor must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent this from happening.

As shown in Figure 9-3, at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there are holes for discharging the game balls that have entered each winning hole and the game balls that have entered the out hole to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and within the nozzle is provided a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting fired game balls). ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9, and decorations. Contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of LEDs.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a payout control CPU21TM371, a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the bulb out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number counting switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a gaming machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a gaming machine frame opening sensor that allows the front surface of the gaming board 2 to be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 comprising a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the frame is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine if an error has occurred. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the microcomputer for payout control 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing and recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor that includes a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that game balls are jammed, that is, so-called ball biting. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 detects that the detection signal from the bulb out switch 21TM187 indicates the bulb is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank. , the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets a low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the batted ball firing device. Outputs a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094) A signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for game control and the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control are connected via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) to confirm the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and sends a signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, it transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by differentiating a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and uses the set received ACK signal to play the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball borrowed, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is changed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rented balls to the terminal boards (an external terminal board for the frame and an external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. )21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/extinguishment is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the drive signal from the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Note that a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are provided from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 in response to the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending possible display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball rental switch is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, upon receiving a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. This will be prevented.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

FIGS. 9-4(A) to 9-4(F) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Each display result determination table has two cases: the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, a determination value for determining a jackpot is set for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', or ``6'', the probability of winning the jackpot will be lower (1/300). ing. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/300) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than in other cases. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than when the number is "2". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", There is a higher probability (1/250) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "2" or "3". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/235) than when the numbers are "2", "3", or "4". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/220) than when the numbers are "2", "3", "4", or "5". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot F). That is, winning the jackpot is determined with probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. They are provided separately, and a common table is used to determine the jackpot regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The number of setting values that can be set may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Figure 9-5 (1) is an example where a "sunny" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and Figure 9-5 (2) is an example where a "cloudy" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the "rain" style ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 sends a setting command specifying a setting value to the production control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command for executing an ending performance on the image display device 5 to the performance control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on an effect control command that is sent when the jackpot gaming state ends, the image display device 5 stores it together with characters that notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended (the characters "BONUS END"). It becomes possible to display the ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the setting values.

The table shown in Figure 9-5 (4) shows cases where the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and when the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5(3), a determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the production control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (for example, 40%), and (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and at a medium level. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and at a medium rate. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion performance depending on the setting value, the player becomes interested in the manner in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, and the setting suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect what will happen.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be explained.
FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of a process executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, one of 0 to 5. (Step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, are normal values as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, and six levels of setting values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game parlor), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the setting value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. Note that if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when transitioning to a setting change mode to be described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether it has been decided that RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state) will be executed, and if the value is 1, it has been decided that RAM clear will be executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, RAM clearing is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, RAM clearing is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and when the power is restored, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state will be initialized may be made before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, or may be notified after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, as will be described later. It is also possible to do so.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , it is possible to separately recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Note that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal to the game control microcomputer 100 indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. In the case of a configuration in which a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, it becomes possible to individually recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process moves to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the setting change mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed and changed, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed.

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and no power interruption has occurred during the setting change, ( The setting value can be changed and/or provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled by the mode.

In this embodiment, in order to create a state in which setting values are not allowed to be changed but can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that both conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied through the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is further set based on (3) determining that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, on the condition that the setting value is changed, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As mentioned above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to check or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, or there is some kind of unauthorized operation. There is a possibility that the setting value is about to be confirmed or changed by the means. It is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting values in such a state, so in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. However, the control is not limited to this mode, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It is also possible not to control any of them.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process moves to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, if it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the control is not performed in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 (described later) (Send configuration command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the values stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process moves to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being met. It will be controlled by the mode. Furthermore, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that conditions for transition to the setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140, which will be described later) are satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode was being controlled when the previous power-off occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied. It turns out.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, in step S21TM4130, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in step S21TM4140, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal, without executing the processing from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. A set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the production control CPU 120.

When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message saying "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. In addition, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF) and then transition to a setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). notification to prompt the user to perform an operation to change the setting value (confirm the setting value). For example, a message such as "Please turn the power off and then turn it back on to enter the setting change mode" is displayed. Note that the same notification may be made by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop process, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the CPU 103 displays a message such as "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, indicating that the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Even though there is a possibility, the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode (determined as YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) are not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode is not performed. Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on multiple gaming machines, a card unit or call lamp device installed corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.) be done.

During the loop processing period, the letter "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display included in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, excessive heat is prevented from accumulating in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Furthermore, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, an external device such as a hall computer can detect a predetermined event (in this example, the setting value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal). ) may not have occurred, but the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode have not been satisfied and the change to the setting change mode has not occurred.

The loop process from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and if a power outage occurs while changing the settings ( In other words, if the setting changing flag was set when the power was turned on and the determination is YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to confirm the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, (3) Three conditions are required: the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied through the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) are not met, changes to the set value will not be permitted, and the set value in the set value storage area will not be fixed to the regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to proceed to normal game processing. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process moves to the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Once the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) has been entered, it will not be possible to proceed to the normal game processing, so the staff at the gaming parlor must first turn off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turn it on again. It won't happen. In this way, if the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are not met, turn off the power and make sure all conditions (1) to (3) are met the next time the power is turned on. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is determined to be the normal value.

Note that, if any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in a predetermined manner. The light may be emitted in a power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the following two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode will not be entered. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are met, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but is controlled to a gaming stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be explained using FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (in this example, any one of 0 to 5). Step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process moves to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, as the regular value in the set value storage area. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process moves to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off, including an unexpected power outage, etc., has been input, and if a power-off signal has been input, the CPU 103 interrupts the power supply. Immediately before operation becomes impossible due to a stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the repeating process from step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repeating process from step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply If a power outage occurs, a data check will be appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the setting values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the staff at the game parlor usually recognizes the range of set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as is on the display monitor 21TM029, the staff at the game hall will be able to understand the actual value. There is a risk that the setting value may be recognized incorrectly. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process moves to step S21TM4680. The performance control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (setting change mode here) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has not been changed. A flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is being changed is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The production control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on receiving the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the game parlor clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power was turned on or when the previous power was turned off) was 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the setting values are updated on the display monitor 21TM029. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and send a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) and the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040, and the RAM clear flag is remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and also to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting confirmation mode command, it sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting confirmation mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting change mode command, it is configured to set a setting change mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting change mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 onward is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal will continue to be output until the value of the security signal timer reaches 0ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal gaming process is started. will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms, regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set so that in response to the end of control in any of the modes, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 second has elapsed from the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is being controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Furthermore, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is performed regardless of whether the control is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is not necessary to determine which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the settings change mode and the settings confirmation mode. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of a security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is started in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the game, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, a common value (1000 ms) is sent to the security signal in the case where the control is in the setting change mode and in the case where the control is in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and output end control of the security signal are made common between when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting change mode, it is difficult to select which mode the external device is in. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the system is being controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is sent in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770, which will be described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000ms. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in Figure 9-9 (2). If the control is in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode ends. This is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode, and if the setting change mode has been controlled, the timing is the time when 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, if the control is in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the security signal timer value is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is allowed. In processing (for example, information output processing), if the security signal continues to be output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (this is the case when RAM is cleared, (When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000ms to 0ms in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after the interrupt is permitted. The security signal will continue to be output until In addition, when the control is in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer changes for a predetermined period of time (1000ms or 30000ms) before proceeding to the gaming control timer interrupt process. ) to 0ms, and after the output of the security signal is finished, the game control timer interrupt processing may be started.

In this way, the security signal will continue to be output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have passed after the control in the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the output control of the security signal and to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to determine whether the external device is controlled to setting confirmation mode without executing initialization processing, or whether it is controlled to setting change mode after initialization processing is executed. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered without initialization processing being executed, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been set. It is possible to estimate that the setting change mode may have been controlled by executing the conversion process.

Note that the security signal is also output when the abnormality detection sensor detects a game stoppage error such as a magnetic abnormality. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (an area cleared by initialization processing) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored, a security signal is output for 4 minutes.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clearing is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output process and remains set. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to not limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until one second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is selected when the power is restored, the RAM will be cleared, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (when the power is turned off). As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have elapsed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but this is not the only option. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common value of 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Since the setting changing flag is cleared, if the power is cut off after this point, it will be determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in a setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if the device is not controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of setting values is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly transferred to the image on the performance control CPU 120 side. If it is displayed on the display device 5, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command plus 1 as the setting value (1 to 6), and Within the range, an effect that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 is not limited to this form, and the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command, and performs production control. The information may also be sent to the CPU 120 for personal use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 side displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as is, or executes an effect that suggests the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the setting value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Furthermore, it is not necessary for the performance control CPU 120 to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control burden on the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, the setting value can be suggested by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), which means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4010). YES in S21TM4020), and there is no power outage during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to perform processing at the time of power-off recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt process (special (including pattern processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the setting confirmation mode control ends, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clearing, a backup command is sent as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and a transition is made to normal game processing.

Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the performance control CPU 120 determines that recovery from the power outage has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply interruption (RAM has not been cleared). Recognize the following: Upon receiving the backup command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 have been restored from the power outage based on the data at the time of power supply stoppage. It is possible to notify that the RAM has not been cleared.

On the other hand, the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), which means that RAM clear was set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it was decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to perform power-on processing that involves clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After permission for interruption, it is sufficient to proceed to game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop, which is stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is is set, but the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and remain unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, the area where each aggregate value (gaming information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each aggregate value for each setting value is not cleared. The value remains unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that by the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating random numbers for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized. It may be initialized to . Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) may be left as is.

The reason why the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting value storage area is not controlled by the setting change mode, the normal value will not be stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the value in the setting change mode is This is because a normal value is stored due to the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 in a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Through the processing in step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of prize balls, a special symbol process flag, etc., are set to flags for selectively processing according to the control state. Initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, a jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process was performed when the power was turned on (or when the setting change mode ended) (step S21TM1460). Based on the reception of this initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the initialization process has been performed (RAM clearing has been performed without recovery from power outage based on the data at the time of power supply interruption). be aware of what happened). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the game state etc. have been initialized in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data at the time of power supply stop). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from a power outage based on the following.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value of the security signal timer (1 second) that was set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Furthermore, if RAM clearing is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if RAM clearing is not executed (including when controlled to setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. It remains as it is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal will be output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a setting process for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, it is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, it is set to the interrupt enabled state. settings (step S21TM1540). Thereby, the game control timer interrupt process is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this example, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a jackpot, or a random number for determining whether to set it as a reach when it is not a jackpot, and is a random number for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this example, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number to A game control process that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices provided in the game machine, such as the performance display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device) by itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming machine control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination When the counter is incremented by the number of numeric values between the minimum and maximum possible values), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. The process moves to the power-off recovery process without confirmation (regardless of the status of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), but the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). ), the process may be shifted to the processing at the time of power-off recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without checking (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process moves to the power-on process (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)), but in this form, However, if it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the condition is that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may proceed to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As shown above, the clerk of the game parlor, etc., turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when turning on the power, thereby putting the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control the game, it is also possible to initialize the gaming state, etc. (to execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also control the gaming state etc. It becomes possible to not initialize the RAM clear flag (not to set the RAM clear flag to 1 by making a NO determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). In this way, the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state, etc. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting values are unstable. There is a possibility that the setting value that the game parlor is trying to confirm is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal gaming process based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), but puts the game in a stopped state (step A loop process from S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to the control to the gaming stop state (step S21TM4220).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from starting with unstable set values (the timer interrupt processing for game control is executed), and also to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. When a power failure occurs, it is possible to notify an external device that the controller is in the setting change mode.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the conditions ( If all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES, a set value abnormality error command is sent (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is activated in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error message is displayed in 21TM029 by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality has occurred to the clerk at the game hall (in the setting change mode). This clearly indicates that a power outage may have occurred while the system was under control. In addition, upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a message on the image display device 5 saying, "Please turn the power back on after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." A store clerk, etc., must first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF), and then when the power is turned back on (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON), the operation is to change the settings by changing the settings to the setting change mode. A notification is sent to prompt the user to perform the following steps (confirm the setting value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are satisfied, that is, (i) when the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If the determination is YES), the setting change mode is entered. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. "Please move to setting change mode") will not be performed.

Here, the production control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) confirms that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the setting value can be changed. For example, it is possible to display a message on the image display device 5 such as "You are in setting change mode" or "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value." As a result, the staff of the game hall can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing it to the planned setting value, the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are not satisfied, that is, if any of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is not controlled to the setting change mode, but is controlled to the gaming stop state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the setting value abnormal error command (step S21TM4190). . As a result, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. ”) will also be performed.

In this way, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. ”) is also performed, the condition of the gaming machine is that even though the power was cut off during the settings change mode, the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode after the power is restored are It will be reported that the condition is not established. In this case, the staff at the gaming parlor understands that the game is not being controlled by the setting change mode and is in a stopped state (it is necessary to turn the power back on to change the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off, the power is turned on again by performing operations such that conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to this state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

In this way, if a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in case (a) where the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met when the power is restored, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. This means that the setting change mode is automatically entered without being interrupted, and unnecessary error displays can be avoided and changes to the setting values can be appropriately prompted.

On the other hand, in case (b) where the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode are not met when the power is restored, the system cannot transition to the settings change mode when the power is restored even though a power outage occurred during the settings change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly controlled to a stopped state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is It will be done. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not determined, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

Note that if the settings change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), if all of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the settings change mode are satisfied, and if the transition condition (i) ) to (iii) may not hold, a different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition conditions are met, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been transitioned to setting change mode (or the conditions for transition are satisfied). When the production control CPU 120 receives this command, it displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "You will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode" as an image. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to send the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to normal game processing occurs, when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the performance control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch )21TM052 is operated (changed from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from game control microcomputer 100 to production control CPU 120.

The production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation to change the setting value has been performed even though the setting value has not been set, and to notify that fact. For example, on the basis of receiving a lock switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Lock switch operation has been detected" on the image display device 5. Furthermore, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, game parlor staff, etc. can clearly understand that an operation has been performed to change the setting value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can prevent fraud. You can check whether this is being done.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to normal game processing, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated or not. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without checking whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for checking the setting value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine slot 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120); ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the setting change mode is entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not only in this form, but as shown in Figure 9-11, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are met. It is also possible to set the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150) and shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether this is true.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the settings are changed. The process is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of a game machine when a power outage occurs during a change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is set (NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed.) On the other hand, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether the three conditions are met or not, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the control is in the settings change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are applied based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically being controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting value is established, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for determining the set value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting It will be controlled by the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the clerk at the game parlor who has performed the operation to change the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the conditions for starting control in the setting change mode are determined depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode are different, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common, thereby clarifying the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode. The game is appropriately transitioned to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be provided. good. For example, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150, and sends a setting value abnormal error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). After receiving the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), the production control CPU 120 says, "Turn the lock switch ON once, and then switch it OFF after changing the set value." The message may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIG. 9-11, it is not possible to proceed to the normal game process while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine manufacturer ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), it is possible to set the setting change flag in advance. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when installing the pachinko game machine 1 at a game parlor, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform a setting change operation, and take measures to confirm the set value.

(Set value memory control in case of power outage while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing a setting value will be explained using FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode). This will be explained using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "1" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is set to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. "2" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the set value after the change. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area becomes "1". is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the setting value storage area. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Note that when the power is turned on in order 6, the setting change flag is set, so when applying the control shown in Figure 9-11, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in order 6 and order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored, , the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting values may have already been set, and in this case, the arcade staff can exit the setting change mode without having to perform an operation to change the setting values again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to normal game processing by using the above command, work efficiency can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value change operation is performed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), This will be explained using FIG. 9-12 (2).

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and their explanation will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, an operation is performed to turn off the power switch 21TM055, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the settings change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the settings change mode control ends. In either case, when the power is restored, the setting values that have been changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , is a valid setting value (the setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the storage control of setting values is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 9-12. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is activated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed based on the fact that an operation for switching from the state to the OFF state has been performed. It's okay. In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. According to the change in the setting value stored in the display monitor 21TM029, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 will also change.

With such a configuration, even if the power is turned on and the setting change mode is activated and a setting change operation is performed (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the settings will not be changed. If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 will be lost to the power supply. This means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area when the power was last turned on are still held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was last turned on. The value corresponds to the setting value that was previously set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value in the event that power is cut off while the device is controlled in the setting change mode. Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, changes to the set value can be restricted.

The controls related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiments are provided for a gaming machine that has a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) and has different jackpot probabilities depending on the setting values. This is applicable, but is not limited to this.Although multiple setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is the same regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5) It is also applicable to gaming machines (where the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Furthermore, the following invention is disclosed in this feature section 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Furthermore, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding gaming machines such as those described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), when changing setting values, etc., it is necessary for the external device to understand the control state related to the settings. However, even if the conventional gaming machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to understand this. be. The inventions related to means O1 to means O4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the settings.

The gaming machine of means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed, and a setting value that can be checked. a setting confirmation mode control means (a gaming control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode, and a control means for controlling either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A specific signal output means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that outputs the security signal in step S21TM4560) outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start, and a value related to the period during which the specific signal is output (security signal timer). (a gaming control microcomputer 100 that sets the value of the security signal timer), and the setting means is controlled in the setting change mode and in the setting confirmation mode. (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and the specific signal output means can set a common predetermined value in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In response to the end of the control, a specific signal is output until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value has elapsed (according to the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continued until one second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode). (The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.) According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the settings can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is the gaming machine of means O1, and initializes the gaming state (step S21TM4050, RAM clear based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4150 (step S21TM1410)) (100), the initializing means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means sets the time period to be longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. A specific value corresponding to a long period can be set (30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 when RAM clearing is executed), and the specific signal output means is configured to change the setting. In response to the end of mode control, a specific signal is output until the period corresponding to the specific value has elapsed (as the setting change mode ends, the security signal continues until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode) ). According to this, a specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when control in the setting change mode ends and when control in the setting confirmation mode ends, and when the setting change mode ends. When the mode is controlled, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so while the setting process by the setting means is standardized, different outputs are output in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to set a period.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is the gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680) is performed. If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without detection), the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) that stores specific information (setting change flag) is used to detect the transition to setting change mode. Based on this, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580, and based on the completion of the setting changing mode, the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM4720. is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the game is stopped. and output a specific signal (based on the fact that the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are not met, the processes of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off). shall be. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is any gaming machine selected from the means O1 to O3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the performance, and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step The game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of S21TM4620) and the setting change mode in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF without performing any specific operation to end the setting change mode (step S21TM4680) Specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102, set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that sets a changing flag and clears the changing setting flag in step S21TM4720 based on the completion of the setting change mode, and starts supplying power to the gaming machine. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), an error notification is displayed on the display means. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210). In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the set value (the image display device 5 may display a message "Restart the power after the power is turned off"). Please enter the settings change mode.'' According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to means P1 to means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It is about providing.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is restored) (If it is determined in step S21TM4030 that the setting change flag is set), an error notification means that can execute error notification (if the conditions for transition to the setting change mode are not met, an error notification is issued in step S21TM4210) It is characterized by further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that performs display. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is the gaming machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state). , the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), the setting change mode can be controlled, and power supply to the gaming machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the setting change condition is satisfied. (Based on the fact that all of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are determined to be YES when the power is turned on, (The setting change mode is entered without proceeding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.) According to this, when the conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is controlled without executing an error notification, thereby avoiding unnecessary error notifications and appropriately changing the setting value. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is the gaming machine of means P1 or means P2, and when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (power supply If it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery), it is possible to execute the error notification and place the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, it is possible to enter the setting change mode). If the transition condition is not satisfied (if the determination is NO in any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140), the process transitions to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode.) It is characterized by According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any gaming machine selected from the means P1 to P3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that controls the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the performance, and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The game machine comprises the setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means, and when power supply to the game machine is started. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is executed on the display unit. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormal error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210). In response to receiving the error command, the production control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the set value (the image display device 5 displays the message "Turn the power back on after turning off the power"), in response to receiving the error command. Please enter setting change mode.'' According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to Means Q1 to Means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It's about doing.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (such as jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( (The value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the setting changing mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). , regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met, that is, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. , automatically controls the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state. It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM It may further include a game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is the gaming machine of means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change condition being satisfied (if the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame is 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. is controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is met (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set. (The setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether the conditions for transition are met or not.) According to this, if a power outage occurs during setting change mode control, based on the fact that specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode will be activated even when the setting change conditions are not met. Since it is controlled, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q3 is the gaming machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the setting is being changed). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (setting) 21TM052 is in the ON state, RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends). and the setting change mode is terminated based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change in progress flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started). ), erases the specific information when the settings change mode ends based on the specific operation (clears the settings change flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the settings change mode control ends), and changes the settings. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the mode control means is configured to select the setting change mode when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. (If the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the mode is automatically setting change mode), and terminating the setting change mode based on the specific operation (terminating the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). It is characterized by According to this, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (6 levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). It is equipped with a storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which setting values are stored), and is capable of executing control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means. Yes, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610) (to change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode ( The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680), and the setting value storage means stores the specified operation when the setting change mode is controlled. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without being executed, the setting values changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode are continuously stored (the setting value storage area is the backup area of the RAM 102). If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area will be changed. Even if a power outage occurs, the set value changed by the change operation is retained. According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value according to the setting value is stored in the setting value storage means. Since control is executed, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). It is equipped with a storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which setting values are stored), and can execute control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means. The setting change mode control means performs a change operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area). changing only the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting values that have been set), and changing the setting values stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the changing operation. At the same time, the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is transferred to the setting value storage area). (the setting value is stored in the gaming machine to confirm it as a valid setting value and terminate the setting change mode), and the setting value storage means stores the setting value in the game machine without performing the specific operation when the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode. When the power supply is stopped, the setting value before the changing operation is performed in the setting change mode is memorized (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch If the 21TM051 is not turned off, the setting values themselves stored in the setting value storage area will not be changed, so if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode, the setting values before being controlled to the setting change mode will be changed. is characterized by being retained). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming states in this feature section 052IW include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) where small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state, and in this characteristic part 052IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). There are two cases: controlled to a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , and may be controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

Among the KT states, in the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is open for an extremely long time, and a small hit is likely to occur. Even if this occurs, there are extremely few cases in which a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, when the first special symbol changes, the percentage of small hits is determined to be low, while when the second special symbol changes, the percentage of small wins is determined to be high (however, as will be described later). (excluding the case of a forced loss), the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits occur frequently mainly by changing the second special symbol, resulting in a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for making the KT state a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal symbol is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may also be possible to create a gaming state in which it is easier to win a small hit.

In addition, this feature section 052IW is configured such that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until it reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group that forms the falling path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in this characteristic part 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Since this is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, if one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, The game balls can be entered into the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this feature part 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, the grand prize opening which becomes the winning area is brought into the open state. The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won in the big winning hole is further guided to a guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 052IW100 further branches into two routes 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the ejection area 052IW105 and is detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left route 052IW102, and when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game guided to the guiding route 052IW100 The ball enters the left path 052IW102 and can enter the V area 052IW104. Further, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right side path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, and after the jackpot game ends. Controlled in a variable state.

Note that the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that there is a large winning opening input/output mismatch error, and the configuration may be configured to notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine that there is a large winning hole input/output mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this feature section 052IW. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 81 for the big prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize opening, it is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and small win probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

First, using FIG. 10-3, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-3 (A), in the non-probability variable state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

Next, using FIG. 10-4, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-4 (A), in the variable probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. However, in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-4), the small hit is smaller than when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-3). The winning probability is approximately 10 times higher (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the same as the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the first special symbol). (more than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability will vary as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B). By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the setting values "1" to "6" (Fig. -3 and as shown in Figure 10-4, there is no set value for which the probability of failure is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in Figures 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" , the probability of failure is different).

Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of failure is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to failure). For example, with the setting value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the configuration may be such that the determination value corresponding to the loss is not included.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include a judgment value corresponding to a small win). For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in Figures 10-3 (A) and (B) and Figures 10-4 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the variable probability state (high probability state) and the variable probability state (low probability state). The probabilities of winning and losing are different, but the probability of a small hit is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state) because the probability of a jackpot is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state). It is also possible to lower the probability of failure and match the probability of failure. Furthermore, even if the set values are different, for example "1" and "2", the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be made to match each other. As a result, in gaming machines that have less than 6 actual settable stages or where there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, the hardware/software configuration of gaming machines with a 6-step setting change function and can be standardized, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the type of jackpot as "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R regular jackpot", " This is a table that is referred to in order to determine either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", or "10R probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", A ``10R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 9%, a ``6R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 56% probability, and a ``6R regular jackpot'' is determined with a 35% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", has a 10% probability of determining a "10R probability variable jackpot", a 50% probability of determining a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% probability of determining a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% probability of " 2R Normal Jackpot”.

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Moreover, the "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds, and then shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of a "10R definite strange jackpot", "6R sure strange jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds) passes in each round of the jackpot game. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a fixed number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to enter a maximum of 10 winning holes in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R guaranteed strange jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when ending the jackpot game, it is controlled to be in either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state depending on the gaming state before the jackpot game and the jackpot type. The manner of transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table determines the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. ” or “Small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", "Small win A" is determined with 100% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this feature part 052IW, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, is determined to be "small win B" with a probability of 70%, and determined to be "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small win A", the special winning opening is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see Figure 10-12), and the small win game There is almost no expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize opening. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characteristic portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the production control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, there are nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. Thirty-four types, #01 to #34, are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the variation pattern #n (n=01-09 or 01-34) is used, it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-7 (A) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variable patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the The first special symbol variation pattern table for the KT time shown in the table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variable patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-8 (C) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variable patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss, the second fluctuation pattern #01 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a small hit is determined, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a fairly long period of time, such as 5 minutes.

In this feature part 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by entering the game ball into the special winning hole. I end up. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variable display is By reducing this, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is reduced, thereby preventing a situation where players are targeted to obtain prize balls due to small hits even though they are in a non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small winnings" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small winning frequency per unit time. The rate of occurrence is higher than normal.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time will be changed even if it is a jackpot. By making the time period relatively long at 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally aiming for the prize ball by entering the special prize opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a jackpot, it is not necessary to take as long to digest the first retention memory as compared to the case of a small win, so the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small win. There is.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state will be terminated. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-8(D) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is executed. determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #04, which is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, is selected. It is determined. In addition, when determining a small win as the first variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #05 (second starting prize opening opening), which has a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds for a small win, Preparatory variation pattern) is determined. In this feature part 052IW, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, special variable winnings are actually achieved. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so that prizes are rarely won. However, in the state immediately after transitioning to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball immediately If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, and enabling winning to the special winning opening. This prevents the occurrence of a situation where more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

Also, if you want to execute the 2nd to 49th variation display after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, then The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second to 49th variations in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 are It will be decided either way. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/1st KT state are unsuccessful, the second fluctuation pattern # of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shorter variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second, may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, if a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the variation pattern is even shorter with a variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of the shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Furthermore, when determining a jackpot as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after completing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the 50th variation display (i.e., the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/1st KT time and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 determined.

In this feature section 052IW, when controlled to the low probability/first KT state, for example, text such as "Chance Time in progress" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 with the end display that performs the above is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a jackpot as the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" A second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display is determined.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in Figure 10-7, if the first special symbol fluctuates and hits the jackpot during the KT state, the first fluctuating pattern #07 with a fluctuating time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to make a decision. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is made to be a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced miss, forced misses occur frequently despite the second KT state, and the player receives a small hit. You will not receive any benefit from it. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol a short fluctuation time, the transition to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before forced misses occur frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature part 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first If the machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly missed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol's jackpot during the KT state. may be set to a long variable time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is made the same short fluctuation time as the loss, the player You will not be able to receive any profits from small winnings. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol during the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there will be enough time for the small hit to occur at least multiple times. (for example, 1 minute).

When performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state A variation pattern table is selected depending on the number of times. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-9(G) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 determined.

As with the first fluctuation of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state The second variation pattern #17, which is a short variation of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Furthermore, even when a small win is determined as the first fluctuation in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the second starting prize opening (second fluctuation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if you want to display the second and subsequent fluctuations after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, the high probability shown in Figure 10-9 (H) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for probability/first KT and after the second fluctuation is selected and a fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 Determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (H), when determining that it is a failure after the 2nd fluctuation of the high probability/1st KT state, The second variation pattern #22 of a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a short variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the short variation pattern #25 with an even shorter variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #26 may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. In addition, when determining a jackpot after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9(I) is are selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, one of the second variable patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #29 of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern #30, which is a normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds may be determined, or the normal variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds. The second variation pattern #33 may be determined. Furthermore, when determining a jackpot in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variable pattern, more specifically, it is determined whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, and which fluctuation pattern to use is determined. Figure 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9 (I). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature part 052IW, when executing a variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, and when executing a variable display resulting in a small hit, , regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortening variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a fluctuation pattern table in the case where the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability/second KT state is shown. The other fluctuation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each fluctuation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed with high probability in the second KT state. Although a case is shown in which the configuration is configured to be executed in For example, it may be configured to perform a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in the case of a low probability state, and to perform a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the case of a high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be explained. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using Figure 10-11 (1), special variable winning balls when controlled by jackpot games based on 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "probability variable jackpot") The opening pattern of the device 7 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, as shown in Figure 10-11 (1), when the second game ball enters the jackpot in the first round, solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the first round, a special prize will be awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (1). When the variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection effective period, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 This is the period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) has elapsed after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), release of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot") Explain patterns. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball into the jackpot in the first round is detected, solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for a very short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the big prize opening, a special prize is awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (2). The variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is after an extremely short opening period (in this example, 0.02 seconds) of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101. The period is set as a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is likely to be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on normal jackpots.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be explained. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Moreover, FIGS. 10-13 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Moreover, FIGS. 10-14 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 10-12(1) to FIG. 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2) ~FIG. 10-14 (2) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays a normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined that the symbol is a hit, the symbol that won is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined that the symbol is a loss, the symbol that is a loss is derived and displayed on the symbol display 20. be done. In this feature part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, the second starting winning hole is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable prize winning ball device 6B is kept open for 5.5 seconds, and game balls can be won in the second starting prize opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning opening (however, in the case of small win A, (Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is only open for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, you can hardly expect to win any prizes.) However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small wins are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning slot (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In addition, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. This is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where no fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed, and the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is already open because it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no fluctuation of the symbols is normally performed. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no normal symbol variation is likely to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays a normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined to be a hit, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be a miss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the regular symbol display 20. be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning hole is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is kept open for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and game balls can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second starting prize opening opening process is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, it is easier for game balls to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easier for game balls to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so even in the second KT state, it is hardly expected that the game ball will enter the special winning hole.

In addition, in the 2nd KT state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special prize opening and it is easy to get a prize ball, so in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and when in the 2nd KT state, it is called "small hit RUSH". ” will be displayed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is varied depending on which of the small winning types is the small winning A to C. Not limited to. For example, the number of openings of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small winning types A to C is the small winning type. In this case, for example, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is released only once during the small win game, whereas in the case of small win B or small win C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. For example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole ) may be configured to provide a small winning type in which a certain amount of game balls can be won, and various embodiments can be considered. Further, in this example, a case is shown in which there are three types of small winnings, small winnings A to C, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Good too.

In addition, in the present feature part 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no symbol fluctuation is normally performed. The game balls will reach the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no variation of the normal symbol to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the normal symbol process processing by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state in the normal symbol process process of step S26. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in the first KT state and the second KT state, each 0.2 seconds, and the time before the second starting prize opening opening process is the same in the first KT state and the second KT state. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the 2nd KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by making the fluctuation time and symbol confirmation time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by setting the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winnings to the special winning hole in the first KT state. .

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set to control the high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be open for a long time. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, the variable winning ball device 6B is released as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). Controlled to shorten the time.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, If the variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14(1) is controlled with the first opening pattern (long opening) in which it is opened for a long time, and the special flag is not set, then The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be controlled not to be set in other states including the jackpot gaming state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be configured to be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop among the 50 special symbol shortening fluctuation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, when the left-handed hit notification is performed after the low probability/first KT state ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is open long. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, when configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is also possible to use a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, if the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability/non-KT state (left-handed hitting state), it is only necessary to perform a firing operation for a few game balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, making it possible to capture the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning hole becomes able to win). On the other hand, in this feature part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbols, the variable winning ball device 6B is released after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the element of capture based on the firing operation aiming at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of symbols. Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the production control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a loss. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 specification command (10R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 specification command (6R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command (6R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 specification command (2R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 specification command (2R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is a performance control command (display result 7 designation command (small win designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a small win.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the performance control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is It can be determined that the display result designation command is for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result specifying command, but instead corresponds to each of 10R probability variable jackpot/6R probability variation jackpot/6R normal jackpot/2R probability variation jackpot/2R normal jackpot/small hit/miss. A variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has ended. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has started.

Command A000 (H) is a performance control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a performance control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command BXXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Among them, B000(H) is a performance control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. B001(H) is a performance control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game. B004(H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. B005(H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is a production control command (first effective starting winning designation command) that indicates that a game ball has won in the first starting winning opening in a state where the first pending storage number has not reached 4. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective starting winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending storage number has not reached 4. Note that a command indicating the first pending memory number may be transmitted as the first valid starting prize designation command, and a command indicating the second pending memory number as the second valid starting prize designating command, but this feature section 052IW Here, the first valid starting winning designation command and the second valid starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a performance control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting state) that specifies the first customer waiting state (a state in which the first special symbol has not changed and the first pending memory has not been stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Command D001 (H) is a performance control command (second customer waiting state) that specifies a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second pending memory is not stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Note that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the KT state.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, if the setting value is set to "6", command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the tone number data is output to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Incidentally, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is a state where the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first pending storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage counter is checked. If the first pending storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and stores it in the RAM 102. (step 052IWS53A), decreases the value of the first pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the first pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the first pending memory number = n-. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted. In addition, in this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number are The extracted order is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). Note that in this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55A, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when executed.

Note that the timing at which the set value command is sent is not limited to that shown in this example; for example, the set value command may be configured to be sent every time the fluctuation display ends, or the set value command may be transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may also be configured to do so.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, if the variable probability flag and high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability/non-KT, and the low probability/non-KT background specification command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability/first KT and a low probability/first KT background specification command is issued, and if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability/first KT. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the state is high probability/second KT and the high probability/second KT background specification command is issued. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot change, the process moves to step 052IWS69A without performing the processes after step 052IWS58A. Thereby, when the first special symbol starts changing during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the system is configured to forcibly result in a loss regardless of whether or not the jackpot judgment value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57A, a random number (fixed value) is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59A, when the starting prize is won, It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot at step 052IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing at steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A Move to.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small win (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that it will be a small win based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0", step 052IWS75A is determined. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73A). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed when the high probability is low at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot. /High base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled and fluctuation display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and a transition is made to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed hitting notification and continues the right-handed hitting state, and although the high base state has ended as a gaming state, the same fluctuation reduction as the first KT state This flag is used to set the same performance background as the first KT state.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A and the process of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, the high base state is established due to the start of variation of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, does the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variable display) end? , or the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortening state is configured to end. This is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the special symbol time-saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is under control for shortening is set. (Step 052 IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, by setting the special symbol time saving flag and performing shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it becomes more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Figure 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-7(A) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 will be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer, and sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time to the first fluctuation time timer. At the same time as starting measurement of (step 052IWS1705A), variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the production control CPU 120. The IWS 1121A performs control to transmit data to the IWS 1121A (Step 052).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not a second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the first jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is ended as is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, 6R normal jackpot) is in progress (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the performance control CPU 120 to display the first forced symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic section 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, If the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example) is in progress, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the first special symbol is forced to discontinue the fluctuation display, the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129A. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot). If the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, the first special symbol variation process is immediately terminated (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is Based on the small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120A is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the first variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The updating of is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is executed, Even if there is, the first special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the first fluctuation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-hand hitting lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performed the right-hand hitting operation is advantageous to the player, and the right hit indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but the 50th variation display is performed by executing the processes of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability/first KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A, S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. At this time, the right-hand hitting indicator 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In addition, in this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the forced symbol will be sent as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the decision result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot is to be started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

In addition, in this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the right hit It may be configured to start lighting the indicator 26.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

In addition, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. However, as already explained, when there is a small win in the variable display of the first special symbol, there is only a case where the small win type is small win A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hand hit display 26 is not turned on, and the right-hand hit lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-hitting notification that prompts the player to operate the game ball to the right of the gaming area. There is. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a firing promotion notification that urges the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right hit notification. You can leave it there.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and firing promotion notification will not be executed, and if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening in that state, the right hit notification and firing promotion notification will be issued. (In this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the variable display of the first special symbol will not start immediately and will become the first pending memory.) It may be configured as follows.

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Accordingly, it may be configured to provide a left-handed hit notification to the player to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area. On the other hand, when a winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole or special winning hole is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is high (for example, loud sound output or The configuration may be such that the player is notified of the left-handed hit using a large screen display. With such a configuration, accurate firing notification can be performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right of the gaming area, a slight left-handed notification is sent to the player in a manner in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, it may be configured such that the left-handed player is notified in a manner that increases the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation can be prompted by a clerk at the game parlor to return to a left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, it may be configured such that a left-handed hit notification is performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning hole, or the special winning hole reaches a certain number. In addition, at the passage gate 41, if a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed hit notification will be provided, and at the second start prize opening or special prize opening, the game ball will be hit more than a predetermined number of times. It may also be configured such that the left-handed hit notification is performed when a small specific number (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is met, but when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the entry to the passage gate 41, the second starting prize opening, or the special winning opening. When it is detected that a winning game ball has been won, the demonstration display that has been being executed may be terminated and a left-handed hit notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state where the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second pending storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage counter is checked. If the second pending storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102, and (step 052 IWS53B), decreases the value of the second pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the second pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the second pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55B, but a setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when executed.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). In addition, the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, the process moves to step 052IWS69B without performing the processes after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the second special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the system is configured such that the jackpot is forcibly missed regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, it is possible to It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of whether a random number for determining a hit has been obtained.

For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), the process moves to step 052 IWS69B.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it will be a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68B). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win B or small win C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", it moves to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is similar to the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as step 052IWS1700A, and checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-8(C) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes the fluctuation according to whether the probability fluctuation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, select one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I). For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (D) If it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (F). Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation shown in Figure 10-9 (G) Select a pattern table, and if it is the second variation or later, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the decision result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to send a second symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). . It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends immediately.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 2R guaranteed variable jackpots (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is in progress (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in this case, if the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature section 052IW, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is being executed, or when it becomes a small hit. If the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot) is in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed, the variation of the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129B. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, resulting in a 2R guaranteed strange jackpot), the second special symbol variation process is ended (see Y in step 052 IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol Based on the symbol fluctuation display becoming a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120B is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the second variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and updating of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and while the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a loss or a small hit, Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the second variable The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, the remaining second pending memory can be used in the normal state after the first KT state (after the time saving state has ended), and a jackpot can occur at an unintended timing when the player is not present. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( In a gaming machine configured to have a starting prize opening (not a variable winning ball device) and configured to transition to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) , a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above. In this case, as the fluctuating efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol also increases, but along with this, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is forced to miss. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot at an unintended timing when the player is not present. I can do it.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In addition, in this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol fluctuation process, the command will be forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small win flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time-saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hand display 26 (step 052 IWS2024B), and also controls the production control CPU 120 to Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, lighting of the right hit indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 should already be lit if the player is in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts to light up redundantly. It is configured not to perform processing such as sending a right-handed lighting start designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessories control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before jackpot opening (step 052IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds. ” (Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether a detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process ends immediately. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, high base flag, and special map time saving flag, if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passing waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to proceed to a jackpot game on the condition that a ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether the first count switch 23 is in the on state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a large winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state, that is, if a game ball entering the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the winning prize counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning prize counter is 10, the process moves to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the prize winning counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big prize opening (step 052 IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (Step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends immediately.

If the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or if the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 controls the drive of the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. The game is stopped and the big prize opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big winning hole to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052 IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2202. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). The value is set (step 052 IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). In addition, whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (high probability probability/second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variable jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). In addition, whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R variable jackpot, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the jackpot game (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

If it is not a 6R definite strange jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052 IWS2212), and also sets the special symbol time saving flag. and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it will be controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small winning end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing the small winning end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052 IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small winning end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right hit indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed player indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 052 IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed player lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up at the start of the small win game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). By executing the processing in steps 052IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-hand hit indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of gaming state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in this feature section 052IW. First, in this feature part 052IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings to the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/low probability/low probability jackpot after the jackpot game ends. The state shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), this feature section 052IW allows the player to aim at the right side of the gaming area. to launch the game ball (hitting to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings to the second starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of a 6R variable jackpot is 50% (see Figure 10-5), so once the high probability/high When it comes to the base state, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see Figures 10-5 (D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and becomes a low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and the fluctuating display ends 50 times, as shown in Figure 10-29. As shown, the state shifts to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is 15. % (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 15%. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability will be reached after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol is fluctuating at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be executed. In this case, if a 10R variable jackpot or a 2R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this will be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained where the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this will be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be explained. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage process (step 052IWS5113).

In this feature section 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol and before starting the jackpot game? Regardless of whether or not the gate passage designation command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether or not the game is in the gate passage waiting state, if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage process in step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, a variable display of symbols is executed, but the display is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the game ball is not in the waiting state to pass through the gate, a variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the waiting state to pass through the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol is displayed. The configuration may be such that the variable display is not performed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed within the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), after the process of detecting the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the activation area is performed, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is detected. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052 IWS5113): The CPU 103 determines that the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4)). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1. In addition, the LED of the ordinary card reservation display 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage memory counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and performs processing to store it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, when the normal symbol If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner on the display 20 and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the process of opening or closing based on the symbol being derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20), the gate passing memory is Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is checked. If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not it is a hit (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is to be a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory release pre-release time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time to the ordinary symbol process timer, and is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory actuation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory activation process (Step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052 IWS5121), the process is immediately terminated. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is transferred to the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate passage memories are extracted is always in the order of gate passage memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on random numbers (random numbers for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol). (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly performs 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state. It is decided that the probability will be a normal symbol hit.

In step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is within the winning range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and moves to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and moves to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time (Y, S5131 of step 052IWS5130). Further, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3702), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127 if the symbol is a winning symbol). (Step 052IWS3703) In addition, whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether that flag is set. I can do it.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a miss symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 052IWS3706). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the release of the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts -1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory is released has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , if it is set, that is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3805). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is more difficult to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

In addition, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the control method for making it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic part 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to one time, whereas in the first KT state, the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two times. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning opening.

For example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above. It may also be executed in combination with control to increase the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to an open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessory activation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052 IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting value command (step 052IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052 IWS621 ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to perform a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value. For example, when starting the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624, normally the right-handed display with white display color is started, but if it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value is "1". If the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , when the setting value is "3", the yellow display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the orange display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate. If the setting value is ``5'', the right-handed hitting display with red display color will start, and if the setting value is ``6'', the right-handed hitting display will start at a relatively high rate. A right-handed display with rainbow display colors may be started.

Also, for example, the right-handed display may be configured to continue to be displayed during the KT state after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display may be changed and set at the timing of the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute a value suggestion performance.

Furthermore, for example, when transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state) after completing 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/first KT state, the left-handed display may be started; The setting value suggestion performance may be performed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the display. It is only necessary to configure the setting value suggestion performance to be executable when the control of the gaming state is switched in some form in this way.

If the received production control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a big winning hole opening display command (step 052 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 outputs a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole during the round of the jackpot game. The counter value is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a grand prize opening flag that specifies that the grand prize opening is open (during the round period during the jackpot game) (step 052IWS635).

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the big winning opening opening display command (timing of starting a round), so it is extremely rare. Even if an over-win is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the number-of-wins counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after the opening of the grand prize opening (step 052IWS636), the production control CPU 120 sets a post-opening flag of the grand prize opening which specifies that it is the interval period after the opening of the grand prize opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is displayed (step 052IWS643). Further, if set, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform an award for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game (excluding jackpot games based on 2R definite jackpot and 2R normal jackpot), or a game ball enters the special jackpot during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660, S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the game state changes to low probability/low probability/ After entering the high base state (low probability/first KT state), the value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the 50 fluctuating displays are completed and the state becomes low probability/low base state.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background specification command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is displayed (step 052IWS647). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state or the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is displayed (step 052IWS651). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is displayed (step 052IWS655). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a big winning opening prize designation command (step 052 IWS658), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R probability-variable jackpot, a 6R probability-variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). In addition, whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress can be determined, for example, by determining whether the value of the performance control process flag is from the jackpot performance process (step S176) to the ending performance process (step S177). ), and also check whether the display result specification commands stored in the display result specification command storage area are display result 2 specification commands to display result 4 specification commands. It can be determined by

If a jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS660). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 052IWS661). Note that the prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is awarded based on the occurrence of a prize in the jackpot during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the display of the number of prize balls are updated. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, if a prize is entered into the jackpot during a jackpot game based on a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball counter will not be updated, and the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing an over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS662). In addition, the "suggestion performance when over-winning" is a performance that is executed at the timing when an over-winning into the big winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion production process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion production (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "prize ball number display suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. This effect is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and indicates the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize pitch number emphasizing production process for determining and executing a prize pitch number emphasizing production (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize ball number emphasizing production" is a predetermined number of accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. (In this example, this is an effect that emphasizes that the number of pieces has reached 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, and 5000 pieces).

If the received performance control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the high probability/second KT state), the performance control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS667). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball are calculated based on the fact that a small hit occurred during the high probability/second KT state and a prize was entered into the special winning hole. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even if the ball is in the KT state, if a special winning occurs during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing the small winning winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). In addition, the "Suggestion performance when winning a small hit" is a performance that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a prize is entered into the special prize opening, and it is a performance that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 052IWS663 and executes a prize ball number display suggestion performance process (step 052IWS663). Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number emphasizing performance process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 052 IWS670 ). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestive effect processing when over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the over winning suggestion production process (step 052 IWS662). In the excessive winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the number of winnings counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning into the big winning opening has occurred), the production control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion production. A lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table to determine the presence or absence and type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-39, the over-winning suggestion performance determination table includes no over-winning suggestion performance, over-winning suggestion A, over-winning suggestion B, over-winning suggestion C, and over-winning suggestion performance C. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion performance D, the over-winning suggestion performance E, and the over-winning suggestion performance F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, “+15 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and the winning sound B, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a winning sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning sound D, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a winning sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" the current setting value is. In step 052IWS303, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the over winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "2", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the over winning suggestion effect F is determined to be relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the over winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, if the setting value is "2", it is 45%, if the setting value is "3", it is 50%, and the setting value When the setting value is "4", it is 55%, when the setting value is "5", it is 60%, and when the setting value is "6", it is 65%. In this way, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the proportion of decisions to execute the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high compared to the small hit winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS303 to execute the over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS304). If it has been decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS305). . For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to display a winning display in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the determined type of over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052 IWS302), or if it is determined that there will be no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052 IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 In step 052, IWS307, the winning display is controlled to be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestive performance processing when winning a small hit)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing the small hit winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS669). In the small hit winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion performance. The presence/absence and type of the suggestion presentation at the time of winning a small hit are determined (step 052 IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-41, the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table includes: no small hit winning suggestion performance, small winning winning suggestion performance A, small winning winning suggestion performance B, and small winning winning suggestion performance. Judgment values are assigned to C, small hit winning suggestion performance D, small winning winning suggestion performance E, and small winning winning suggestion performance F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker The winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound, is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, a winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, a winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and a sound D different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound will be output.

As shown in Figure 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is from ``1'' to ``6''. . In step 052IWS321, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance F is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, if the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance, which is the sum of the small winning winning suggestion performances A to F. is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, when the setting value is "2", it is 6%, when the setting value is "3", it is 7%, and when the setting value is "4", it is 6%. ”, it is 8%, when the setting value is “5”, it is 9%, and when the setting value is “6”, it is 10%. In this way, in this example, the proportion of decisions to execute the small hit winning suggestion presentation is relatively low compared to the over winning suggestion presentation described above.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS321 to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS322). If it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the small winning winning suggestion performance A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a winning display in a blue display color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a winning sound according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there will be no suggestion presentation when winning a small hit (N in step 052 IWS322), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a winning indication in the normal display color (in this example, white) on the image display device 5. (Step 052 IWS325). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

In addition, the reliability of the set value suggestion may be made different depending on when the over-winning suggestion performance is executed and when the small winning suggestion presentation is executed. For example, although over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any setting value of ``1'' to ``6'', it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is ``6''. It may be configured such that if the winning suggestion effect F is executed, the set value is determined to be "6". Conversely, for example, the small winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any setting value of "1" to "6", but it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is "6". On the other hand, the setting value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, for the over-winning suggestion effect and the small winning suggestion effect, the display format of the winning display (in this example, the display color) is different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although the case where execution is carried out according to the mode has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making either the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) or the winning sound different from the usual mode, an over-winning suggestion effect or a small winning award suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of lamps or LEDs at the timing of an over-winning or a winning in a special winning opening, it is possible to create a suggestion for over-winning or to win a small hit. It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Prize ball count display suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the award ball count display suggestion production process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion production process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table for determining whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance, and draws a lottery based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the award ball count display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when prize pitch display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance A is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS341), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS344, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when award ball count display suggestion effect B is executed, characters such as "555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of prize pitch number display suggestion performance B is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS344), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS347, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, characters such as "666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance C is determined with a probability of 1%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS347), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time ( Step 052IWS350). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the production control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance D. (Step 052 IWS352). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or higher than the set value "4", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS350), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS353). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize pitch number display suggestion production E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the award ball count display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value ``5'' is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS353), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS356). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect F is executed, characters such as "2666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion performance (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion performance A, control is performed to display characters such as "456 OVER" on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the jackpot game, the period during the jackpot game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the game progresses, the execution probability of the prize pitch display suggestion effect becomes lower to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased. In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-43, high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH
) Looking at the prize ball number display suggestion performances D to F that are executed during the period, as the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion production increases to 5%. , 3%, and 2%, while the accuracy of confirming the set value "4" or more, confirming the set value "5" or more, confirming the set value "6" and suggesting the set value is increasing. .

Note that the mode is not limited to the mode shown in this example, but for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured as desired. Further, for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of the setting value suggestion may be lowered.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, there are prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C that are executed during the jackpot game, and prize ball number display suggestions that are executed during the small hit RUSH period. Productions D to F show a case where the execution probabilities of the award pitch display suggestion production are different, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. It's okay.

(Processing to emphasize the number of prize pitches)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize pitch number emphasizing process (step 052IWS664). In the prize pitch number emphasizing production processing, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches a threshold value of 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) for the first time. (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS371, For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 1000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000 for the first time.

If the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches the threshold of every 1000 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize pitch number emphasizing performance determination table for determining whether or not to perform a prize pitch number emphasizing performance, and generates a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not there will be an emphasis on the number of prize pitches (step 052 IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, if the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000, execution of prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, characters such as "3000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, characters such as "4000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, characters such as "5000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS372 to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS373). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls emphasis effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, but such It is not limited to the form. For example, it is not necessary to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls in all of these cases, but to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000. may be configured. Further, for example, the system may be configured to be able to perform a presentation that emphasizes the number of prize balls even when the number of prize balls reaches 6,000 or 7,000, and various embodiments are possible.

As shown in Figures 10-44 and 10-45, the prize pitch count emphasizing performance is different from the prize pitch count display suggestion performance shown in Figures 10-42 and 10-43, and is unrelated to the current setting value. It is a performance that is decided and executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be configured to be able to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing performance in a manner that suggests the current setting value, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize pitch number emphasizing performance. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a different display color than usual.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a variable pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Note that whether or not a variation pattern command has been received can be determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received when a variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Then, in step 052IWS811, it may be checked whether the variable pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. (Step 052IWS813). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether If it is not the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the second variable pattern #01 to #34. This can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When this is executed and the state is KT, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed on the image display device 5 in response to a variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the KT state, or even when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the non-KT state. , the variable display of decorative patterns is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variable pattern command stored in the variable pattern command storage area specifying the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether or not it exists. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). In addition, to determine whether the current variable display is a small hit, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the performance control CPU 120 determines a non-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small win, there is only a case where the small win is A. I can hardly expect to win any prizes. Therefore, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display result 1 is a miss), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the left center right decorative pattern is a completely mismatched missed symbol or only the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. The matched reach determines the combination of missing symbols. In addition, when a display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 10R probability-variable jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Further, when a display result 3 designation command is received (when a 6R probability-variable jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left-center right decorative symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot), the combination of symbols in which the decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (if it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are even numbers. Determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that a small win is achieved), a combination of decorative symbols of the small win symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a failure (Step 052IWS924). To determine whether or not the current variable display is a failure, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. It can be determined by If there is no deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052 IWS924), the performance control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process to determine the presence or absence and type of a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of setting value suggestion performance. Determine the presence or absence and type of value suggestion performance.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-48, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes no setting value suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect B, setting value suggestion effect C, setting value suggestion effect D, and setting value. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion effect E and the setting value suggestion effect F.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. The execution rate is highest in certain cases. Further, the setting value suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined character image in green display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect C is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-48, the setting value `` 6", the execution rate is highest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 will send a small win RUSH indicating that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue. A small win RUSH continuous suggestion effect setting process is executed to determine the presence or absence and type of continuous suggestion effect (step 052 IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production determination table. As shown in Figure 10-49, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table includes the judgments for no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance, small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A, and small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B. A value has been assigned. The small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, for example. Further, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example.

As shown in Figure 10-49, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is highest, and when the setting value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. If the execution rate is the next highest and the set value is "3", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest and the set value is "4", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``5'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``6'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting lower.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-49, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance B has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the highest when the set value is "6", but when the set value is in the second KT state, the jackpot probability does not occur. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, a setting value of "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high expectation of continuation), and a setting value of "6" It can be said that a certain case is a set state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH) can be increased.

As explained above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without a jackpot occurring.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, so especially when the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, Expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) can be further increased.

Next, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used and whether to execute the set value suggestion production or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this step, a process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052 IWS928).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step 052 IWS930). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that when it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928, so that the decoration is The setting value suggestion effect is executed while the symbol is being displayed as a variation (while the symbol is being varied).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (while the loss fluctuates during the second KT state).

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer and starts the ornamental symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052 IWS8104). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the (Step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8112, the production control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. It is checked whether or not timeout has occurred (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the process data for standby performance (step 052IWS8116). Then, the production control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a miss, small hit, or variable jackpot. In this case, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuates and displays a small hit, and the second special symbol fluctuates and displays a miss, a small hit, or a probability-variable jackpot, during the small-win game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. The fact that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer times out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted and the first This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally 1 special The standby performance is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 is brought into a temporary stop state while the left-center right decorative pattern is shaken or slightly fluctuated.

Note that, for example, in the case where the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, etc., updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol The variable display is also stopped and displayed.

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052 IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9706. In this feature section 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, when executing the jackpot performance, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed to be displayed, but the jackpot effect has not yet been executed. The process moves to step 052IWS9706 without being executed.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the stop symbol display flag 2, which indicates that the small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9717. In this feature section 052IW, when a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, when executing the small hit performance, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed but the small win effect has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing any processing.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left center right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbol) is determined and displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing the symbol with a missed symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the performance control CPU 120 replaces the missed symbol with the missed symbol in step 052IWS9703. Performs control to confirm and display.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9704), the performance control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that has occurred this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). In addition, whether the jackpot type is a 10R certain variable jackpot, 6R certain variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot can be determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is one of the display result 2 designation command to display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if there is a jackpot, when starting a jackpot game based on a 2R probability-variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 052IWS9711). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9712), and inputs the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speakers 8L and 8R as presentation component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot symbol has not been confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed in the process in step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the performance control CPU 120 stops. Set symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 052IWS9719). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9720), and updates the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the production device (image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L and 8R as production components) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

If the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, if a losing symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the production control CPU 120 controls the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the performance period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot production process (see step S176). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the performance period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the performance period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and displays the performance device (image display device 5) according to the contents of process data n. , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) (step 052IWS954). For example, effects such as displaying that the jackpot ends or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the performance period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052 IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability-variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). In addition, whether it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. This can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, a prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. When the game ends, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Note that whether or not it is a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, In this example, if the prize ball number display has been displayed before the 2R probability variable jackpot, the prize ball number display will continue to be displayed, but the display will not be updated), and the high probability after the jackpot game ends. /The number of prize balls is displayed during the second KT state.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Example of production)
Next, the performance mode of the performance executed in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation. In this example, it is possible to perform the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of place. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative pattern, when the timing to execute the setting value suggestion effect is reached, ) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1). A value suggestion performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW002 in yellow on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2). Suggestive performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect E, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW003 in red on the image display device 5. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect C, and setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when executing setting value suggestion effect B, The predetermined character image is displayed in green, when setting value suggestion effect D is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in orange display color, and when setting value suggestion effect F is executed, a rainbow is displayed. A predetermined character image is displayed in different display colors.

In this example, depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern that is out of place and a setting value suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to tell the player which setting value is currently set. It can create a sense of expectation.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be explained. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance in the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is clearly displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative symbol during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case is shown where an image of a racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), a mode is adopted in which the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Accordingly, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. For example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the performance is executed or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue.

Next, the display mode of the right-handed hit notification will be explained. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of right-handed hit notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot or the variable display of the second special symbol executes and results in a jackpot, when a jackpot game is in progress, As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) lights up the right-handed display 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120 (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639 reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small hit, during the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically In this case, the CPU 103) lights up the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (see step 052IWS2024B). Furthermore, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2) (see step 052IWS2025B, S639). . However, unlike during a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-hand hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit occurs due to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hit notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation. Note that in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case is shown in which the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on a 10R variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jackpot in progress!" and round number displays such as "Round 2". Prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, if a normal prize (not an over-win) occurs in the jackpot during a jackpot game, the prize will be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white) as shown in Figure 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and based on the occurrence of the over-win, it is decided to execute the over-win suggestion performance. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the characters "+15") is displayed according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L , 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when over-winning suggestion performance A is executed, a winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and a winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), a character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award pitch number display suggestion effect A is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect B, "555" is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and prize pitch number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays “666
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in Figure 10-58 (F), a text display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning slot, but if it is not decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect, the process shown in Figure 10-58 As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the characters "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the winning sound is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning opening, and based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the special winning opening, a small winning winning suggestion presentation is performed. Assume that it has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the determined type of small winning winning suggestion effect, and the speaker From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small winning winning suggestion performance A is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), a character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect D, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, characters such as "2555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Although not shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, for example, execution of the prize pitch number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize pitches reaching 1000. In this case, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing effect B based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , prize pitch number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect C based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect D based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect E based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a jackpot game or a high probability/second KT state). Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios depending on the total game value awarded by the player, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F with different selection ratios. The system may be configured to perform the following, and various aspects are possible.

Next, control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be explained. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot (or a 6R probability variable jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (B). When this occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

During the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol will be a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot, a 6R definite variable jackpot, or a 2R definite variable jackpot, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in Figure 10-59 (D). will continue. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol will be stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (E). When this happens, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS1128B, see step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (F), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modification of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and sends a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. In FIG. 10-61, the processes in steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, the determination process in step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and sends a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-61, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is similar to the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (A), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (C), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (D), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 2. In FIG. 10-63, the processing in steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. In FIG. 10-64, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127D is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-64, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C, step 052IWS1129A).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D, step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, in addition to the methods shown in Modifications 1 and 2, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of one special symbol while the other special symbol is fluctuating, for example, If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

For example, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that will result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, the second special symbol will be forced to miss and stop, while the second special symbol will become a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is being executed is off and fluctuates, It may be configured such that the game is forced to stop regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, in this example, after 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/high base state, the transition to the low probability/low base state will occur (see Figure 10-29). When the fluctuating display ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state, 1 to 4 second pending memories are accumulated, and if there is a second pending memory that will be a jackpot, the game will be forced to stop. This can prevent you from hitting the jackpot at an unintended moment. In particular, in a gaming machine that is configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second starting prize opening where it is easy to win a starting prize is activated. It is also possible to have a winning strategy in which the first starting prize is won and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the first winning opening. This method is effective as a preventive measure.

As mentioned above, various aspects can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this feature section 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In addition, in modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 3, the determination processing in steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in Modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in Figures 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a miss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, the small hit symbol stops in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. When displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(D) and (F).

Also, as shown in Figure 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the winning symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in modification example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. Unlike FIG. 10-59(E), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

As shown in Figure 10-67, in Modification Example 3, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is forced to be displayed with a missed symbol. The control to stop and display is different.

In addition, in modification 3, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, the small winning symbol is forced to miss and stops, while the normal jackpot is In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display is continued, but this is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, on the contrary, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, is executed, the variable display will continue, while the normal jackpot will be displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcibly missed and stopped. Also, for example, if a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot is being executed (regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), the result will be forcibly removed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot), the change will occur. The display may be configured to continue. In this way, in some form, the control to force the stop to be forced to come off may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 4. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification example 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to Check whether it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130A is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot, The variable display of the first special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, in step 052IWS1128B, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot). checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130B is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131B, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a jackpot, The variable display of the second special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the modification 4, a case was shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in a probability variation state). I can't do it. For example, it may be configured to forcibly perform control to stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the special symbol time saving flag is set. Further, for example, it may be configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only when in a high probability/low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off). Any type of control may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol in accordance with the current gaming state.

In addition, if the configuration is configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only in the high probability/low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of one identification information from normally resulting in a jackpot, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small win RUSH) from being interrupted.

As explained above, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. be. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. Then, in response to a game medium (eg, a game ball) passing through a specific area (eg, a special winning opening), a setting suggestion performance (eg, a small hit winning suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

Specifically, in this example, the system is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect based on the game ball winning in the special winning slot during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH). However, during the small win RUSH, the frequency of winning is especially high in the special winning opening, so it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion performance (in this example, the suggestion performance when winning a small hit), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in a special prize opening as a specific area, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), general winning hole 10, or big winning hole as a specific area. good. Further, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the entry of a game ball into an out port as a specific area. Further, for example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable based on the game ball passing through gates such as the passing gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set the player to any one of a plurality of setting values (eg, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize pitch display suggestion effect), and the ease with which the setting suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, there is a 3% probability that the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a 2% probability that the prize ball display will be executed. It is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance B, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C. It is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion performance D with a probability of %, and when the number of award pitches reaches 2555, it is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion production E with a 3% probability, and the number of award pitches is 2666. When the number of balls is reached, it is possible to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F with a probability of 2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

In this example, the "length of the period during which the special state is controlled" is determined by the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion performance is executed during the period until a certain specific game value is awarded, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, "length of period controlled to special state" is the length of period controlled to advantageous state (in this example, jackpot gaming state), or controlled to special state (in this example, small winning gaming state). It may be the length of the period in which the period is set, or it may be the length of the total period.

In addition, when using the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to a special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the longer the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending of the jackpot is, the higher the rate of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds during a jackpot game, the prize ball number display suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than in a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may be the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. Accordingly, it may be configured to perform a prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the larger the number of small hits, the higher the rate of the award ball number display suggestion effect, or the greater the number of variable displays, the higher the rate of the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect. . Also, for example, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may vary. There are many possible ways.

Generally, when a game machine displays a message such as "XXXX OVER" when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number, it displays "1000 OVER" or the like shown in this example, which emphasizes the number of prize balls. The prize balls are displayed in units of a certain degree of limitation, such as in units of 1000 prize balls, such as a display such as "2000 OVER." On the other hand, the award ball number display suggestion performance shown in this example is performed at a different timing than usual, such as when the number of award balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the player expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the timing of occurrence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball enters the special prize opening. (Based on this, it is possible to perform a small hit award suggestion performance and a prize pitch number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening. , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of a small winning game during small winning fluctuations or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. It is sufficient if the setting suggestion effect is executed in some form in response to the control for the small hit.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, when controlled to be in an advantageous state and when controlled to be in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is It can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state, a setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, Based on the occurrence of winning of game balls in the winning opening or special winning opening, it is possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In addition, in this example, when executing a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) based on the game ball winning a prize in the big winning opening or the special winning opening. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when performing an opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, a setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the presentation mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It is sufficient that the setting suggestion performance is executed in some form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 052IW, when the control of the gaming state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, in step 052 IWS624, the display mode (eg, display color) of the right-click display is changed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the gaming state changes" is when the setting is set at the start or end of a jackpot game, or when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case is shown in which the suggestive performance is configured to be executable, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the performance period when transitioning to a jackpot game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or the transition from a jackpot game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the current performance period. Furthermore, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on a predetermined number of fluctuating displays or a predetermined number of small wins occurring during the high base state. In the above, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the performance period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), and there are various times when the control of the gaming state is switched. There are many possible ways.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of right-handed hitting display or left-handed hitting display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the performance mode of the fanfare performance at the start of the jackpot and the ending performance at the end of the jackpot, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, depending on the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is executed during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, awards can be performed with different selection ratios). Execute pitch count display suggestion effects A to F. Or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. , the number of prize pitches display suggestions effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times variable display is executed.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, the special states include an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the advantageous special state (for example, the first KT state). can be controlled to Further, setting suggestion effects can be executed using different selection ratios depending on when the game medium passes through a specific area during an advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through a specific area during a disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when a small hit occurs and a game ball enters the special prize opening during the second KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance can be executed only when a game ball enters the special winning opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, even if a game ball enters the special winning slot during the first KT state, the system is configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a display suggesting the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning slot during the second KT state. It is now possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at different rates depending on whether the game ball wins or the game ball enters the special prize opening during the 1st KT state. may be configured. Further, for example, even if an irregular game ball enters a special winning slot during a non-KT state, the system may be configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance. .

In the case of the above configuration, if a winning or irregular winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state (high base state), and if a winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison, it may be configured to execute a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during jackpot games based on 10R definite variable jackpot, 6R definite variable jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during jackpot games based on 2R probability variable winnings and 2R normal jackpots and during high base states (high probability/1st KT state, low probability/1st KT state) (However, (Does not reset the prize pitch counter) In addition, in principle, the prize pitch number display is hidden, and after the 50 fluctuating displays are finished in the low probability/1st KT state, the system returns to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case has been described in which the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset when the transition occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is finished and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state) is completed. After transitioning to the state), if a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs during that high base state and the state shifts again to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), the prize during the previous small win RUSH While the number of pitches is inherited, the value of the prize pitch counter can be updated and a prize pitch number display can be displayed.

In addition, it is not limited to the manner of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, but for example, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) occurs, the high probability/second KT state (Small win RUSH) and the immediately preceding jackpot game may be regarded as one section, and the number of prize balls in that section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (in this example, display color) of the total value.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as a "setting suggestion production", a small hit winning suggestion production and a prize ball number display suggestion production in a manner that the current setting value suggests any of the setting values ``1'' to ``6''. Although a case in which the above is executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner that suggests whether or not a setting change has been made to change the setting value when the gaming machine is powered on. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be anything that suggests settings in some form.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special display result is displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from an advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and it is better to derive and display the first specific display result. It is more advantageous for the player than if the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or (2) The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed. In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a missed symbol) (Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account the degree of advantage of the display results of variable display.

Specifically, even though it has moved to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state, if it becomes a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) with a variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation of one of the identification information, The second KT state (small win RUSH) or variable probability state will end soon, and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one of the identification information is uniformly forced to stop and display the winning symbols (forced loss), even if the fluctuation display is a guaranteed variable jackpot, it will be a forced loss. As a result, the gaming value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) decreases, which is undesirable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while the fluctuation display that usually results in a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the fluctuation display that results in a probability variable jackpot is extended by extending the fluctuation (suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time). This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the gaming value given to the player.

In addition, in this example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is Although the case is shown in which the process is executed continuously, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game ends. It's okay. Any method that does not completely stop the variable display may be used.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the game to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to a special state, interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, the control is performed to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the game is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Furthermore, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a specific area (for example, V area 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the control is in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figure 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to derive and display the special display result regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information or variable display of the second identification information is executed ( (See Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display that corresponds to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, the first identification A variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). In addition, if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display based on the predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, the variable display execution means, when controlled to the specific state, variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During execution, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (Fig. 10-68, Fig. 10- 69). Further, when the control is in the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which corresponds to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) enters the first start area (for example, the first start prize opening), the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol ), and the variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) can be executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (e.g., second starting prize opening). It is possible. Further, the variable means (for example, a special variable prize winning state) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state ( For example, the variable means can be controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. Further, the first starting area is provided so that game media moving along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the gaming area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is configured to allow the game medium to enter the first starting area. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, the right area of the game area) is provided so that it can enter. In addition, it is possible to perform a specific notification (for example, the right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) to promote the firing of game media to a specific route, and it is possible to variably display the first identification information. When controlled to a special state after being executed, specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of firing of game media.

Specifically, as shown in this feature part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol is This is configured so that the winning percentage (advantage) of the special winning opening is lower than that of the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when a small winning occurs in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is In the case where the fluctuation display of the symbols is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side with a low winning percentage (advantage), it will effectively The player ends up hitting the game ball in vain even though it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the special winning hole, and it is not preferable that a disadvantageous firing promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in this example, right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the second special symbol side, while right hit notification is not executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to wasteful play by the player, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the first holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory, and the variable display of the second identification information. and a second reservation storage means (for example, a second reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the storage device as reservation storage. Furthermore, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, a special state (for example, It is possible to control the small winning game state). Further, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (eg, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, a special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the suspended memory can be smoothly used.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, when controlled to a special state, it is possible to give a predetermined value (for example, payout 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to a special prize opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole). In addition, as a specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, the lighting of the right-handed hitting indicator 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are It is possible to perform a second specific notification (for example, the right-hand hit display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)) that is highly sensitive. Furthermore, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see Figure 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to be in a special state. In this case, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be provided.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Furthermore, when the first identification information is variablely displayed and then controlled to a special state, it is more advantageous due to a higher ratio than when the second identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed. Control is performed to a special state of a low degree (for example, small win A). Further, when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, specific notification is executed (see (2) and (3) of FIG. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification taking into consideration the player's advantage.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a common variable display performance when controlled by the special state and when not controlled by the special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, , the non-reach pattern is forced to stop displaying). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's ability to recognize that the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the pending memory stored in the second pending storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, a delay means (for example, a regulating piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time from being targeted. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen strategies against gaming machines.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, a passage member is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the gaming area, for moving the game balls in a meandering manner from side to side. You may.

In addition, according to the present feature section 052IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance based on information from the game control means. A production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is provided. Moreover, the game control means controls the execution of notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs predetermined notification. Further, the production control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification device. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the performance control means.

In addition, in this example, the right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning ball device (large left winning hole) is provided on the left side of the gaming area, a special variable winning ball device (large right winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the gaming area, and the first special If a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of symbols, the left big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game, and when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the right big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as such, if a jackpot is achieved with the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, while with the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case of a jackpot, the right hit notification may not be executed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification may be executed during a jackpot game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to players.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, a case is shown in which the right-handed hit notification is executed even during the KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when applying to a gaming machine in which the second starting prize opening is provided on the left side of the gaming area, the configuration is such that the right hit notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to turning on the right-handed hitting display 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right-handed hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to notify the right-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when performing the first variable display after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed hit indicator 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37. The right-handed hit notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed hit display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to turning on the right-handed hit display 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37, the right-handed hit display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. The configuration may be such that the right-handed hit notification is executed.

Furthermore, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed batting display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), a symbol display indicating right-handed batting (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Accordingly, the right-handed hit notification may be configured to be executable.

Moreover, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of small winning, and the variable display of the first special symbol is used to indicate the small winning. The selection ratio of the small winning type may be configured to be different depending on whether the small winning occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol or the small winning. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type that is opened by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this example, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is notified. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol It may also be configured such that there are cases where the right-handed player is not notified. For example, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs in a normal state where a left-handed operation should be performed, the configuration is such that the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a variable probability state) and a specific state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to be advantageous than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Furthermore, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and is the same when the control is in a non-specific state and when the control is in a specific state (Figures 10-3 and 10-3). -4)). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, if the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball payout performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and the gambling quality may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature section 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the small winning probability the same), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value from becoming too large. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result becomes a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is increased. Therefore, appropriate gaming performance can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to this feature part 052IW, the special states include a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming performance can be achieved.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion performance (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) that is different from a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived as a display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, a setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although this example shows a case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance and the set value suggestion performance are executed in the fluctuating display that results in a loss, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to execute a small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance or a set value suggestion performance during a jackpot game or a small win game, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Furthermore, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of the small hit type the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-6, the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6". It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small winning type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the degree of advantage may differ depending on the setting value.

Moreover, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Furthermore, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, in this feature section 052IW, by making the number of advantageous type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of jackpot types the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is excessively large. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-5, the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", but such It is not limited to the form. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the advantageous degree may differ depending on the setting value.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of variable display mode judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of variation patterns the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection rate of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, so even if the small win winning probability is the same, it is advantageous in factors other than the jackpot lottery. This is undesirable because the degree (difference in ball output performance) differs greatly, but this characteristic part 052IW prevents such problems from occurring by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern the same regardless of the setting value. ing.

In this example, as shown in Figure 10-10, the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same regardless of the set value "1" to "6". It is not limited to the form. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern depending on the setting value "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time, the fluctuation efficiency can be made different depending on the setting value. It may also be configured such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining the derivation and display of the variable display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a deviation judgment) is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to all setting values, and the number of predetermined judgment values varies depending on the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probability variable state) and a specific state (for example, a probability variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel with variable display). Further, the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state is The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. In addition, when a variable display is executed that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) is derived and displayed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) is executed. Value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to variably display the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and to variably display the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. In addition, the number of special judgment values among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see Figure 10-4), and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-4). The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate gameplay.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display is determined. It was not possible to realize control that took this into consideration. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is based on deriving and displaying a special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues) execution), and a second control (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, displaying a losing symbol) to derive and display the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, the first special symbol or The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed when the symbol falls off. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B depending on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, In modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled into a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (e.g., a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (e.g., V area 052IWS104) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in , in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, when executing a variable display of the first identification information or when executing a variable display of the second identification information). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modified example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when the result in step 052IWS1128A is N. (See FIG. 10-67(B).), Variable second identification information If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. Control to derive and display is not performed (for example, in Modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (See (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display is determined. It was not possible to realize control that took this into account. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying special display results, regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or variable display of the second identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (Specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information. is executed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control (for example, the first variable time The update of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continued), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, Second control to derive and display (for example, display a missed symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missed symbol) Whether the first control or the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically The CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is easier to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls a specific area (for example, when controlled to be in an advantageous state). It is possible to control to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can control the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) in steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in FIG. 1, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information while executing the variable display of the first identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result. , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 3, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A, the display in step 052IWS1129A, S1130A (See Figure 10-67 (B).), during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, a special display is executed in the variable display of the first identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see FIG. 10-66 and FIG. 10-67(E)) may be configured such that the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B is not performed. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown in the feature section 21TM to configure a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed can be applied to this feature section 052IW, so that a setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Configure right -handed notes, configure the over -priced suggestion production, configuration, and a prize -winning suggestions can be executed, and a prize ball display suggestive production can be executed. You may also do so. Also, for example, by applying a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed to the present feature section 052IW, a small hit may occur in the variable display of one special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

Furthermore, when applying the configuration shown in the feature section 021TM, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-5. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode, etc., a notification to prevent forgetting to take out a card such as a prepaid card, a manufacturer logo display, etc. It is configured to suggest setting values by changing the mode transition notification, notification to prevent forgetting to remove a card, the display form of the manufacturer logo display, and the display form of images displayed at the same time. You may.

In addition, if you combine the gaming machines described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787) and the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902), it is possible to perform setting suggestion effects in a game configured to be able to control a special state. Can be configured to be executable. However, in a game configured to be controllable in a special state, simply executing the setting suggestion effect cannot sufficiently improve the interest of the game. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance, this characteristic section 052IW has the following characteristic configurations of the gaming machine (means C1) to (means C7). is also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing games, and is capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine that can be set to a value, and is capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous state control means (for example, executing steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is a state different from an advantageous state. , special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, and S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), and a setting suggestion performance that can execute a setting suggestion performance (for example, a small winning prize suggestion performance) in response to a gaming medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). The present invention is characterized in that it includes an execution means (for example, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes 052IWS323 and S324). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means is capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls the special state (e.g., small winning game state) when a special display result (e.g., small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Display result determining means that determines the display result of the variable display using a determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining the display result of the variable display. (For example, a part that executes steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the judgment value includes a value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) and a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of the variable display. A setting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620), and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate gameplay can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a setting suggestion performance in response to control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning hole, it may be possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion presentation or a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of the means C1 to C3, when controlled to an advantageous state or controlled to a special state, the variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, etc. Variable means that can control the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. The setting suggestion performance execution means includes a control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127), and the setting suggestion performance execution means responds to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state. , it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened and a game ball enters the big winning hole or the special winning hole) Based on this, it may be configured such that it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion presentation and a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion performance execution means is configured to perform a setting suggestion performance execution means when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)), it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, change the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624). You can leave it there. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to C5, the setting suggestion performance execution means calculates the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, setting suggestion effects can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, if the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666) In response to reaching the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls display suggestions A to F are executed with different selection ratios.Alternatively, for example, the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state It may be configured such that the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios depending on the number of executions of the variable display executed during the execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Means C7) In any of the means C1 to C6, the special state control means selects, as the special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state), which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous special state. The setting suggestion performance execution means can control the specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special condition and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special condition. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance with a different selection ratio depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball hits the special prize opening due to a small hit during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of small hit winning can be executed) It may be configured such that it is possible to perform a presentation or a presentation suggesting the number of prize pitches. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 020SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 020SH will be explained. The gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a suspension storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, suspension storage means, and setting means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, and is, for example, a small winning gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled into a special state, and is, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. The non-special state is a gaming state that is less likely to be controlled as a special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. Note that when comparing the second KT state and the first KT state, the frequency at which small wins occur may be the same, but the second KT state has a longer time period controlled by the small win game (for example, opening time, etc.). ) is long, so it is easy to be controlled by small winning games.

In the gaming machine according to feature section 020SH, the advantageous state and special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as "variable display") is not performed. Specifically, a state where variable display is not performed is a state where identification information indicating an advantageous state (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or a state where identification information indicating a special state (small winning symbol) is displayed. The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, a state in which variable display is not performed means that one symbol (special symbol) is a jackpot symbol or This also includes the case where the small winning symbol is being displayed in a stopped state and the variable display of the other symbol is being suspended.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to feature part 020SH, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state (small hit game state) in the special state (second KT state), it is possible to execute a special performance corresponding to the control of the special state. It is. When the special state (second KT state) is controlled to the special state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning hole. For this reason, the performance execution means executes, for example, a special performance that notifies the player of a small winning game.

On the other hand, when the performance execution means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that is different from the special performance and that suggests content advantageous to the player. . Even if the non-special state (first KT state) is controlled to a special state, a game ball hardly ever enters the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the performance execution means does not execute the special performance.

Examples of the suggestion effects include, as will be described later, a pending change suggestion effect based on a look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like. However, the suggestive presentation is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of consecutive games today in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of variable display times, the total number of prize balls, etc., or an explanation of the presentation content on the pachinko gaming machine 1. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player suggested by the suggestive effect may be any information that the player wants to know when playing the game, such as content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation ( For example, it also includes suggestions that the setting is low.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the performance execution means can perform variable display of decorative identification information in response to variable display of identification information. The decoration identification information is, for example, a decoration pattern. Moreover, when the effect execution means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect execution means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win (for example, "1, 3, 5"). Note that when the special state is controlled in the special state, the effect execution means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Furthermore, when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the effect execution means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as a display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a loss. The combination of losing symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine according to feature section 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet been started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. do. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, and specifically, the determination is similar to the various determinations made when starting the variable display, and is a determination made before the various timings. be. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of a performance to be performed based on the determination result of the pre-read determination.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the suspension storage means stores information regarding variable display as suspension storage information. The pending storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determining means, but may also include information that has not been determined. The performance execution means displays the suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means as a suspension display. For example, the effect executing means suspends and displays the suspended storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determining means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode with higher expectations than the normal display mode.

Further, the effect execution means can execute an action effect that acts on the pending display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the performance execution means is capable of executing an action performance that suggests that the display mode of the reservation display may change as a performance that suggests a change in reservation. For example, the action performance is a performance that reveals a pending display of an object that may change and performs some action on the pending display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the target's pending display, or an effect in which lightning strikes the target's pending display, or the like. In the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the pending display changes and times when the display mode of the pending display does not change. A performance in which the display mode of the pending display does not change after the action performance is performed is a so-called fake performance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "false pending change suggestion performance"). Note that the suggestion performance that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is not limited to the pending change suggestion performance. For example, if pending storage information is stored that has been pre-read and determined to be a jackpot, or if pending storage information is stored that has been pre-read and determined to be a fluctuation pattern of SP (super) reach that will result in a loss, It may also be an effect that displays a background image or a character image that suggests that pending storage information with high expectations for a jackpot is stored.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the setting means can set the setting value to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the jackpot winning probability, and is, for example, a value set to one of "1" to "6". The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as "setting value suggestion effect") that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means. The setting value suggestion performance is a performance that allows the player to guess the setting value, for example, using a background image or a character image. Note that the setting value suggestion effect may be an effect indicating the setting value itself. In the feature section 020SH, the setting value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the setting value is high than when the setting value is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to feature section 020SH, the non-special state includes a first non-special state and a second non-special state that is more easily controlled to be advantageous than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability variable state (low probability state), for example, a low probability/first KT state. The second non-special state is a variable probability state (high probability state), for example, a high probability/first KT state. The performance execution means can execute a common performance when controlled to the first non-special state and when controlled to the second non-special state. The common performance is, for example, a performance controlled by a common performance mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH). The production mode is, for example, a production in which a specific production image different from normal, specific BGM, etc. is performed over one or more variable displays. The effect image here includes, for example, a background image, a character image, a reserved image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestive performance is a performance that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "probable variable suggestive performance"). The probability variation suggesting effect is, for example, an effect that displays an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a text image, etc.) that suggests that the second non-special state is being controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive performances with different modes as the suggestive performances. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion presentations include a pending change suggestion presentation, a set value suggestion presentation, a definite change suggestion presentation, and the like. Furthermore, there are multiple types of suggestion performances for each suggestion production. For example, in the case of a performance suggesting a pending change, there may be a performance that has a high possibility that the pending display will change and a performance that has a low possibility that the pending display will change. Further, for example, in the case of a setting value suggestion effect, there are modes that suggest that a high setting is likely to be set, and modes that suggest that a low setting is likely to be set. In addition, in the case of probability variable suggesting performance, there are modes that suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a variable probability state, and modes that suggest that the possibility of being controlled to a variable probability state is low.

In the feature section 020SH, the degree of advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed. For example, in a setting value suggestion effect, if a setting value suggestion effect suggesting that a high setting is likely is performed, a setting value suggestion effect suggesting a high possibility of a low setting is executed. This is more advantageous for the player than if the In addition, for example, if a definite variable suggestion performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of being controlled in a definite variable state is performed, it also suggests that there is a low possibility of being controlled in a definite variable state. This is more advantageous for the player than when the mode probability change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the variable display execution means can execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The gaming machine according to feature section 020SH includes a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means can change between a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium does not easily pass through the starting area.

The game state control means is capable of controlling the first variable winning means to a predetermined state in which it is easy to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, and specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed). The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggested performance when controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH includes a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small wins. The second variable winning means can change between an easy winning state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win, and a difficult winning state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win the game ball. The second variable winning means can change to an easy winning state in a special state (small winning game state). The effect execution means executes the suggested effect in response to the second variable winning means changing to the winning easy state. Specifically, for example, the performance execution means executes the suggested performance in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to feature part 020SH, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state (small win) in a special state (for example, the second KT state), based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the special area, It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to passage of the game medium through the special area. Specifically, the special area is an area (for example, the V area or the discharge area) through which the winning game ball passes through the special variable winning device 7. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning hole. As a result, the prize balls are paid out. The predetermined performance is, for example, a performance that indicates a winning in the special variable winning device 7, or a performance that adds up the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning.

Further, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the performance execution means does not execute the predetermined performance regardless of whether or not the game medium passes through the special area. Specifically, when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the performance execution means executes the suggested performance without executing the predetermined performance.

(About the gaming state and production mode transition after the jackpot game in the feature section 020SH)
Next, using FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game in the feature section 020SH and the transition of the performance mode according to the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game related to the feature section 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the characteristic section 020SH is controlled to the normal mode in the normal state (low probability/low base state). In addition, in the high probability/low base state, the small win RUSH mode is controlled. Furthermore, in the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state, control is made to the chance time mode. That is, a common effect is executed in the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state.

Also, regarding the performance during the jackpot game, a common performance may be performed when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed and when the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed. That is, a common combination of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed for the 6R probability-variable jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot performance may be executed during each jackpot game. As a result, whether a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot was executed (controlled to a high probability/high base state) or whether a jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot was executed (controlled to a low probability/high base state) It is possible to make it impossible for the player to determine whether the game is being controlled or not.

In addition, in the characteristic part 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined as a 6R normal jackpot, but is determined as a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when a 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the state has transitioned to the low probability/high base state or that the low probability/high base state has continued. Therefore, when a jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, a performance (separately prepared jackpot performance or performance mode) that notifies the low probability/high base state may be performed.

Furthermore, if a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the state has transitioned to a high probability/high base state, or that the high probability/high base state has continued. . Therefore, when a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed in the KT state, a performance (separately prepared jackpot performance or performance mode) that notifies the high probability/high base state may be performed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the so-called first hit, i.e., when there is a transition from the normal state to a high probability/high base state or a transition to a low probability/high base state. It may be limited to cases where

In addition, in the jackpot type determination, a 6R normal jackpot may be determined without determining a 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, by performing a common performance when a jackpot game based on 6R normal jackpot is executed and when a jackpot game based on 6R probability variable jackpot is executed, any type of jackpot game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to determine whether the game has been executed (whether it is controlled to a high probability/high base state or to a low probability/high base state).

(Example of production mode setting process related to characteristic part 020SH)
Next, an example of the production mode setting process related to the feature section 020SH will be explained using FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the production mode setting process related to the feature section 020SH. The production mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure waiting process of S173 in the production control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). If the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, if a jackpot occurs, the performance control CPU 120 will control the probability-variable jackpot. It is determined whether or not (step 020SHS12). If it is not a guaranteed variable jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 decides to control the production mode to chance time mode (step 020SHS14), Finish the series of processing. In addition, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 may determine a performance mode (separately prepared performance mode) that notifies a low probability/high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, if it is a probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS13). If it is a 6R probability-variable jackpot (step 020SHS13: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines to control the performance mode to chance time mode by moving to step 020SHS14. That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes a common performance (chance mode) in the case of a normal jackpot and the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, if it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS13: NO), the production control CPU 120 decides to control the production mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends the series of processing.

In step 020SHS11, if the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS11: NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16). If the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the command specifying to start the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, and the waiting time for receiving the command (corresponding to the "predetermined period" in step 020SHS17) Determine whether the time has passed.

In step 020SHS17, if the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020SHS17: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. When the predetermined period of time has passed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is a "lose", the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance high base number counter to "0". It is determined whether or not (step 020SHS18). When the value of the performance high base number counter is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the value of the performance high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the value of the performance high base number counter (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the effect high base number counter has become "0" (step 020 SHS20). If the value of the performance high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when the value of the performance high base number counter becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to control the performance mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and performs a series of Finish the process.

In the performance mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, after the jackpot game is executed by the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14, when the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state is controlled, the common It is controlled by chance time mode, which is a production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to determine whether the state is being controlled to a high probability/high base state or to a low probability/high base state.

(Example of variable display compatible display control processing related to characteristic part 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature section 020SH will be described using FIG. 11-3. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display compatible display control processing related to the feature section 020SH. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the advance notice setting process of S161 in the production control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start prize designation command has been received (step 020SHS31). If the starting winning designation command (first effective starting winning designation command or second effective starting winning designation command) is not received (step 020SHS31: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the start prize designation command has been received (Step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color that is the display mode when starting the pending display is determined (Step 020SHS32), and the variable display compatible display (pending display and active display) is determined. The final color, which is the final display mode, is determined (step 020SHS33). In determining the initial color and determining the final color, an initial color determination table and a final color determination table, which will be described below, are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for display compatible with variable display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display compatible display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows the initial color determination table, and (B) shows the final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates the display mode when starting variable display compatible display (pending display). Furthermore, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the feature section 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is during the execution of the variable display, when the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), during the execution of a small winning game in the chance time mode, etc. It is possible to change at the change timing. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The "gray" display mode is a normal display mode. Moreover, the display modes of "red", "green", and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Furthermore, in (A) and (B), the variation pattern indicates any of "jackpot", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature section 020SH, since the description will mainly focus on the performance during chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state), in FIG. 11-4, high probability/high base A variation pattern used in a state or a low probability/high base state (the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8(E) and 10-9(H)) will be explained as an example.

The "jackpot" variation patterns are, for example, second variation patterns #13 and #28 in which the variation time is 2 minutes. In the second variation patterns #13 and #28, a decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed after SP reach. The variation patterns of "SP reach loss" are, for example, second variation patterns #09, #12, #24, and #27 in which the variation time is 2 minutes. In the second variation patterns #09, #12, #24, and #27, decorative symbols indicating a loss are stopped and displayed after SP reach. The variation patterns of "other losses" are, for example, second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, and #23 with variation times of 1 second or 5 seconds.

In addition, the "other losses" variation patterns have a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds, and are selected when a small hit is determined as second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, # Contains 26. In the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26, in which the variation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the variable display of the decorative pattern is The determined decorative pattern of the losing combination is stopped and displayed without the mode being the SP reach mode. In addition, in the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26, where the variation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is Then, the determined decorative symbols of the losing combinations in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the "Jackpot" variation pattern, the final color display mode is "Red" most likely to be selected, followed by "Green", and then "Blue". , "ash" is the least likely to be selected. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "SP reach loss", the final color display mode is "green" most likely to be selected, followed by "red", and then "blue". It is easy to select, and "ash" is the least likely to be selected. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "Other losses", the final color display mode is "gray" most likely to be selected, followed by "blue", followed by "green". is the most likely to be selected, and "red" is the least likely to be selected. Therefore, if the jackpot expectation degree of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it becomes "red">"green">"blue">"gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in the case of any variation pattern, as for the initial color display mode, "gray" is most likely to be selected, followed by "blue", and then "green". "Red" is the least likely to be selected. This makes it possible to change the display mode in stages from a display mode with low expectations to a display mode with high expectations. In addition, when comparing (A) and (B) regarding the variation pattern of "other losses", in (B), the display formats with higher expectations ("blue" and "green") are more likely to be selected. ing. Thereby, even in the case of the variation pattern of "other losses", it is possible to change the display mode from a low expectation level to a display mode with a high expectation level in stages. Furthermore, in the feature section 020SH, so-called decline in performance, in which the display mode changes to a display mode with a low level of expectation, is prevented from occurring.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, once the initial color and the final color are determined, the production control CPU 120 compares the expected degree of display mode of the determined initial color and final color, and compares the expected degree of display mode of the initial color with the final color. It is determined whether the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: NO), the production control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display based on the initial color display mode. (Step 020SHS37). In addition, if the expectation level indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the expectation level indicated by the display mode of the initial color, if a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display, the effect of the effect will be lower. Therefore, by moving to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, if the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the final color display mode. , is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (suspended display) in the initial color display mode (step 020SHS37), and ends the series of processing.

(An example of the suggested production execution process performed by the production control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, an example of the suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled will be described. FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are flowcharts showing an example of the suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. The suggestive effect execution process shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). If the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51: YES), it is determined whether the production mode is controlled to chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the performance mode is controlled to be the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53).

When the performance mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: YES), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to execute the performance (performance that notifies the small win) according to the small win RUSH mode. (Step 020SHS54), the series of processing ends. On the other hand, when the performance mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance (loss) according to the normal mode. Performance: Settings are made to execute (continuously displaying the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed in a losing combination) (step 020SHS55), and the series of processing is completed.

In step 020SHS52, if the production mode is controlled to chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the production control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change production that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed. It is determined whether or not it is set (step 020SHS56). If the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS56: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode of the pending display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the pending display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YES), the production control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the current display mode of the pending display is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS58). In determining the presence or absence of a pending change suggestion performance, a pending change suggestion performance determination table, which will be described below, is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. FIG. 11-7(A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The pending change suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining either "with pending change suggestion performance" or "without pending change suggestion performance." “Holding change suggesting performance is present” indicates that after performing the holding change suggesting performance (for example, at the start of the next variable display), a series of change performances in which the display mode of the hold display changes is performed. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7(A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "no pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small winning game state, when the pending display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the pending change suggestion performance is likely to be performed. Note that by performing the suspension change suggestion effect, the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the currently displayed pending display shows an expectation level that is one step higher. Specifically, for example, if the current status of the pending display is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the current status of the pending display is "blue", it changes to "green". That's it.

Note that the display mode of the pending display after the change is not limited to a display mode in which the expectation level increases by one level, but may also be a display mode in which the expectation level increases by two levels, or a display mode in which the expectation level increases by three levels. good. Specifically, the display mode that changes the display mode of the pending display may be any display mode that is less than or equal to the expected level indicated by the final color, for example, if there are multiple display modes before reaching the final color display mode. (for example, if the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of the multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may also do so.

In addition, in the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is determined each time, for example, when executing a variable display or a small winning game. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing for performing a change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and by referring to the scenario, it may be determined whether or not to perform a change effect. Further, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, by referring to the scenario, it is possible to decide whether or not to perform a change effect and the color after the change.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the pending change suggestion performance (step 020SHS59). If the pending change suggestion performance is not performed (step 020SHS59: NO), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing a hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the production control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color. to judge.

When the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO), the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the production control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the pending change suggestion performance (step 020SHS62), and ends the series of processing. An example of the pending change suggestion performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10, but it is a series of performances including a first inciting performance, a second inciting performance, and an action performance.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a setting value suggestion performance (step 020SHS63). A setting value suggestion effect determination table, which will be described below, is used to determine whether or not to provide a setting value suggestion effect.

FIG. 11-7(B) shows a setting value suggestion effect determination table. The setting value suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of setting value suggestion performance and the type of setting value suggestion performance for each setting value. In FIG. 11-7(B), the "setting value" indicates any one of "1" to "6".

In addition, the "types" of setting value suggestion effects are "odd number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting. There are three types: "suggestion of setting value of 4 or more", which indicates that the value is "4" or more. The effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is a effect that can be determined when the setting value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is a effect that can be determined when the setting value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect "suggestion of setting value 4 or more" is an effect that can be determined when the setting value is 4 or more (any of "4", "5", and "6").

In addition, the setting value suggestion effect has a different effect depending on the type, for example, a background image is different. For example, the background image is an image indicating morning in the case of an "odd number setting suggestion" production, an image indicating noon in the case of an "even number setting suggestion" production, and an image indicating daytime in the production of "setting value 4 or more suggestion". In this case, the image shows night.

As shown in the setting value suggestion effect determination table, regardless of whether the ``setting value'' is from ``1'' to ``6'', ``no setting value suggestion effect'' is determined at the highest rate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggestion performance from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the setting value.

Further, the effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" increases from "1" to "3" to "5". Therefore, by performing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "5". Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" increases from "2" to "4" to "6". Therefore, by performing the "even number setting suggestion" effect, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "6". Furthermore, the effect of "suggestion of set value 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" increases to "4", "5", and "6". Therefore, by performing the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more", it is possible to suggest that the set value is likely to be "6".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the setting value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the setting value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing the setting value suggestion performance (step 020SHS64: YES), the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the setting value suggestion performance (step 020SHS65), and ends the series of processing. An example of the setting value suggestion performance will be described later using FIGS. 11-12, but it is a series of performances including a first promotion performance and a second promotion performance. On the other hand, if the setting value suggestion effect is not to be performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there will be a probability suggestion effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of a probability-changing effect, a probability-changing effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7(C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability variable suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of probability variation suggestion performance and the type of probability variation suggestion performance for each high probability state and low probability state. In Figure 11-7(C), the "probability states" are "high probability", which is a definite variable state (high probability/high base state), and "low probability", which is an indeterminate variable state (low probability/high base state). Indicates one of the following. In addition, the types of definite variable suggestion effects are ``suggesting a high possibility'' which suggests that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state, and ``suggesting a high probability'' indicating that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than ``suggesting a high possibility.'' There are three types: ``Suggests a medium probability'' which suggests that the probability is high, and ``Suggests a low possibility'' which indicates that the probability of being in a high probability state is lower than ``Suggests a medium possibility.''

As shown in the probability variation suggestion performance determination table, regardless of whether the "probability state" is "high probability" or "low probability", "no probability variation suggestion production" is determined at the highest rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent probability-variable suggestive effects from being performed frequently, and to prevent players from easily guessing whether they are being controlled to a high-probability state or a low-probability state. be able to.

In addition, as shown in the definite variable suggestion performance determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the percentage of "no definite variable suggestion performance" being determined is lower than when the "probability state" is "low probability". In other words, there is a high probability that one of the types of probability-variable suggestive effects will be determined. As a result, the very fact that the probability change suggestion performance is performed can suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a high probability state.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the performance that "suggests a high probability" is most likely to be decided, followed by the performance that "suggests a medium possibility", and the production that "suggests a small probability" is the most likely to be decided. ” is the most difficult to decide. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the performance that "suggests a small probability" is most likely to be decided, followed by the performance that "suggests a medium possibility", and the production that "suggests a high possibility" is the most likely to be decided. ” is the most difficult to decide. As a result, when the effect of "suggesting a high possibility" is performed, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a high probability state. Furthermore, when the effect of "suggesting possibility" is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the state is being controlled to a high probability state or a low probability state. Furthermore, when an effect of "suggesting low probability" is performed, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a low probability state.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability variation suggestion performance as a result of determining the presence or absence of the probability variation suggestion performance in step 020SHS66 (step 020SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion performance (step 020SHS68: YES), the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the probability change suggestion performance (step 020SHS69), and ends the series of processing. Note that the probability change suggestion performance is a series of performances including a first provocation performance and a second provocation performance, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-13. On the other hand, if the probability change suggestion performance is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final color of the pending memory during the pending display is all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final color of the currently displayed pending memory by referring to the display mode of the final color of each pending memory stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122. Determine whether everything is determined to be gray.

If the final color of all the pending memories being displayed pending is not determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: NO), that is, at least one of the pending memories being displayed pending is determined to have a special display mode. If so, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the first inciting effect (see (C) in FIG. 11-10) (step 020SHS73), and ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when all the final colors of the pending memory being displayed on hold are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a fake pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). The fake pending change suggestion performance is a pending change suggestion performance that is executed even though the display mode of the pending display does not change, and is a series of performances in which the pending change suggestion performance becomes a fake performance as a result. In determining the presence or absence of the false pending change suggestion performance, a false pending change suggestion performance determination table, which will be described below, is used.

FIG. 11-7(D) shows a false hold change suggestion effect determination table. The false pending change suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining either "with false pending change suggestion performance" or "without false pending change suggestion performance". "Gauze pending change suggestion effect" indicates that the display mode of the pending display does not change after the pending change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No false hold change suggestion effect" indicates that hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

The determination ratio of ``there is a performance suggesting a change with false reservations'' is higher than the determination ratio of ``no performance suggesting a change with false reservation''. Therefore, in the small winning game state, the performance can be made lively by the false hold change suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 020SH, as a false effect, a false pending change suggestion effect is executed, but if a setting value suggestion effect is performed, a false setting value suggestion effect that is not performed may be executed, or a certain change may be performed. It may also be possible to perform a false probability-variable suggestion performance that is not performed in a fake manner when the suggestion performance is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the false hold change suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the false hold change suggestion effect in step 020SHS70 (step 020SHS71). When performing the false hold change suggestion performance (step 020SHS71: YES), the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the false hold change suggestion performance (step 020SHS72), and ends the series of processing. Note that the false suspension change suggestion performance, which will be described in detail later using FIG. 11-11, is a series of performances including a first inciting performance, a second inciting performance, and an action performance. On the other hand, if the false hold change suggestion performance is not to be performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS74.

Through the above-described processing, in the small winning game state during the chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state), any one of the pending change suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance, and the probability change suggestion performance It becomes possible to execute the suggested performance.

(Example of change performance execution processing of variable display compatible display performed by performance control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-8, an example of a change effect execution process of a variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display will be described. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a change effect execution process of a variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a change flag indicating that a change performance is to be performed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set (step 020SHS101). If the change flag is not set (step 020SHS101: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is the final color (step 020SHS102).

If the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is the final color (step 020SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the target variable display compatible display is an active display (step 020SHS103). If the target variable display compatible display is an active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for forcibly executing the final color display mode for the active display (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color. In some cases, the display mode may change to increase the degree by two or more levels. On the other hand, if the target variable display compatible display is not an active display (step 020SHS103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display (step 020SHS104). The rate at which it is decided to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the rate at which the hold display is changed with the hold change suggestion effect during a small winning game (the hold change suggestion shown in Figure 11-7 (A)). The ratio is the same as the ratio for determining the performance (70/100), but it may be a different ratio.

When the performance control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the pending display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the pending display (step 020SHS105: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the changed display mode of the pending display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the production control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color. to judge.

When the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YES), settings are made to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the pending display to the display mode of the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the performance control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108) and ends the series of processing. In step 020SHS106, if the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the pending display to a display mode with an expectation level one level higher. Settings are made to execute (step 020SHS109), and the series of processing ends.

It should be noted that a change performance that changes the display mode of the hold display during variable display and a performance that changes the display mode of the hold display accompanied by a hold change suggestion performance during a small winning game are different effects. Specifically, in the performance that changes the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion performance is not performed.

(Example of transition of production screen during small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of transition of the effect screen during the small win RUSH mode will be explained using FIG. 11-9. Note that FIG. 11-9 shows the transition of the production screen when a small win game is executed during the small win RUSH mode (high probability/second KT state). FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen during the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 020SH201 are variably displayed. In addition, in the small winning RUSH mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the production control CPU 120 uses the display results and variation patterns (for example, the second variation pattern #32 ) and the game state, display results of variable display of decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols), variable display modes of decorative symbols, execution of various performances such as reach performance, various preview performances, performance modes according to the game state, etc. The presence or absence of the decoration, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), a total prize pitch number display 020SH204 is displayed. The total number of prize balls display 020SH204 shows the total number of prize balls during the consecutive games including the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, in (A), a notification image including the characters "right-handed hit" is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 as a notification image corresponding to right-handed hit notification. Note that this notification image may include an image showing a rightward arrow in order to encourage right-handed hitting. Furthermore, although the hold display and active display are not displayed in FIG. 11-9, they may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the timing for stopping the variable display comes, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows the screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that there is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small win, and the small symbol 020SH201 stops at the confirmed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small win game. Displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the production control CPU 120 detects, for example, that an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern 020SH200 (and the small pattern 020SH201) has been read from the production control pattern, or that the main In response to receiving a command from the board 11 specifying that the final decorative pattern 020SH200 is to be stopped and displayed, the final decorative pattern 020SH200 that is the display result of the decorative pattern 020SH200 is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

(C) of FIG. 11-9 shows a screen during a small winning game in small winning determination in the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when a prize is won in the special prize opening, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). In addition, the total award pitch count display 020SH204 shows a number that has been added by 10 pitches compared to (B) in FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows the screen when the second ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. In the small winning game state, when the second ball wins in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020SH203 (two images in total) indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). Is displayed. In addition, the total award pitch count display 020SH204 shows a number that has been added by 10 pitches compared to (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when a prize is won in the special winning hole, a winning effect image 020SH203 is additionally displayed on the image display device 5.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), when the production control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (production control command), if the second KT status flag is set (i.e. , if in the high probability/second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the one shown in (E) and the next variable display starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined to execute the small win game in the small win determination in the small win RUSH mode, the small win notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 indicating the small win are stopped and displayed, During the small winning game, a winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed in response to a winning in the special winning opening. That is, in the high probability/second KT state, when the small win gaming state is controlled, the small winning notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small winning game in the small winning RUSH mode.

(Example of transition of suggestion effect during chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect during the chance time mode will be explained using FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in Figures 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when a small winning game is executed during the chance time mode (during high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1st KT state) is shown. show. Note that in the explanation of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same content as that explained in FIG. 11-9 will be given the same reference numeral and the explanation will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a transition of a fake effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (E) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 show similar screens.

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11(A) show variable displays during chance time mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 020SH201 are variably displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a pending display 020SH206 as displays compatible with variable display. In addition, in the chance time mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In (A), all variable display compatible displays show a normal display mode (for example, "gray").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the production control CPU 120 uses the display results and variation patterns (for example, the second variation pattern #11 , or the variable display of decorative symbols is executed based on the second variable pattern #26 in FIG. 10-9 or the game state. In addition, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the performance control CPU 120, for example, determines the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the pre-read preview performance, and changes the display format according to the result of the determination. Display the display compatible display. In the screen shown in (A), when the timing for stopping the variable display comes, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (B) show the screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that there is a small hit in the small hit determination during the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 as both symbols indicating a combination of losses, since a prize ball cannot be expected even though it is determined to be a small hit. The small hit notification image 020SH202 (see (B) in FIG. 11-10) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 (C) show the screen (inciting performance 1: step 1) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, the first provocation effect image 020SH211 suggests that there is a possibility that a suggestive effect (a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, and a probability change suggestive effect) is performed. is displayed. The first inciting effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image indicating that a character appears. Further, the decorative pattern 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 is stopped and displayed as it is as a pattern indicating a losing combination. In addition, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, there is almost no chance of winning a prize in the special prize opening. Furthermore, even if a prize is won in the special winning opening in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9(C) is not displayed.

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (D) show the screen (inciting performance 2: step 2) during the small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 is capable of performing a suggestion performance (any one of the pending change suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance, and the definite change suggestion performance) rather than the inciting performance 1 in (C). A second provocative effect image 020SH212 that suggests that there is a sex is displayed. The second inciting effect image 020SH212 is an image that is a development of the first inciting effect image 020SH211, and is, for example, an image in which a character moves (an image in which a character brandishes a sword).

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (E) show a pending change suggestion performance, and specifically show a screen (effect performance: step 3) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays an action effect image 020SH213. The action effect image 020SH213 is a developed image of the second stirring effect image 020SH212, and is, for example, an image in which a character acts on the pending display 020SH206 (a sword contacts the pending display 020SH206).

(F) of FIG. 11-10 shows a change in the hold display in the chance time mode (step 4). Specifically, on the image display device 5, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes to a highly expected display mode (for example, from "gray" to (changed to "blue") but is displayed. That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 acts on the pending display 020SH206 in the small winning game state, and in (F) of FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes. A change performance will be performed. In addition, in FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display starts after the small winning game ends, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, when the small winning game The display mode of the pending display 020SH206 may be changed during the game (before the start of the next variable display).

On the other hand, (F) in FIG. 11-11 shows a fake effect (a false hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, a case is shown in which the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change to a display mode with high expectations even at the timing of the pending shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative pattern 020SH200 is started. In other words, although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing a bow and arrow) acts on the pending display 020SH206 in the small winning game state as shown in (E), in (F) of FIG. 11-11, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 will not change (the performance will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small hit game in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are all stopped and displayed with symbols indicating losing combinations, and during the small winning game, it is possible to perform a pending change suggestion performance (display of action performance image 020SH213) that suggests content advantageous to the player. In addition, by using the hold change suggestion effect or the false hold change suggestion effect shown in Figures 11-10 and 11-11, it is possible to make people expect a change in the display mode of the hold display, and the small winning game state during the chance time mode. The controlled period can be effectively utilized. Therefore, interest can be improved.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the effect effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. In some cases, Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the effect effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. In addition, in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 may perform a fake effect that does not affect the pending display 020SH206 (for example, an effect that displays an image of a character flying in the upper left corner of the image display device 5).

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first inciting effect image 020SH211, the second inciting effect image 020SH212, and the effect effect image 020SH213. The ease with which the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 can be changed may vary depending on the display mode. Specifically, for each image, prepare a display mode that is likely to be determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change. Bye. Furthermore, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may change without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(Example of transition of setting value suggestion effect during chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a setting value suggestion effect during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-12 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(E) of FIG. 11-12 shows a screen (setting value suggestion performance) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a setting value suggestion image 020SH220 whose background image indicates night. The night background image in the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is an image that suggests that the setting value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).

(F) in FIG. 11-12 shows that the small winning game has ended and the next variable display is being performed. In addition, in the setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-12, the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period when the small winning game state is controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the variable display starts, the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the feature section 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small hit game in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both displayed to indicate a loss. A symbol indicating a combination is displayed in a stopped state, and a setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during a small winning game. That is, in the characteristic part 020SH, when the small winning game state is controlled in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, a setting value suggestion effect (setting value suggestion) that suggests contents advantageous to the player is provided. display of image 020SH220). By the setting value suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 11-12, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the game is controlled to a small winning game state in the chance time mode, and the interest can be improved.

Note that in the setting value suggestion performance, a fake performance may be performed similarly to the pending change suggestion performance. Specifically, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed in (C) of FIG. 11-12, a false effect may be performed in which the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first inciting effect image 020SH211, the second inciting effect image 020SH212, and the effect effect image 020SH213. The ease with which the setting value suggestion effect is performed may vary depending on the display mode. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(Example of transition of probability change suggestion performance during chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of probability change suggestion performance during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-13 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. (E) of FIG. 11-13 shows a screen (probability change suggestion performance) during a small winning game in chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image indicating that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

(F) in FIG. 11-13 shows that the small winning game has ended and the next variable display is being performed. In addition, in the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period when the small winning game state is controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display Even after the start of the process, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the feature section 020SH, when it is determined that a small win game is to be executed in the small win determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small win notification image 020SH202 are both displayed to indicate a loss. A pattern indicating a combination is displayed in a stopped state, and a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during a small winning game. That is, in the characteristic section 020SH, when controlled to a small winning gaming state in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, a probability change effect (probability change suggestion image 020SH230 display) can be executed. The probability change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-13 makes it possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small winning game state is controlled during the chance time mode, thereby increasing the interest.

It should be noted that in the definite change suggestion performance, a fake performance may be performed in the same way as the pending change suggestion performance. Specifically, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed in (C) of FIG. 11-13, a false effect may be performed in which the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first inciting effect image 020SH211, the second inciting effect image 020SH212, and the effect effect image 020SH213. Depending on the display mode, the ease with which the probability-changing effect is performed may vary. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the probability variable suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each of the suggestive performances shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small winning game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode where a variable display of 1.5 seconds is executed continuously, even if a small winning game is executed for more than 1.8 seconds, the small winning game is executed. This can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the game can be made to appear to be progressing smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small winning game in the first KT state, , a pleasant game).

(About the small hit release timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game and the execution timing of various suggestion effects will be explained. FIGS. 11-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of small hit opening timing and execution timing of various suggestion performances. FIG. 11-14 shows a variable display of a special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small win in the small hit determination, and a small win game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) to be executed thereafter. .

First, the variable display of special symbols and the small winning game will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. The variable display time (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the number of second reserved memories is "1 or more" (second fluctuation pattern #11 in Figure 10-8 or -9 second fluctuation pattern #26), and if the second retention memory number is "0", it is 5 seconds (see second fluctuation pattern #10 in Figure 10-8 or second fluctuation pattern #10 in Figure 10-9). (See variation pattern #25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed in a determined manner until a symbol determination period (also referred to as a symbol determination period) of 0.5 seconds has elapsed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the small winning game state is controlled. The small winning game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small winning ending period. Specifically, in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened after the small winning fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened. The variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the small winning ending period begins. When the small winning ending period has elapsed, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the pending change suggestion performance (including the fake pending change suggestion performance) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small win fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is released, the first promotion effect (display of the first promotion effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-10), the second promotion effect image 020SH211 in FIG. An inciting effect (display of the second inciting effect image 020SH212) and an action effect (display of an image in which the effect effect image 020SH213 contacts the pending display 020SH206) are performed. When changing the hold display (in the case of hold change suggestion performance), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (hold shift timing). On the other hand, in the case of the fake pending change suggestion performance, the pending display does not change at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (timing of the pending shift), and the display mode of the current pending display is maintained.

In this way, in the feature section 020SH, an effect is performed in which the display mode of the pending display is changed between the small winning game and the variable display. This makes it difficult for the player to discern the transition from the small winning game state to the state where the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the setting value suggestion performance and the probability change suggestion performance will be explained. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the setting value suggestion performance and the probability change suggestion performance are referred to as "setting value suggestion performance etc." As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is released, the first promotion effect (for example, the display of the first promotion effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-12), A second inciting effect (displaying the second inciting effect image 020SH212), a setting value suggestion effect, etc. (displaying the setting value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The setting value suggestion performance and the like are executed until the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, for example.

In this way, in the characteristic section 020SH, the setting value suggestion performance and the like are performed in response to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the release of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to draw attention to the setting value suggestion performance and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins, and it is possible to make the game appear to be progressing smoothly. Furthermore, the period during which the small winning game state is controlled can be effectively utilized by setting value suggestion effects, etc., and the interest during the small winning game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 020SH, each suggestion effect is started in synchronization with the timing of the start of opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after transitioning to the small winning game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed. It is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that the timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing that corresponds to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and specifically, any timing that includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion performance is not limited to the timing of the start of opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small win fanfare period. Thereby, these performances can be started at the earliest timing after shifting to the small winning game state, so it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestion performance may be the timing during the symbol confirmation period, or may be the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the state where the variable display is executed to the small winning game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the setting value suggestion performance etc. is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small winning ending period. Thereby, these performances can be executed until the end of the small winning gaming state, so that the period during which the small winning gaming state is controlled can be utilized more effectively.

Moreover, the end timing of each suggestion performance may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to discern the transition from the small winning game state to the state where variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As explained above, in the embodiment described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, I would like to add some specifics about improving interest. In the first KT state, for example, shortening variations (1 second variations) and small winning games (decorative symbols stop when losing symbols) are repeatedly executed. If no special performance is performed in the small win game state, the progress of the game appears to be stopped in the small win game state. For this reason, the game does not appear to proceed quickly and easily in the first KT state (high base state), and the player may feel uncomfortable. Further, there is a possibility that the time during which the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state in the first KT state becomes wasted time for the player.

As explained above, in the embodiment related to the feature part 020SH, when the small winning gaming state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the content (for example, any one of the pending change suggestive performance, the set value suggestive performance, and the probability change suggestive performance). Therefore, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which almost no game ball wins, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Further, since the period during which the small winning game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to prevent the period from being wasted time for the player.

In addition, when the small winning game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state (for example, the display of the small winning notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9) is displayed. Made it executable. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration in which the feature section 020SH is applied to a so-called one-type pachinko game machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 020SH to a so-called mixed type pachinko game machine. An example of a specification of a pachinko game machine of one type and two types will be described below.

In a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, in a normal state (non-special state: low base state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by left-handed hitting. When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on winning in the first starting winning hole, the small winning probability is constant regardless of the setting value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if a small winning game is executed based on winning in the first starting winning hole, the game ball passes through a specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. Things have become almost impossible to expect.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on winnings in the first starting winning hole is shown below.

If the setting value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
When the setting value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
If the setting value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
If the setting value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the setting value is "5", 412/65536 (approximately 1/159).
If the setting value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

In the judgment based on the winning in the first starting prize opening, the small winning probability is constant, so by varying the probability of losing according to the set value "1" to "6", the set value "1" to " You can set the jackpot probability according to "6".

For example, in the first special game, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, the system shifts to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). . Note that when a jackpot game is executed, depending on the type of jackpot, the game may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is played by right-handed firing operation aiming at the gate and the second starting prize opening located on the right side of the game area. The special state is a high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of winning a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the normal electric accessory longer than in the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the Fuzu game compared to the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the variation time of the special symbol compared to the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening, increasing the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed. The special state is controlled, for example, until variable display is performed a predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second starting winning hole There is almost no hope of winning the prize.

In addition, in the determination based on winning in the second starting winning opening, the small winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62986/65536 (approximately 96/100). In addition, the small winning probability in the determination based on winning in the second starting winning hole and the small winning probability in determining based on winning in the first starting winning opening are different.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning in the second starting winning opening is shown below.

If the setting value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
When the setting value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
If the setting value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
If the setting value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the setting value is "5", 412/65536 (approximately 1/159).
If the setting value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

In the judgment based on winnings in the second starting prize opening, the small winning probability is constant, so by varying the probability of losing according to the set values "1" to "6", the set values "1" to " You can set the jackpot probability according to "6".

As mentioned above, in the judgment based on the winning in the second starting prize opening, the small hit probability is 96/100, so in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special pattern game), the small winning symbol is derived. Easy to display. In the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 located on the right side of the gaming area opens, the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 17 (small winning attacker), and the special variable winning ball device 17 enters the special variable winning ball device 17. When the player passes through a specific area provided (so-called V area), a jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the small winning game state in the special state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, so it is easier to win in the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is easier to pass through the V area. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), if the game ball passes through the V area under control of the small winning game state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the special state ends, A jackpot game is executed. Also, in the special state, if it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (even if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed), the special state will be terminated in the same way. , a jackpot game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the special state is controlled again depending on the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). In this way, by executing the jackpot game in the special state (by winning consecutive games), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if a jackpot game is executed before the predetermined number of variable displays are executed, depending on the type of jackpot, the game may not be controlled to the special state and may, for example, shift to the normal state. In some cases. Further, when variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the special state, the state also shifts to the normal state. Specifically, in the special state, if the jackpot game is not executed before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, although the game ball is controlled to the small win game state, the game ball does not win the special variable prize If the ball does not enter the ball device 17, does not pass through the V area, or if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the state shifts to the normal state. This ends the special state control and ends the consecutive games. In addition, even in the pachinko game machine of the one type and two types combination type, for example, special symbols are not variablely displayed in the jackpot game state and the small win game state.

In such a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, when the special state is controlled to the small winning game state, the special effect (for example, "small winning attacker") corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state (special state) is (Display the image "Aim for the special variable winning ball device 17!"). This allows the player to expect a big win in the small win game in the special state.

Further, in the variable display of the first special symbol game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), small winning symbols may be derived and displayed (small winning probability: approximately 1/100). In the small winning game in the normal state, the game is played by hitting to the left, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right area, it is difficult to win in the special variable winning ball device 17. . Even if you hit right, it is difficult to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if you hit the ball in the special variable winning ball device 17, the V Since the configuration makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the area, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to pass through the V area.

In modification example 1, in such a one-two type pachinko game machine, when the normal state (non-special state) is controlled to the small winning game state (special state), the suggestion effect related to the characteristic part 020SH is performed. It may be executable. The suggestion performance is a performance that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a suggestion performance based on the determination result of a pre-reading determination, a setting value suggestion performance, or the like. Note that the suggestion performance based on the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment is, for example, a reservation change suggestion performance, but is not limited to this, but is also a production that suggests that reservation memory information with a high expectation of a jackpot is stored (for example, (Display of highly anticipated background images, character images, etc.) may also be acceptable.

Note that even in the special state, if the first pending memory is stored, small winning symbols may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol game. In this case, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to pass through the V area in a small winning game, it may be possible to execute the suggestion performance related to the feature section 020SH when controlled by the small winning game.

According to modification example 1, even if a small winning game is executed in the normal state in which almost no game ball wins, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly. It is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the winning game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the normal state in the Pachinko game machine of the one type and two types mixed type. It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of one type and two types is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, but may have other specifications as long as a small winning game is executed in a normal state in which game balls hardly win.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the characteristic part 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing games (one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines), which includes a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state, and a variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols). The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying a result, and an effect execution means, and the game state control means controls an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state. (for example, a small winning game state), a non-special state (for example, a normal state), and a special state that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state (a special state according to the first modification of the characteristic part 020SH: for example , time saving state), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect execution means is controlled to , it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, displaying an image of "Aim for the small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!"), and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state. When controlled, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that is different from the special performance and that suggests content that is advantageous to the player (for example, a suggestive performance based on the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment, a setting value suggestion presentation, etc.). be.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration is explained in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit. In the second modification, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened multiple times depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is 1.8 seconds x 1 time in the case of small win C, which has the longest opening time (see FIG. 10-14), but is not limited to this. Regarding the opening pattern, for example, when the opening time is set to be the longest, the total opening time may be within 1.8 seconds, and may be 0.9 seconds x 2 times or 0.2 seconds x 9 times. Further, it may be possible to execute a content suggesting effect according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestive effect corresponding to opening twice for 0.9 seconds may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is set to be opened multiple times, by performing a suggestive effect according to the opening pattern, it is difficult to draw attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to draw attention to each suggestive effect. .

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, a configuration has been described in which the suggestive effect can be executed in the first KT state. In modification 3, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to perform suggestion performance in a normal state (low probability/low base state).

For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly by winning the first starting prize opening, but the small winning probability in the small winning determination in this case is As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (approximately 10%). In addition, the small win type due to winning in the first starting winning hole is small win A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and results in a small hit (small win A), the non-reach losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. I have to.

Therefore, in the third modification, when the small winning game state is controlled in the normal state, the suggestion performance may be made executable. In addition, in order to secure time to perform the suggestion performance, the small win fanfare period and the small win ending period may be set long. Thereby, the performance in the small winning game in the normal state can be made into a performance that is beneficial to the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small winning game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small winning game in the normal state can be improved.

Note that after transitioning from the low probability/high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second pending memory may be executed. Specifically, immediately after transitioning from the low probability/high base state to the normal state, variable display may be performed based on the second reserved memory stored in the low probability/high base state before transition. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second reservation memory in the normal state. Then, when a small winning game is executed, a variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period when the small win game state is controlled, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small win game ends. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol will be extended for the period during which the small winning game state is controlled. In the third modification, it is also possible to perform a suggestive effect during a period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability/low base state). Thereby, the extended period of variable display of the first special symbol can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a fourth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration has been described in which a pending change suggestion performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot is executed as a suggestion performance based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination. In modification 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion performance based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion performance that suggests the type of jackpot when a look-ahead determination is made that it is a jackpot. may be executable.

For example, during a small hit game in the high probability/first KT state, if a pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a 2R normal jackpot is stored, that is, from the high probability/first KT state to the low probability/first KT state If it is known that there will be a transition, it may be possible to perform a performance that is disappointing for the player (disappointment performance) during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, in a small winning game before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory that has been determined to be a 2R normal jackpot, the background image may be displayed darkly, or the background image may be a skull or crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggesting performance may be performed for the target hold memory, such as changing the hold display to a hold display with an image of a skull mark attached.

On the other hand, during a small winning game in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, if a pending memory is stored that has been pre-read and determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, that is, a high probability/ If it is known that the first KT state or the low probability/first KT state will shift to the second KT state, a performance that is pleasing to the player (high expectation performance) may be made possible during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, in a small winning game before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory that has been determined to be a 10R definite strange jackpot or a 2R definite strange jackpot, the background image may be displayed brightly (in rainbow color). , an image of an angel mark or an effect image may be displayed on the background image. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed for the target hold memory, such as changing the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark attached.

In addition, if multiple small winning games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the pending memory of the target that has been determined to be read ahead is executed, similar suggestive effects (unfortunate A presentation or a high expectation presentation) may be performed, that is, a suggestion presentation may be performed multiple times. In addition, if multiple variable displays are executed before the variable display corresponding to the target pending memory is executed, in addition to the small winning game state, similar suggestions will be made in the multiple variable displays. You may also perform a performance. That is, such a suggestive effect may be continuously executed until variable display based on the pending memory of the target determined in advance is started.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a fifth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, the rate at which it is decided to change the display mode of the pending display during the variable display in FIG. ) has been explained as the same ratio as the determination ratio of changing the reservation display together with the reservation change suggestion performance during the small winning game (the determination ratio of the reservation change suggestion performance). In modification 5, the change determination ratio during variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be set to be different ratios.

For example, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be higher than the change determination ratio during variable display. This makes it easier to change the hold display accompanied by hold change suggestion performance than to change the hold display during variable display, and it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small winning game state is controlled.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the reservation change suggestion performance may be set to different ratios depending on the result of pre-reading judgment (judgment of jackpot) for the target pending storage information. For example, when it is determined that a jackpot will be executed by the look-ahead judgment, the decision ratio of the pending change suggestion performance is set to be higher than the change decision ratio during the variable display. In this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be set to be lower than the change determination ratio during variable display. As a result, a change in the hold display accompanied by a hold change suggestion effect can be made to be a highly anticipated effect than a change in the display mode of the hold display during variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the reservation change suggestion performance during the small winning game.

Note that in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), the pending display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as a mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be higher than the change determination ratio during variable display. That is, among the performances that change the display mode of the hold display, the performance that changes the display mode of the hold display together with the hold change suggestion performance during the small winning game may be the one that is most likely to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during the chance time mode in which the small winning game state is controlled.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a sixth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-mentioned embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, the false hold change suggestion performance during the small winning game is executed when all the final colors of the hold memory during hold display are gray (see FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70:YES) was explained. In modification 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the false hold change suggestion effect during the small winning game is a special display whose final color is other than gray in the hold memory during the hold display. It may also be possible to execute the process even when the pending storage determined as the mode is stored.

In this case, it may be easier to perform a fake pending change suggestion performance for a pending memory whose final color is determined to be a gray display mode, rather than a pending memory that is determined to be a special display mode. As a result, even if a suspended memory determined to have a special display mode is stored, a false suspended change suggestion effect can be performed for a suspended memory determined to have a display mode whose final color is gray. It is possible to liven up the performance during the winning game.

In addition, conversely, for a suspended memory determined to have a special display mode, it may be easier to perform a fake pending change suggestion effect than for a suspended memory determined to have a display mode whose final color is gray. For example, for a pending memory whose final color is determined to be a special display mode, a false pending change suggestion performance may be forcibly executed, and the pending change suggestion performance may not be executed. In this case, in active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, it is possible to purposely lower the player's expectations at the stage of pending display, and correspondingly increase the sense of expectation when the display mode changes at the stage of active display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion performance.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a seventh modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration has been described in which the pending change suggestion presentation, the set value suggestion presentation, and the probability change suggestion presentation are performed as the suggestion presentation. In modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to perform an explanation and suggestion performance regarding the progress of the game as a suggestion performance.

For example, the explanation-suggestive performance is a text-image-based performance regarding the progress of the game in the chance time mode. Specifically, it is an explanation-suggestive performance such as "Maybe you can move to the normal mode after 50 games?" or "Small win". ``RUSH mode is almost here!'' and the possibility of being controlled to a high probability state in chance mode at the time of the first hit (62% = ``56/56 + 35''%: see Figure 11-1). Is the probability of a definite change over 60%?'' This is an explanatory and suggestive performance.

Here, in the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming state is controlled to be one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a high probability/first KT state, a low probability/first KT state, and a second KT state, Furthermore, since the game state changes, it may be difficult for the player to understand the content of the game. Therefore, by making the explanatory and suggestive performance of Modification 7 executable, the player can easily understand the game states to which the player can transition after the chance mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification example 8 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, modification 8 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, a configuration in which the feature section 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times has passed. Here, an example of the specifications of an ST pachinko game machine will be described.

For example, in an ST machine, when a variable probability jackpot is executed, the machine is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number) is executed, and once the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, the high probability state is maintained. Transition from a probability state to a low probability state.

Furthermore, when a variable probability jackpot is executed, the game is controlled to a high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the variable probability jackpot game. The period (variable display number) controlled to the high probability/first KT state is a period (transition fluctuation number) according to the probability variable jackpot symbol. After being controlled to the high probability/first KT state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the state shifts from the high base state (high probability/first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state). The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of times ST.

As a result, it becomes possible to control the second KT state after the number of transition fluctuations has elapsed until the number of ST has elapsed, that is, a small winning game in which winning can be expected is performed. Note that if the jackpot is not won even once before the variable display of the number of STs is executed in the second KT state, the state returns to the normal state by the variable display of the number of STs. Here, when the small win game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small win game state (for example, the display of the small win notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9) be executable.

Further, in the ST machine, when a normal jackpot symbol is executed, the game is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period (variable display number) controlled to the low probability/first KT state is usually a period (transition fluctuation number) according to the jackpot symbol. After being controlled to the low probability/first KT state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the high base state (low probability/first KT state) shifts to the low base state (normal state).

A common effect (for example, chance time mode) may be executable in the high probability/first KT state and the low probability/first KT state. In the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, a winning ball cannot be expected.

In modification 8, when the ST machine is controlled to a small winning game state in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), a suggestive effect that suggests contents advantageous to the player is provided. (For example, any one of the pending change suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance, and the probability change suggestion performance) may be made executable.

According to modification example 8, even if the small winning game in the first KT state in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is progressing smoothly is created by executing the suggestion effect. can be given to the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the first KT state. Particularly, in the ST pachinko game machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state. Note that the pachinko game machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, but may have other specifications as long as a small winning game in which the game balls hardly win a prize is executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature section 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and small hits occur frequently in variable probability gaming states (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-033787.). However, when a small winning game is executed in which few game balls win prizes, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. be. Specifically, for example, if a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed, the special symbol will be stopped and displayed each time in the small winning game state, and the game will proceed smoothly. There is a risk that players may be given the impression that the For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable and may lose interest in the game.

(Means D1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 according to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine that can play games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can play games), and has a gaming state control that controls the gaming state. means (for example, the part that executes steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols); Variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the results (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4), and the effect execution means (for example, the effect A control CPU 120), and the gaming state control means is configured to control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), The advantageous state and the special state are controllable into a non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are controlled by the variable state. When the display is not performed and the performance execution means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the performance execution means executes a special performance corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, a small hit shown in FIG. 10-9). notification image 020SH202, small symbol 020SH201, and winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the content is a production different from the special production and advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pending change suggestive effect shown in FIG. 11-11(E)).

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, A small winning game in a non-special state can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Particularly, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state by the suggestive performance.

(Means D2)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D2 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means D1, the performance execution means displays decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) in response to the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to perform a variable display, and when controlled to the special state in the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a special display result (for example, a fixed symbol "1," which is a combination indicating a small winning game). 3, 5"), and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a predetermined display result different from the special display result (a combination of decorative patterns indicating a loss). Display.

According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning hole during a small winning game, so a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) is forcibly stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

(Means D3)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D3 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means D1 or the means D2, regarding the variable display that has not yet started, the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. a pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the display result shown in FIG. 10(E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a suggestive effect based on the determination result of the prefetch determination, it is possible to increase expectations for pending storage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D4)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D4 according to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1D to the means D3 is provided with a reservation storage means for storing information regarding the variable display as reservation storage information, and the performance execution means displays the suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means as a suspension display (for example, suspension display 020SH206 shown in (A) of FIG. 11-10), and acts on the suspension display in the suggestion performance. When an effect (for example, the effect image 020SH213 shown in FIG. 11-10 (E)) is executable and the display mode of the pending display changes, and when the display mode of the pending display does not change, There is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a series of effects including action effects and effects that change the display mode of the pending display, thereby drawing attention to the pending display and increasing expectations for the pending memory. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D5)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D5 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D4, the setting value is set to one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-12) that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.

According to such a configuration, in a small winning game in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can be allowed to guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D6)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D6 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D5, the non-special state includes a first non-special state (for example, a non-probability variable state: low probability state). /first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, variable probability state: high probability/first KT state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state, and the effect execution means , a common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when controlled to the first non-special state and when controlled to the second non-special state, and the suggested effect is 2 suggests that it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, the common performance is executed when the control is in either the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, and the probability change suggestion performance is performed in the small winning game during the chance time mode. Since it is executable, it is possible to have the player guess whether or not the probability variable state is in the small winning game in the high probability/first KT state and the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D7)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D7 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D6, the effect execution means may perform a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different modes as the suggestion effect (for example, , the odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the setting value 4 or more suggestion shown in (B) of FIG. The degree of advantage of the content suggested differs.

According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion performances, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestion performances, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion performances from becoming monotonous performances. Further, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the suggestion performance, the degree of attention of the player can be varied depending on the suggestion performance executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D8)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D8 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D7, the variable display execution means is configured to change the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). A first state in which the display and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the game medium easily passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting prize opening). and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting area. 1. The variable prize winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that is easy to change to the first state, and the production execution means can be controlled to change to the special state (for example, small winning game state) in the predetermined state. The suggestion effect can be executed when controlled.

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game in the first KT state in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly. The small winning game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state.

(Means D9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D9 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D8, there is a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a winning state (open state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in the winning difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is configured to control the entering prize in the special state. The effect execution means executes the suggested effect in response to the second variable winning means changing to the easy winning state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 and to draw attention to the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the small winning game.

(Means D10)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D10 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D9, the gaming state control means controls the gaming medium in a specific area (for example, a special area) in the special state. The advantageous state can be controlled based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 17 has passed through a specific area (so-called V area).

According to such a configuration, even if a small winning game is executed in a normal state (non-special state) in which most game balls do not win in a pachinko game machine in which the characteristic part 020SH is a combination of one type and two types, the game can be smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing, and in other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the normal state.

(Means D11)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D11 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D10, the performance execution means is configured to provide a game medium when controlled to the special state in the special state. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, that the game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special prize opening), it corresponds to the passing of the game medium through the special area. A predetermined effect (for example, winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-11(C)) can be executed, and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the game medium passes through the special area. Regardless of whether or not, the predetermined effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, it is possible to encourage the player to win a prize in the special variable winning hole, thereby increasing the interest in the second KT state. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the 1st KT state, although the game ball may occasionally enter the special variable winning slot, in order to avoid executing the prescribed effect, the winning in the small win in the 1st KT state is It is possible to prevent players from having expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 022SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 022SH will be explained. The gaming machine according to the feature section 022SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 022SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, and the pre-start determination means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12.

The gaming state control means controls the gaming state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, and a special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, and is, for example, a small winning gaming state.

The special state is a state in which gaming value is likely to be given due to the special state, and is, for example, the second KT state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. Note that the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state) is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is also a gaming state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. . That is, the first KT state is a state in which almost no gaming value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to characteristic part 022SH, it is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state. The advantageous game mentioned here is a jackpot that causes the player to move to the second KT state after the jackpot game state ends. The gaming state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, and can control to the jackpot gaming state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The performance execution means controls the performance mode to be the small hit RUSH mode in the second KT state. In the second KT state, the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, and no other performance mode is controlled. Further, the small hit RUSH mode is also an effect mode that is controlled only in the second KT state. In other words, when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, the second KT state is always controlled.

When the effect execution means is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded as a state after being controlled to be in an advantageous state. The time when the game is controlled in an advantageous state is the time when the game is controlled by the current jackpot game. The states in which gaming value can be awarded are the second KT state and the next jackpot game state. The specific display is a display corresponding to the subsequent existence (occurrence) of the second KT state and the next jackpot game state.

For example, the specific display is an image (hereinafter referred to as a "bonus rush icon") corresponding to the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) and the next jackpot game state. Specifically, the specific display includes a plurality of icon images corresponding to the current jackpot, icon images corresponding to the subsequent second KT state, and icon images corresponding to the next jackpot won in the second KT state. Consists of icon images.

The bonus rush icon may be displayed in any shape such as a circle, square, or triangle, or may have letters or symbols attached. Each icon image of the bonus rush icon is an image indicating a blank space when the corresponding state (game) is not completed, and changes to an image with a predetermined color when the corresponding state is completed. The blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot, the blank icon image corresponding to the second KT state, and the blank icon image corresponding to the next jackpot, which constitute the bonus rush icon, are all displayed in the same manner. is displayed.

In addition, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can change the display mode of the specific display according to a controlled state among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which gaming value can be given. It is. For example, when the current jackpot ends, the performance execution means changes the display mode of the blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot in a predetermined manner. Specifically, the performance execution means adds red to the blank bonus rush icon and changes the display mode to show a state in which the blank is filled. Note that changing the display mode is not limited to adding color and filling in the blanks; for example, it is also possible to add text such as "done" to the corresponding icon, or change the shape of the corresponding icon. .

Here, the timing of changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be explained. For example, in the case of a bonus rush icon corresponding to a jackpot, the display mode is changed during the ending period of the jackpot. However, the timing at which the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to a jackpot is changed is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, the final round). Further, in the case of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state, the display mode is changed during the fanfare period of the jackpot, for example. However, the timing at which the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is changed is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, during the first round).

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 022SH, there are a plurality of different display modes for specific display. The performance execution means is capable of displaying a specific display in a display mode corresponding to a controlled state among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded. Specifically, when the jackpot ends, the performance execution means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the jackpot to a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot.

Further, when the second KT state ends, the effect execution means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state to a display mode (for example, , yellow).

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means performs a specific display in a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state, and a specific display in a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which gaming value can be awarded. Can be displayed. The specific display of the specific mode is, for example, an icon image filled with red or yellow. The specific display of the predetermined mode is, for example, a blank icon image. The effect execution means is capable of displaying a bonus rush icon including an icon image filled in red and an icon image with a blank space.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can display a specific display over a plurality of states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded. Specifically, the production execution means performs a specific display across the current jackpot gaming state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot gaming state, that is, across multiple gaming states. can be displayed. Further, the performance execution means can always display a specific display, such as during variable display, stop display of symbols, standby for variable display, small win game, jackpot game, etc.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can display the gaming value given in the advantageous state and the gaming value given in the special state, both in the advantageous state and the special state. The game value is, for example, a prize ball. Specifically, the production execution means executes the total prize over the current jackpot gaming state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot gaming state, that is, across multiple gaming states. It is possible to display the number of pitches.

In addition, in the feature part 022SH, when the production execution means is controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state, the effect execution means suggests that it is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the subsequent advantageous state. Execute the performance. Specifically, in the next jackpot game, the performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests that the control will be returned to the second KT state after the next jackpot game. The suggestive performance is, for example, a success/failure performance that indicates either success or failure, and specifically includes a battle performance, a staged performance, and the like.

Further, the performance execution means, in response to the performance result of the suggested performance, displays a specific display in a predetermined manner corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which gaming value can be given as a state after being controlled to a later advantageous state. Can be displayed. For example, when the performance result of the suggested performance is a performance result indicating success, the performance execution means adds and displays a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon in the next jackpot game. On the other hand, when the performance result of the suggested performance is a performance result indicating failure, the performance execution means does not add a blank icon image in the next jackpot game.

For example, the effect execution means can execute a suggestive effect within the same round (for example, in the fifth round) and add and display a blank icon image. However, the effect executing means may execute the suggestive effect over a plurality of rounds to add a blank icon image. For example, a suggestive effect may be performed in the fifth round, and an icon image may be added in the sixth round. Further, the performance execution means may execute the suggested performance over a plurality of rounds.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, a common number of round games are executed in the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. That is, the same number of round games are executed for the current jackpot and the next jackpot. The performance execution means is capable of displaying a specific display in a common display mode when being controlled to the current advantageous state and when being controlled to the later advantageous state. Specifically, the performance execution means displays the icon images corresponding to the respective jackpots in a common display mode with red color, regardless of whether the current jackpot or the next jackpot is completed.

Further, in the characteristic section 022SH, the variable display execution means can execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Specifically, the variable display execution means can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. The game state control means can control the game to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The specific display result is, for example, a display result (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot. For this reason, the gaming state control means controls to the jackpot gaming state when a display result indicating a jackpot is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display.

Furthermore, in the feature section 022SH, the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, in the feature section 022SH, a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol is better than a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol. A jackpot with many is likely to be executed.

The effect executing means is configured to display the specific display when the specific display is displayed when the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information. Erase. Since the specific display is displayed mainly in the second KT state where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information while the specific display is displayed. It is an irregular thing to do.

Here, as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information, when a jackpot that causes the transition to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is derived and displayed, the specific display is not erased. In other words, the performance execution means erases the specific display only when a jackpot is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, excluding a jackpot that causes the transition to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. I decided to.

Here, the timing for erasing the specific display is, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot. For example, even when a jackpot game is played based on the variable display of the first identification information, since the control of the second KT state is completed (the small win RUSH mode is completed) by this jackpot, the icon image is displayed during the fanfare period. , the display mode may be changed to indicate that the second KT state is controlled (for example, yellow), and then (during the fanfare period), the bonus rush icon may be deleted. Further, the timing for erasing the specific display is not limited to the jackpot game based on the variable display of the first identification information, and may be during the round game or during the ending period. When erasing the specific display during a round game, for example, a suggestion performance may be performed, a performance result indicating failure is displayed as a performance result of the suggestion performance, and then the specific display may be erased.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 022SH, the effect execution means can display a specific display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, if the current variable display is a jackpot, the production execution means may display an icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state during the variable display to indicate that the control is to be performed in the second KT state. It is possible to change the appearance (for example, yellow).

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the pre-start determining means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet been started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The judgment performed by the pre-start judgment means is, for example, a look-ahead judgment, and specifically, it is similar to the various judgments (jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) made when starting the open variable display. This is a content judgment. The determination timing performed by the pre-start determination means is a timing before the timing for performing the various determinations.

The performance execution means can display a specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means. For example, if there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot based on the pre-read judgment, the performance execution means may display an icon of a bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state before variable display of this pending memory is started. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, yellow) to indicate that the image is controlled to the second KT state.

(About the transition of the gaming state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature part 022SH)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature section 022SH. In FIG. 12-1, the type of jackpot is different from the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game in the characteristic section 020SH shown in FIG. 11-1. In the explanation of FIG. 12-1, points different from FIG. 11-1 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the feature section 022SH, there are five types of jackpots: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. There is. 10R probability variable jackpot A is a jackpot that causes the player to move to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game. The 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 6R probability variation jackpot are jackpots that cause the player to shift to the high probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. The 10R normal jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot are jackpots that cause the player to enter the low probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. In the case of a 10R jackpot, the same prize ball can be obtained for any jackpot. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH has specifications that make it easier to obtain more prize balls than the above-described feature section 020SH.

Next, the ratio at which each type of jackpot is determined in each gaming state will be explained. For example, in the normal game state, a starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning hole, and a first special symbol is variably displayed. In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize entered into the first starting winning hole (that is, in the normal gaming state), the ratio of 6R normal jackpot is 35%, 6R probability variable jackpot is 30%, and 10R probability variable jackpot A is 35%, respectively. It is determined.

On the other hand, in the low probability/1st KT state, the high probability/1st KT state, and the low probability/2nd KT state, a starting prize mainly occurs in the second starting winning hole, and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. be exposed. In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize in the second starting winning hole (that is, in the low probability/1st KT state, high probability/1st KT state, and low probability/2nd KT state), 10R normal jackpot is 35%, 10R The probability variable jackpot B is determined at a rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a rate of 50%. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 022SH has a higher rate of determining 10R probability variable jackpot A than the above-mentioned feature part 020SH, so it has specifications that make it easier to get more prize balls. There is.

In addition, a common performance is performed during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed based on the 10R probability variable jackpot B and when the jackpot game is executed based on the 10R normal jackpot. Specifically, a common combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed for the 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot performance is also executed during each jackpot game. After the jackpot game, the game is controlled to a common chance time mode.

As a result, the player cannot distinguish the type of jackpot executed between 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, and the gaming states controlled by the jackpot game (high probability/high base state and low probability/ It is also possible to make it impossible for the player to determine whether the player is in a high base state (any of the high base states). Therefore, in the feature section 022SH, the controlled gaming state can be controlled by the player, not only in the so-called first win when changing from the normal mode to the chance time mode, but also when the chance time mode is started from any mode. can be made undetectable.

(About the jackpot type determination table of feature part 022SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot type determination table of the feature section 022SH. FIG. 12-2 (A) is a jackpot type determination table when performing a variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 12-2 (B) is a jackpot type determination table when performing a variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in (A) of Figure 12-2, there are three types of jackpots when performing the variable display of the first special symbol: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. One of the jackpots is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the jackpot types when executing the variable display of the second special symbol include 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B, and 10R normal jackpot. One of three types of jackpots is determined. In both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the rate at which each jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the setting value. Furthermore, in both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the percentage determined to be a variable jackpot is 65%, and the percentage determined to be a normal jackpot is 35%.

Below, (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2 will be compared and explained. 10R probability variable jackpot A is easier to determine in (B) than in (A). Specifically, the 10R probability variable jackpot A is 35% in (A) and 50% in (B). In addition, in (A), 6R probability variable jackpot can be selected, and 10R probability variation jackpot B cannot be selected, but in (B), 10R probability variation jackpot B can be selected, and 6R probability variation jackpot cannot be selected. It is. Regarding normal jackpots, in (A), 6R normal jackpot can be selected (10R normal jackpot cannot be selected), and in (B), 10R normal jackpot can be selected (6R normal jackpot cannot be selected). It is. For this reason, the jackpot type determination using (B) is more likely to determine a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than (A). That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display that is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first special symbol.

(Bonus/rush icon control process at the start of jackpot)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-3, a description will be given of the processing when displaying the bonus rush icon at the start of a jackpot or when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus/rush icon control processing at the start of a jackpot. The bonus rush icon control process at the start of the jackpot is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-3, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 022SHS11). If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 022SHS11: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is.

On the other hand, if the jackpot start designation command is received (step 022SHS11: YES), that is, if a jackpot occurs, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12 ). If it is 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12: YES), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 022SHS14. If it is not a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12: NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13).

If it is not a jackpot based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: NO), that is, if it is a jackpot based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 while the bonus rush icon is being displayed. It is determined whether there is one (step 022SHS14). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS14: NO), the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS15), and ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14: YES), the icon image corresponding to the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) of the bonus rush icon is changed to the small win RUSH mode. A display change effect is set to be executed to change the display mode (yellow) to indicate this (step 022SHS16), and the series of processing ends.

In step 022SHS13, if it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS17: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17: YES), that is, for example, in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), the control is controlled to an irregular jackpot game based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If so, the performance control CPU 120 erases the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS18) and ends the series of processing.

By the above-described process, when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is executed, a bonus rush icon can be displayed during the fanfare period of the jackpot. In addition, when a jackpot game based on the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small win RUSH mode, during the round game, the bonus rush icon is displayed in a display mode indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled (e.g. , yellow). Furthermore, when an irregular jackpot is executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the small win RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon can be erased during the fanfare period.

(Bonus/rush icon control process during round play)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-4, a process for adding a blank space for the bonus rush icon during a round game will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. The bonus rush icon control process during the round game is a process executed in the jackpot performance process of S176 in the performance control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the large winning hole opening display command is received (step 022SHS31). If the big prize opening opening display command is not received (step 022SHS31: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is. If the big winning opening opening display command is received (step 022 SHS31: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the current jackpot is a jackpot when controlled in the small winning RUSH mode. (Step 022 SHS32).

If the current jackpot is not the jackpot when controlled by the small hit RUSH mode (step 022 SHS32: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is a jackpot when controlled by the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS32: YES), it is determined whether or not the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33). In addition, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the fifth round based on the value of a round number counter that indicates the number of rounds of jackpots counted by the CPU 103, or may determine whether the jackpot is open or not. It may be determined whether or not it is the fifth round by counting the number of times display commands have been received.

If the round game is not the fifth round (step 022SHS33: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS34: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35). If it is a 10R variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35: YES), the performance control CPU 120 sets a successful performance as a suggestion performance to add and display a bonus rush icon (step 022SHS36), and performs a series of processing. end. On the other hand, if it is not the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35: NO), the performance control CPU 120 sets a failure performance as a suggested performance (step 022SHS37), and ends the series of processing.

By the above-mentioned process, in the jackpot game in the small hit RUSH mode, if the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, a successful performance can be executed as a suggestion performance, while on the other hand, if the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot B or If it is a 10R normal jackpot, a failure performance can be executed as a suggestion performance.

(Bonus rush icon control process during ending period)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-5, a bonus rush icon control process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during the ending period will be described. FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period. The bonus rush icon control process for the ending period is a process executed in the ending effect process of S177 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51: YES), the performance control CPU 120 displays the icon image corresponding to the current jackpot among the bonus rush icons in a display mode (for example, red) that indicates jackpot completion. A display change effect is set to be executed (step 022SHS52).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53). If the current jackpot is the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53: YES), the production control CPU 120 sets an ending production that indicates a transition to the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS54), and ends the series of processing. . On the other hand, if the current jackpot is not the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022 SHS53: NO), that is, if the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the 10R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 shifts to the chance time mode. An ending effect indicating the following is set to be executed (step 022SHS55), and the series of processing is completed. In addition, the bonus rush icon is not displayed in the chance time mode.

Through the above-described processing, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, red) indicating completion of the jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game. Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot A, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the small win RUSH mode. Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the bonus rush icon can be made not to be displayed in the chance time mode.

(Example of transition between production mode and jackpot production screen)
Next, an example of the transition of the performance mode and the jackpot performance screen will be explained using FIGS. 12-6 to 12-8. FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from normal mode to small hit RUSH mode. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the chance time mode. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues.

FIG. 12-6 (A) shows variable display during normal mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a first small pattern 022SH101 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special pattern. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a variable display of decorative symbols based on the display results, fluctuation patterns, and gaming conditions specified by the performance control command received from the main board 11. Decide on the result (confirmed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute various effects such as reach effect, various preview effects, and effect mode depending on the game status, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing, etc. Based on the determination result, variable display of decorative patterns is executed. In addition, in (A), an active display 022SH110 is displayed in the lower central area of the image display device 5. In (A), when the variable display period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-6 (B) shows the screen when the decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A is derived and displayed in the normal mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a first small pattern 022SH101 are stopped and displayed as a fixed pattern "7, 7, 7" which is a combination indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the production control CPU 120 detects, for example, that an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern 022SH100 (and the first small pattern 022SH101) has been read from the production control pattern, or , In response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the final decorative pattern 022SH100 is to be stopped and displayed, the final decorative pattern 022SH100 that is the display result of the decorative pattern 022SH100 is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-6 (C) shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A and a bonus rush icon 022SH120. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is composed of three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicating blank fields. The three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicate that there is a state in which game value is given three times: the current jackpot, the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot ends, and the next jackpot. In displaying the screen shown in (C), the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 and a bonus rush icon 022SH120 in response to, for example, receiving a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11. let

FIG. 12-6 (D) shows the screen during the 5th round of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the 5th round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A. Further, in (D), a total prize pitch number display 022SH130 is displayed. The total number of prize balls display 022SH130 shows the total number of prize balls during the consecutive games including the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, the total award ball count display 022SH130 may display the fanfare period shown in (C) of FIG. 12-6. Further, in (D), a notification image including the characters "right-handed hit" is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 as a notification image corresponding to right-handed hit notification. In displaying the screen shown in (D), the production control CPU 120 displays the round notification image 022SH106, for example, in response to receiving the big prize opening opening display command from the main board 11.

(E) of FIG. 12-6 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small win RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled, and an icon image 022SH120a (first from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. Images marked with are displayed. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120a is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed. In displaying the screen shown in (E), the production control CPU 120 displays the small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 or the icon image 022SH120a in response to, for example, receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11. Display a colored image.

In this way, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot gaming state.

(F) of FIG. 12-6 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the second special pattern. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed across a plurality of gaming states including a jackpot gaming state and a second KT state (small winning RUSH mode). In addition, in (F), in the right side area of the active display 022SH110 of the image display device 5, a pending display 022SH111 indicating second pending storage is displayed.

FIG. 12-6 (G) shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a confirmed pattern "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game.

(H) of FIG. 12-6 shows a screen during a small winning game in the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when a prize is won in the special winning hole, a winning effect image 022SH131 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) is displayed on the image display device 5. (H) indicates, for example, that two balls have entered the special winning slot and two prize balls (a total of 20 balls have been paid out). In addition, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 shows the total number of prize balls in the jackpot and prize balls in the small win RUSH mode, and can be displayed across the jackpot game state and the small win RUSH mode (second KT state). It is. The total award pitch number display 022SH130 shows a number that has been added by 20 pitches compared to (G) in FIG. 12-6. After this, the screen changes to either (I) in FIG. 12-7 or (I) in FIG. 12-8.

(I) of FIG. 12-7 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode.

(J) in Figure 12-7 shows that in the small hit RUSH mode, a decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating either a probability variable jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B) or a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed. The screen shown is shown below. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a fixed pattern "2, 2, 2" which is a combination of the decorative pattern 022SH100 and the second small pattern 022SH102 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. ” is displayed. In (J), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (K).

(K) of FIG. 12-7 shows a screen during the fanfare period of the jackpot game controlled in the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a definite jackpot or a normal jackpot, and an icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ) is displayed with colored images. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 continues to be displayed even after the transition from the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) to the jackpot game state. In addition, the jackpot notification image 022SH115 shows that the character is holding a bow and arrow, and in the jackpot game, a suggestive effect using the bow and arrow is performed that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to the small win RUSH mode after the jackpot game. Show that.

In this way, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed across a plurality of gaming states, including the previous jackpot gaming state, the second KT state (small winning RUSH mode), and the current jackpot gaming state. Further, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (icon image 022SH120b) is displayed in a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small win RUSH mode (second KT state) is controlled.

FIG. 12-7 (L) shows the screen during the fifth round of the game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a suggestion effect image 022SH116 that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to the small hit RUSH mode after the current jackpot. For example, the suggested effects include a successful effect in which the displayed character hits a target with a bow and arrow, and a failed effect in which the character is unable to hit the target.

(M) in FIG. 12-7 shows a screen indicating failure as a performance result in the suggestive performance. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a failure effect image 022SH117 in which the displayed character was unable to hit the target with a bow and arrow. By displaying the failure performance image 022SH117, it is suggested to the player that the control will not be changed to the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot game.

In addition, in the 5th round, the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed, and in subsequent rounds and ending periods, an image indicating success is displayed. It is also possible to make it possible to perform a performance that shows In addition, as a suggestion effect, a blank icon image prepares effects that are likely to be added or effects that are unlikely to be added, and then executes one of the effects selected based on the judgment. Yes.

(N) in FIG. 12-7 shows a screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a chance time mode shift notification image 022SH118 indicating that the control is to be performed in the chance time mode, and an image in which the blank space (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is filled. Displayed. A colored image of the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed. In this way, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 022SH, the jackpot that can be won in the small win RUSH mode is a jackpot of 10 rounds having the same number of rounds. Therefore, the gaming value given to the players by the jackpot games in the small jackpot RUSH mode is the same. For this reason, in the feature section 022SH, when the icon image of the bonus rush icon 022SH is displayed in a display mode indicating the completion of a jackpot, the icon image is uniformly displayed in "red" regardless of the jackpot type.

Also, among the icon images 022SH120a to 120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120, the bottom icon image 022SH120a and the top icon image 022SH120c are colored red, and the middle icon image 022SH120b is colored yellow. That will happen. Therefore, when displaying the icon images 022SH120a to 120c (for example, see (C) in FIG. 12-6), the bottom icon image 022SH120a, the top icon image 022SH120c, and the middle icon image 022SH120b are displayed. may be displayed in a different display mode from the beginning (from the blank state). For example, the middle icon image 022SH120b may have a larger display area than the other icon images 022SH120a and 120c. As a result, even if each icon image 022SH120a to 120c is blank, the player can tell whether the icon image corresponds to a jackpot or a small win RUSH mode depending on the display mode of the blank. can be suggested.

(O) in FIG. 12-7 shows variable display during the chance time mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the second special pattern. Note that the chance time mode is controlled when the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state). In the chance time mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is erased.

Next, FIG. 12-8 will be explained. (I) to (L) in FIG. 12-8 are screens similar to the screens shown in (I) to (L) in FIG. 12-7. Therefore, descriptions of (I) to (L) in FIG. 12-8 will be omitted.

(M) in FIG. 12-8 shows a screen indicating success as a result of the suggestion performance. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a success effect image 022SH127 in which the displayed character was able to hit a target with a bow and arrow. Furthermore, two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blank spaces are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. These two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are given gaming value for two times after the jackpot ends (after the second jackpot) and the next jackpot (third jackpot). Indicates that a new state has been added. In this way, in the bonus rush icon 022SH120, the icon images 022SH120a, 120b have a display mode (red or yellow) that corresponds to a completed game, and a blank space corresponds to the fact that there are multiple states in which game value can be awarded afterward. The icon images 022SH120c to 120e in the display mode can be displayed at the same time.

(N) in FIG. 12-8 shows the screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (the third one from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ) is displayed with colored images. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed.

(O) of FIG. 12-8 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode.

After this, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (P), when the 10R probability variable jackpot A is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, each time the bonus rush icon 022SH120 has two icons indicating a blank field. Images 022SH120f and 120g are additionally displayed.

In addition, in the explanation of FIG. 12-8, it was not made clear that it was a 10R probability variable jackpot A until the result of the suggestion effect was displayed, but when the variable display result was derived and displayed, it was confirmed that it was a 10R probability variation jackpot A. You may also specify that. That is, in the explanation of FIG. 12-8, in the variable display determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A, the decorative pattern 022SH100 is displayed as a combination "2, 2, 2", and during the jackpot game, the success effect image 022SH127 is displayed by the suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable display that is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A, the decorative pattern 022SH100 may be displayed. , the combination "7, 7, 7" indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A may be displayed in a stopped state.

In this case, the timing at which the two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 may be, for example, during the fanfare period, during the round game, or during the ending period. In addition, in this case, although the combination "7, 7, 7" of the decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A is stopped and displayed, before adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH120, Suggestive performances may also be performed. In this case, since it is clear that a performance indicating success will be performed as a result performance in the suggestion performance, the player can watch the suggestion performance and play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, since the combination "7, 7, 7" indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A has already been stopped and displayed, two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 without performing any suggestive effect. You may let them.

In addition, when it is determined that it is a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A, it is determined whether to perform a production that clearly indicates that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, or to perform a production that does not clearly indicate that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and either of the productions determined by the judgment is performed. You may also do so.

(Bonus rush icon control processing in variable display)
Next, a process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon in variable display will be explained using FIG. 12-9. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing in variable display. The bonus rush icon control process in the variable display is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the production control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-9, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit RUSH mode is in effect (step 022SHS71). If it is not in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is. If it is in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot based on the pre-read determination (step 022SHS72).

If there is a pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a jackpot (step 022SHS72: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a change in the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS73). The determination at step 022SHS73 uses the bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10(A).

(About bonus/rush icon display change determination table)
Here, the bonus/rush icon display change determination table will be explained using FIG. 12-10. FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table used to determine whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to pending storage.

Specifically, (A) in FIG. 12-10 is a table showing the execution rate of bonus/rush icon display changes for each type of jackpot, which is used when a jackpot is determined by the look-ahead judgment. . More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (A), "pre-reading determination result" indicates the jackpot type based on the pre-reading determination. Further, the "bonus rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" where the display change is performed and "no" where the display change is not performed.

For example, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot A, the display change rate of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of display changes of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Therefore, when the pending memory of the jackpot is stored, 10R probability variable jackpot A is better, that is, when the small win RUSH mode continues after the jackpot game, it is better when the small win RUSH mode does not continue after the jackpot game. It is now easier to change the display of the bonus rush icon.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon as a result of the determination in step 022SHS73 (step 022SHS74). If the display of the bonus rush icon is not changed (step 022SHS74: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

When changing the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS74: YES), the production control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the corresponding icon image to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. A display change effect is set to be executed (step 022SHS75), and the series of processing is completed.

In step 022SHS72, if there is no pending memory pre-read and determined to be a jackpot (step 022SHS72: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in the current variable display. (Step 022SHS76). If the display result of the jackpot is not derived and displayed in the current variable display (step 022SHS76: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed in the current variable display (step 022 SHS76: YES), the display of the bonus rush icon has already been changed at the stage of pending storage before the current variable display starts. It is determined whether or not (step 022SHS77). If the bonus rush icon has already changed its display at the stage of pending storage (step 022SHS77: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the bonus rush icon has not changed its display at the stage of pending storage (step 022SHS77: NO), it is determined whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon has changed (step 022SHS78), and the process moves to step 022SHS74. The determination at step 022SHS78 uses the bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10(B).

Here, (B) of FIG. 12-10 is a table used when determining whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, (B) in FIG. 12-10 shows the execution rate of the bonus/rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when it is determined to be a jackpot by the jackpot judgment corresponding to the variable display. This is the table shown. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (B), "Jackpot determination result" indicates the jackpot type when the current variable display is a jackpot. Further, the "bonus rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" where the display change is performed and "no" where the display change is not performed.

For example, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot A, the display change rate of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of display changes of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Therefore, during the variable display where the display result of the jackpot is derived, 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot (when the small win RUSH mode ends after the jackpot game) is better than 10R probability variable jackpot A. Also (than when the small win RUSH mode continues after the jackpot game), the display change of the bonus rush icon is more likely to occur.

By using the tables shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and (B), it is possible to suggest the continuation or termination of the small win RUSH mode, depending on the timing at which the bonus rush icon changes in display. Specifically, if the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes while it is stored on hold, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue, and the display mode of the bonus rush icon will change during variable display. If it changes, it can suggest that there is a high possibility that the small win RUSH mode will end.

In addition, in the above description, it was suggested that the small hit RUSH mode may continue depending on whether the information regarding the variable display of the target is being stored on hold or being displayed variablely, but the information is not limited to this. For example, regarding the information regarding the variable display of the target, the small hit RUSH mode continues depending on whether the variable display result (jackpot symbol) is displayed before the derivation is displayed (during storage or variable display) or after the derivation is displayed (during a jackpot game). You can also suggest possibilities. Specifically, before the variable display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue; on the other hand, after the variable display result is derived and displayed, the small hit RUSH mode will continue. It may be possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the process will be terminated.

(Screen transition when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display)
Next, the transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display will be explained using FIGS. 12-11. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display.

(A) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started in the small winning RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating second pending storage is displayed. The pending display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and specifically, it is a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot. The pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is, for example, a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot by the pre-read determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), an image in which the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored yellow is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that a jackpot game will be played (that the small jackpot RUSH mode will end or be interrupted). In addition, the color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is, for example, a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small winning RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-11 (C) shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a confirmed pattern "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game. After (C), the small winning game state is controlled, and when the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the screen shown in (D).

(D) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, (D) shows the screen when the highly anticipated pending display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and variable display is started.

In (E) of FIG. 12-11, in the small hit RUSH mode, a decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating either a variable probability jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B) or a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is displayed. The screen shown is shown below. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

(G) in FIG. 12-11 shows a screen showing success as a performance result in the suggestion performance performed in the fifth round. Specifically, when the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variable jackpot A, a success effect image 127 is displayed as shown in (G). Note that if the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variable jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot, a failure performance image 022SH117 is displayed in (G) as shown in (M) of FIG. 12-7. Furthermore, in (G), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blank spaces are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

(H) in FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (the third one from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ) is displayed with colored images. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot (second jackpot) has been completed.

Note that the symbol fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of (A) to (C) in FIGS. 12-11 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing for coloring the icon image 022SH120b shown in (B) may be approximately the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed.

Further, the timing for adding color (yellow) to the icon image 022SH120b may be, for example, the timing when the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing when the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and The timing may be after the start of the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113.

Moreover, before performing the effect of adding color to the icon image 022SH120b, an exciting effect may be performed. For example, the inciting effect includes an action effect that acts on the icon image 022SH120b. After this action rendering, a rendering of adding color to the icon image 022SH120b may be performed. Note that after the exciting effect, a so-called fake effect may be performed in which the icon image 022SH120b is not colored.

As explained above, in the embodiment described above, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 allows a plurality of states (the second KT state and the next jackpot game) in which gaming value can be given as a state after the jackpot game in the jackpot game. It can be suggested that it exists. For example, in the current jackpot game, after the current jackpot game, there are at least two or more states that are advantageous to the player, including the second KT state and the next jackpot game (in this embodiment, after the current jackpot game) It can be suggested that there are three states: a game, a second KT state, and the next jackpot game. Therefore, in the current jackpot game, it can be made clear that a situation advantageous to the player may occur thereafter, so that the player can be further excited during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the timing for adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating two blank fields to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is during the round game in 10R probability variable jackpot A. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification 1, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating two blank spaces to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is changed to a variable display. A case will be explained in which the result (jackpot symbol) is displayed before it is derived and displayed.

To be more specific, when it is determined that it is a jackpot by the pre-reading judgment, and this pending memory is determined to be a jackpot that causes a transition to the second KT state after the jackpot, the performance execution means related to the feature part 022SH, Before the variable display of the reserved memory is started, a blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. In addition, the performance execution means may add a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon during the variable display, if the current variable display is a jackpot and is a jackpot that moves to the second KT state after the jackpot. .

Next, the transition of the effect screen according to Modification 1 will be explained. FIG. 12-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the production screen according to Modification 1 when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed. (A) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started during the small winning RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating second pending storage is displayed. The pending display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode in which the expectation of a jackpot is high. The pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is a pending memory that has been determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A based on the pre-read determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blank spaces are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A and that the small win RUSH mode will continue.

(C) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode.

(D) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the highly anticipated pending display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and variable display is started. In (D), when the variable display period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (E).

(E) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and an image in which the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored. ing. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-12 (G) shows the screen during the 5th round of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the 5th round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A.

(H) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (the third one from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ) is displayed with colored images. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed.

The symbol fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of (A) to (C) in FIGS. 12-12 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing for adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in (B) may be approximately the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing for displaying the screen shown in (A) may be approximately the same as the start of the variable display. Good too.

Further, the timing for adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be, for example, the timing at which the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing when the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and The timing may be after the start of the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113.

Moreover, before performing the effect of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e, an inciting effect may be performed. For example, the inciting effect includes an action effect that acts on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. After this action rendering, a rendering of adding two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be performed. Note that after the inciting effect, a so-called fake effect may be performed in which the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are not added.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, a configuration in which the feature section 022 is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 022SH to a so-called mixed type pachinko game machine. It should be noted that since the pachinko game machine of one type and two types is shown in the first modification of the characteristic part 020SH described above, detailed explanation will be omitted and only the necessary points will be described.

In a game machine of one type and two types, the probability of a small win is, for example, about 1/100 in the judgment based on winnings in the first starting winning hole. In addition, even if a small winning game is executed based on a winning in the first starting winning opening, the game ball almost never wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, and even if it does win, a specific It almost never passes through the area (V area). That is, it is almost impossible to expect that a gaming value will be awarded by a small winning game based on a winning in the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the determination based on winning in the second starting winning opening, the small winning probability is, for example, about 1/7 (≈14/100). In addition, when a small winning game is executed based on a winning in the second starting winning opening, the game ball almost enters the special variable winning ball device 17 and almost passes through a specific area (V area). . For this reason, by performing a small winning game based on winnings in the second starting winning opening, the control is almost made into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines that mix one type and two types, depending on the type of jackpot (with a predetermined probability), a special state (for example, time saving state: main (a state in which variable display of the second special figure game is performed) is controlled. In the second modification, for example, the time saving state is controlled until the variable display is performed seven times in the jackpot game. Then, in the second special figure game in the special state, a small winning game is performed, thereby controlling to a jackpot gaming state again. In the jackpot game state, if the second pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a small hit is stored, then a number of jackpot games will be played according to the number of second pending memories that have been pre-read and determined to be a small hit. It turns out.

Here, even in the game of one type and two types mixed type, the small winning probability is constant regardless of the setting value (first starting opening: about 1/100, second starting opening: about 1/7). On the other hand, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each setting value based on winnings in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole is shown below.

When the setting value is "1", it is approximately 1/100.
When the setting value is "2", it is approximately 1/95.
When the setting value is "3", it is approximately 1/90.
When the setting value is "4", it is approximately 1/85.
When the setting value is "5", it is approximately 1/80.
When the setting value is "6", it is approximately 1/75.

Therefore, with regard to the so-called first hit (jackpot in the normal gaming state: jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be increased. On the other hand, for consecutive jackpots (jackpots during time-saving games: jackpots via small winning games based on the variable display of the second special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be reduced. That is, during a time-saving game, the difference in continuation rate depending on the set value can be reduced.

In the second modification, in the jackpot gaming state, a specific display corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpot gaming states can be displayed as a state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The specific display referred to here is a specific display (referred to as a "bonus icon") indicating that a jackpot game will be played thereafter. For example, at the start of a jackpot game, if the second pending memory count that is determined to be a small hit is "2", then the current jackpot and the second pending memory count that is determined to be a small hit and read ahead are "2". There will be three jackpots, including the two jackpots. Therefore, a bonus icon consisting of three icon images indicating that three jackpots will be won is displayed. The timing for displaying the bonus icon may be, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot game.

When the first jackpot game ends, a color (for example, red) indicating that the current jackpot has been completed may be added to the icon image indicating the first blank among the bonus icons. Further, when the second jackpot game ends, a color (for example, red) indicating that the second jackpot has been completed may be added to the icon image indicating the second blank among the bonus icons. Incidentally, if the second pending storage number that is pre-read and determined to be a small win is newly stored at the start of the second jackpot game, a bonus icon indicating a blank space corresponding to that number may be added.

In this way, even in the game machine of the one type and two types combination type, in the jackpot game state, a bonus icon (specific display) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpots can be displayed thereafter.

In the second modification, a case has been described in which a blank space for the bonus icon is displayed in accordance with the second pending storage number that is determined to be a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of times the jackpot is expected to occur based on the variable display number controlled by the special state (time saving state), the number of blank spaces for the bonus icons corresponding to the number of times the jackpot will occur is displayed. Good too. For example, if the small hit probability based on the variable display of the second special symbol is close to 100%, the number of variable displays controlled by the special state (time saving state) and the number of jackpots that can be expected to occur are approximately the same. Since they are equal, blank spaces for bonus icons may be displayed for the number of variable displays controlled by the special state (the number of times a jackpot occurs). Specifically, if the special state is controlled by 3 variations after the jackpot game, at the start of the jackpot game, the current jackpot and the 3 jackpots corresponding to the 3 variable displays in the special state are It is sufficient to display a bonus icon showing four blank fields indicating that the added four jackpots will be made. Then, during the ending period of the current jackpot, the blank space corresponding to the current jackpot may be colored to indicate that the current jackpot has been completed.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the characteristic part 022SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing games (a pachinko gaming machine of one kind and two types mixed type), comprising a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state and a production execution means, the gaming state control means comprising: An advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small win gaming state), and a special state in which gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state (for example, a time-saving state), is controllable to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and is controllable to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state, and the effect execution means: When controlled to the advantageous state, a specific display (e.g., bonus icon ) can be displayed.

According to the second modification, during a jackpot game, a bonus icon is displayed corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded as a subsequent state during the jackpot game. Thereby, for example, in the first jackpot game, it can be suggested that there are at least two or more conditions advantageous to the player after the jackpot game, including the current jackpot and the next jackpot game. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, it is possible to make it clear to the player that a jackpot may occur thereafter, so that the player can be further excited during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot in the one-two type gaming machine.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the configuration for displaying a specific display (bonus rush icon) on the image display device 5 has been described. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in modification 3, a configuration will be described in which a specific display is displayed in an area other than the image display device 5.

For example, it is also possible to display the specific display on a decorative LED or another display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5. First, a case where the specific display is represented by a decorative LED will be described.

When the specific display is represented by decorative LEDs, for example, a predetermined number of decorative LEDs are arranged on the game board 2. Specifically, for example, ten LEDs are arranged vertically on the game board 2. Then, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is controlled, the three decorative LEDs from the bottom are lit in white in the jackpot game. The white lighting of the three decorative LEDs indicates that there is a state in which the game value is awarded three times: the current jackpot, the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot. show.

Then, during the ending period of the first jackpot, the bottom LED of the three LEDs lit in white is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the first jackpot has been completed. Further, when controlled to a jackpot game state (second jackpot) in the small win RUSH mode, the second LED from the bottom is lit in yellow during the fanfare period of the jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the small hit RUSH mode has been controlled.

Furthermore, during the ending period of the second jackpot, the third LED from the bottom is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the second jackpot has been completed. In addition, if the second jackpot is 10R variable jackpot A, in the jackpot game state (for example, 5th round), if you further light up the 4th and 5th two LEDs from the bottom in white, good. By lighting these two LEDs in white, a new state has been added in which the game value is given for two times, the small win RUSH mode after the second jackpot and the third jackpot. I can do it.

Note that if the series continues, all 10 decorative LEDs may light up. In this case, it is assumed that the first round of lighting has ended, and the second round of lighting is started. Specifically, the display mode of the bottom LED may be changed and turned on. For example, the bottom LED may be lit in a color (for example, purple) that indicates the second round of lighting. Furthermore, even if the jackpot or small win RUSH mode is completed after the second round of lighting, the corresponding LEDs may be lit in a display mode different from that of the first round.

In this way, by representing the specific display with the decorative LED, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative LED, and the display area of the image display device 5 can be effectively utilized.

Next, a configuration that allows the bonus rush icon to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal will be described. All of the bonus rush icons related to the feature section 022SH described above may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal. Further, the bonus rush icon may be displayed in different display areas depending on the gaming state. For example, the bonus rush icon may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the jackpot game state, and may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal in the small win RUSH mode. As a result, in the small win RUSH mode, the image display device 5 can draw attention to the prize balls in the small win game and the cumulative number of prize balls in a consecutive game, and in the jackpot game state, the bonus rush icon can draw attention to. Thereby, the image display device 5 and the sub-liquid crystal can be effectively utilized.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a fourth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled is set to one display mode (for example, yellow). In modification 4, a case will be described in which a plurality of display modes can be used as the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled.

To be more specific, the performance execution means related to the feature section 022SH may display the bonus rush icon in a display manner according to the number of times the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) continues. For example, in the small win RUSH mode, when a variable display of 50 fluctuations or more is executed and the control is made into a jackpot game state (when the degree of profit in the small win RUSH mode is high), the performance execution means - Change the display mode of the rush icon to yellow.

Furthermore, in the small hit RUSH mode, when a variable display of less than 50 fluctuations is executed and the jackpot game state is controlled (when the degree of profit in the small hit RUSH mode is low), the performance execution means provides a bonus - Change the display mode of the rush icon to blue. Thereby, the number of continuations for each small win RUSH mode can be suggested to the player by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed in more yellow than in blue, the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a fifth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed is one display mode (for example, red). In modification 5, a case will be described in which the bonus rush icon can have a plurality of display modes when the jackpot game is completed.

To be more specific, the performance execution means related to the feature section 022SH may display the icon image of the bonus rush icon in a display manner depending on the type of jackpot. For example, when a jackpot game of 10R variable jackpot A is played, the performance execution means changes the display mode of the bonus rush icon to red. Thereby, by displaying the bonus rush icon in a red display mode, it is possible to suggest continuation of the small win RUSH mode (continuation of consecutive wins). Further, the performance execution means displays the bonus rush icon in green when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot B or a jackpot game of 10R normal jackpot is performed. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in green, thereby indicating the end of the small win RUSH mode (end of consecutive wins).

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature part 022SH, the jackpot type of the jackpot that can continue the small hit RUSH mode is one type of 10R probability variable jackpot A, but it may be multiple types. For example, the jackpot type of the jackpot that allows the small hit RUSH mode to continue may be a 5R probability variable jackpot in addition to the 10R probability variable jackpot A. In this case, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is played, the performance execution means changes the display mode of the bonus rush icon to red. In addition, when a jackpot game of 5R probability-variable jackpot is performed, the performance execution means displays the bonus rush icon in orange. As a result, the awarded gaming value can be indicated by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed more in red than orange, the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a sixth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, as shown in FIG. The icon image is the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, in modification 6, an icon whose display mode is to be changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed) The image may be the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom (see FIG. 12-11).

Specifically, in the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, before the start of the jackpot game, the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom of the bonus rush icon is displayed to indicate that the small winning RUSH mode has been controlled. A case has been described in which the display mode is given a color (yellow). In modification 6, before the start of the jackpot game (before the display results of the variable display are derived and displayed), the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom of the bonus rush icon (see Figure 12-11) is displayed when the jackpot is played. The display may be colored to indicate that it is being executed.

Specifically, if there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot by the pre-read determination, an effect may be performed in which the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom are colored red. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the next jackpot will be executed before the jackpot starts.

Further, the display mode after the change of the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom is not limited to the display mode in which red is added, but may be a display mode according to the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the three eyes from the bottom is displayed in red. , In addition, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the display mode may be pink. Thereby, the type of jackpot to be executed can be suggested by the display mode (color) of the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom.

In addition to this, for example, if the jackpot type obtained by look-ahead judgment for the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the three eyes from the bottom is changed to the flashing speed. It may be possible to make it easier to blink quickly. Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the icon images 022SH120c of the three eyes from the bottom may be set to a lighting mode with a slow blinking speed. Thereby, the type of jackpot that is likely to be executed can be suggested by the display mode (flashing mode) of the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a seventh modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the bonus rush icon can be displayed from the start of the jackpot that triggers the start of the small win RUSH mode until the end of the jackpot that ends the small win RUSH mode. And so. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification Example 7, even if the small winning RUSH mode ends and the transition to the chance time mode (first KT state) occurs (falls), the bonus A case where the rush icon can be continuously displayed will be explained.

In the small hit RUSH mode, when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot is executed, the game is controlled to chance time mode (first KT state: high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state). Here, it is quite possible that a jackpot will occur even during the chance time mode. Therefore, in the seventh modification, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even during the chance time mode.

For example, in the chance time mode, all icon images of bonus rush icons are displayed in a colored state. Further, the timing for erasing the bonus rush icon may be at the time of transition from the chance time mode to the normal mode. In addition, if a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is played in the chance time mode, that is, if a jackpot game that moves to the small hit RUSH mode is played, a blank space will be displayed in the bonus rush icon being displayed. All you have to do is add and display the icon image.

Further, the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed only in the chance time mode in the high probability/high base state. When controlled to a high probability/high base state, it is certain that at least one more jackpot will occur. For this reason, during the execution of the jackpot game (10R guaranteed variable jackpot B) that transitions (falls) from the small win RUSH mode to the chance time mode, an effect is performed in which one blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. Good too. As a result, even if the player falls into the chance time mode, the player plays the game with the hope that at least one more jackpot that is guaranteed to occur will become the 10R probability variable jackpot A (transition to the small hit RUSH mode). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the game time mode.

The chance time mode is an effect mode in which the player is not required to distinguish whether the control is in a high probability/high base state or in a low probability/high base state. Here, in the chance time mode, if a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added is displayed, it would be possible for the player to determine that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state. Become. For this reason, when displaying the bonus rush icon while being controlled in a high probability/high base state, instead of controlling the chance time mode, a separate It may also be controlled to be in production mode.

Also, when controlled to a high probability/high base state, a performance judgment is made as to whether or not to continue displaying the bonus rush icon, and depending on the result of the performance judgment, the bonus rush icon continues to be displayed. It may also be displayed. Specifically, if a positive determination result is obtained by the performance determination, a bonus rush icon to which one blank icon image is added may be displayed in the high probability/high base state. As a result, even if the bonus rush icon is not displayed, there is a possibility that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state, so the player can play in the hope that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state. can do.

Note that in Modification 7 as well, when adding a blank icon image, a suggestive effect (for example, see FIGS. 12-8 (L) and (M)) may be performed. In addition, as suggested effects, we prepare effects that have a high possibility that two blank icon images will be added, effects that have a high possibility that one icon image will be added, effects that have a high possibility that they will not be added, and make judgments. You can also choose to execute one of the effects selected by Thereby, the interest of the suggestive performance can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 022SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned characteristic part 022SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known that is controlled to a special state in which the small winning gaming state is controlled more frequently than the normal state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952). . Furthermore, pachinko gaming machines are known that display a preview image corresponding to the fact that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a high probability state and a high base state during a round game in a jackpot gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -135166). However, simply notifying the player of the gaming status after the end of the jackpot does not provide the player with a clear understanding of the status in which gaming value can be awarded afterward, resulting in insufficient interest.

(Means E1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means E1 according to the characteristic part 022SH is a gaming machine that can play games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can play games), and has a gaming state control that controls the gaming state. A means (for example, a part that executes steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and a performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120). , the gaming state control means provides an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and a gaming value is provided by the special state. It is possible to control the special state (for example, the second KT state) in which it is easy to be defeated, and to control to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A), After being controlled to the special state, the next jackpot game state using the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 12-2: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B, and 10R normal When the performance execution means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A), the production execution means is capable of controlling the effect to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state. A specific display (bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-6(C)) corresponding to the existence of multiple states (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot game state) in which gaming value can be given as the state of It can be displayed (for example, the process performed by the production control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 in FIG. 12-3).

According to such a configuration, the specific display can suggest that, in an advantageous state, there are a plurality of states in which gaming value can be awarded as states after the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the state in which a gaming value can be given later depending on the advantageous state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction in an advantageous situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E2)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E2 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E1, the performance execution means is configured to control the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and the game machine according to the means E1. Corresponds to a controlled state (for example, current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) among states that include a plurality of states that can be given value (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot gaming state) The display mode of the specific display can be changed by changing the display mode of the specific display (a bonus rush icon 022SH120 is added to the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed, as shown in step 022SHS52 of FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)). (The display mode can be changed.)

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be changed according to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clarify the state in which gaming value has already been awarded. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the progress status of the game with respect to the state in which the game value is given, depending on the display mode of the specific display. This allows the player to feel satisfied because the game value has already been awarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E3)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E3 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E1 or the means E2, the specific display may include a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode). ), and the performance execution means is configured to control the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and the plurality of states in which the gaming value can be awarded (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot Among the states including (gaming state), the display mode corresponding to the controlled state (for example, the red color corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game shown in step 022SHS52 of FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)) It is possible to display a specific display such as the display mode and the yellow display mode shown in step 022SHS16 of FIG. 12-3 and FIG. 12-6(E) indicating that the control is in the second KT state.

According to such a configuration, the type of state in which gaming value has already been given can be clarified by the display mode of the specific display. Thereby, the player can easily understand the type of state in which gaming value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction that corresponds to the type of state in which the game value has already been awarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E4)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E4 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E3, the performance execution means may perform a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(E), a red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game) and a specific display mode of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the gaming value can be awarded (for example, Blank icon images 022SH120d, 120e) shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8(M) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, depending on the display mode of the specific display, it is possible to clarify a state in which a gaming value has already been provided and a state in which a gaming value may be provided thereafter. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the state in which a gaming value has been awarded and the state in which a gaming value can be awarded in the future. Therefore, the player can feel a sense of satisfaction because the game value has already been awarded, and a sense of expectation that there will be a situation in which the game value can be awarded later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E5)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E5 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E4, the performance execution means is configured to control the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state) and the The specific display can be displayed across a plurality of states (e.g., FIG. 12- As shown in 6(E) and 6(F), the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed from the jackpot gaming state to the second KT state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state where gaming value can be awarded, it is possible to continuously show the player the state where gaming value can be awarded. As a result, even if the state changes, the player can continue to feel satisfied that the game value has already been awarded and a sense of expectation that there will be a state in which the game value can be awarded afterward. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game.

(Means E6)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E6 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E5, the performance execution means is in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R The gaming value awarded in the special state (for example, the second KT state) (for example, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6(E)) , the total prize ball count display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6(H)) can be displayed across the advantageous state (for example, the first jackpot game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, the gaming value given in the advantageous state and the special state can be clearly shown. Thereby, the player can continue to grasp the awarded gaming value even if the situation changes. Therefore, for example, if the awarded gaming value is large, the player will feel satisfied, and if the awarded gaming value is less than the player expected, the player's motivation to play will increase. can stir up. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E7)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E7 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E6, the performance execution means is in an advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, , the next jackpot game state), a suggestive effect (for example, the suggestive effect image in FIG. 12-8(L)) that suggests that the special state will be controlled after the latter advantageous state is controlled 022SH116), and a game value is given as a state after being controlled to the later advantageous state, corresponding to the effect of the suggested effect (for example, the successful effect image 022SH127 in FIG. 12-8(M)). Display a specific display in a predetermined manner corresponding to the existence of multiple possible states (for example, step 022SHS36 in FIG. 12-4 or the blank display manner shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8(M)). It is possible.

According to such a configuration, in a later advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether there are multiple states in which gaming value can be given afterward (specifically, whether or not consecutive games will continue). . Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved in the same way as in the previous advantageous state.

(Means E8)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E8 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E7, an advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot game state) : In the 10R probability variable jackpot A) and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, the next jackpot game state), a common number of round games (for example, 10 rounds) are executed, and the above-mentioned production The execution means displays a common display mode (for example, the bottom icon shown in FIG. 12-6(E)) when being controlled to the earlier advantageous state and when being controlled to the later advantageous state. The display mode of the image 022SH120a and the display mode of the topmost icon image 022SH120c shown in FIG. 12-7(N) are a common display mode).

According to such a configuration, the gaming value given in each advantageous state can be made equal, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be made into a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (for example, a blank field) of a specific display corresponding to an advantageous state that can be given is set to be a common display mode (for example, a blank field with the same shape) for the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. It can be done. Further, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can also be made the same display mode for the previous advantageous state and the subsequent advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the estimated gaming value that can be awarded or the estimated gaming value that has been awarded, based on the number of specific displays. Therefore, the interest of specific display can be improved.

(Means E9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E9 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E8, a variable display of the first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second The apparatus further includes variable display execution means (for example, the process executed by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-21) that can execute the variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , the gaming state control means is capable of controlling to the advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and the variable display of the second identification information is 1. This is more advantageous for the player than variable display of identification information (for example, as shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIGS. 12-2 (A) and (B), the jackpot type determination for the second special symbol The table has a higher probability of being determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and the jackpot with a large number of rounds is selected), and the effect execution means displays the first identification information as a display result of the variable display. When the specific display result is derived and displayed and controlled to be in the advantageous state, the specific display is erased (for example, step 022SHS13: YES → step 022SHS17: YES → step 022SHS18 in FIG. 12-3). Processing performed by the production control CPU 120 shown in FIG.

To be more specific, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH is capable of simultaneously and parallelly performing a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, and a variable display of the second identification information. A specific display can be displayed when the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH has a lower advantage for the player in the variable display of the first identification information than in the variable display of the second identification information. Due to the result being derived and displayed, the state in which gaming value can be awarded may disappear. Here, if the specific display is displayed even though the state in which gaming value can be awarded has disappeared, the interest in the game will decrease. For this reason, the gaming machine of the means E9 is designed to erase the specific display when being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing by controlling the game to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information.

(Means E10)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E10 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E9, the gaming state control means may control a specific display result (for example, The effect execution means can be controlled to the advantageous state when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, and the effect execution means is configured to perform control before the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, during execution of the variable display). ), the specific display can be displayed (for example, the blank icon images 022SH120d and 120e in FIG. 12-12(B) can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display.

(Means E11)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E11 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E10, regarding the variable display that has not yet started, a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. The performance execution means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, in FIG. 12). As shown in -11(B), the display mode of the icon image 022SH120b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the icon image 022SH120b is controlled to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the hold storage before the variable display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 026SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH will be explained. The gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH includes a gaming state control means (state control means) and a performance execution means. The game state control means is realized, for example, by the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12. In addition to the above, the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH includes, for example, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, suspension storage means, and setting means. The variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the suspension storage means, and the setting means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example.

The gaming state control means controls the gaming state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, and is, for example, a small winning gaming state.

The special state is a state in which gaming value is likely to be given due to the special state, and is, for example, the second KT state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. Note that the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state) is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is also a gaming state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. . That is, the first KT state is a state in which almost no gaming value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to characteristic part 026SH, it is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state. The advantageous game mentioned here is a jackpot that causes the player to move to the second KT state after the jackpot game state ends. The gaming state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, and can control to the jackpot gaming state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The performance execution means executes various performances depending on the situation. For example, a meter performance or a character performance is performed. Details will be described later.

(Regarding the movable body of the gaming machine related to characteristic part 026SH)
FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a portion of the game board 2 (near the image display device 5) of the game machine related to the feature section 026SH. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH includes, for example, a movable body 026SH32 as an accessory near the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-1(A). The movable body 026SH32 operates between the first state (initial state) and the second state (tilted state) according to the control of the production control board 12, as shown in FIGS. 13-1(B) and (C). For example, the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of first state → second state → first state, first state → second state → first state → second state → first state, or operates in the first state → second state → first state. → A state between the first state and the second state (temporarily stopped) → Second state → The first state, or a state between the first state → the first state and the second state (stopped once) →It may operate with the first state.

(Regarding the meter display of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the meter performance executed in the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH. The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH executes a meter effect as shown in FIG. 13-2 during variable display. FIGS. 13-2 (A) to (D) show each scene where the meter performance is executed according to the control of the performance control board 12.

In FIG. 13-2(A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG on the left side notifies which of four levels ("1" to "4") the meter value is. In FIG. 13-2(A), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG reports that the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage). In FIG. 13-2(A), the level display 026SHLV above the meter gauge section 026SHMTG reports the level corresponding to the meter value reported by the meter gauge section 026SHMTG. In FIG. 13-2(A), the level display 026SHLV notifies that the level is "LEVEL1" which is the first stage (initial stage). In other words, in FIG. 13-2(A), the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage), and the level is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage), according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. This is a scene where it is announced that the current level is "LEVEL 1". Note that a first small pattern 026SH101 corresponding to a decorative pattern is displayed at the lower left. Note that in the following description, the meter value may be referred to as the number of meters.

FIG. 13-2 (B) shows that the meter value is "2", which is the second stage, and the level is "LEVEL 2", which is the second stage, according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. This is the scene where the information is being reported. FIG. 13-2 (C) shows that the meter value is "3", which is the third stage, and the level is "LEVEL 3", which is the third stage, according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. This is the scene where the information is being reported. In FIG. 13-2 (D), the meter value is "4", which is the fourth stage (final stage), according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV, and the level is the fourth stage (final stage). This is a scene where it is announced that the level is "LEVEL 4".

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value reaches the final stage of "4" in the meter performance, the movable body 026SH32 may operate (when the accessory performance is executed) (Figure 13-6 (See (D)). In addition, in the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH, when the meter value reaches the final stage of "4" in the meter performance, it becomes a super reach (SP) (see Figure 13-5 (A) etc.) .

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the meter effect and the accessory effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) in the non-KT state (normal state). FIG. 13-3(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory production in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH). Note that FIG. 13-3(B) will be described later.

Specifically, Fig. 13-3 (A) shows the execution timing of the meter performance and the accessory performance when the meter performance and the accessory performance are executed in a variable display that becomes super reach. This is an example. In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta0 to Ta10 are periods during variable display. Ta10 to Ta11 are periods during which the display is stopped. Ta0 to Ta1 is the period before reach. Ta1 to Ta9 are normal reach periods. Ta9 to Ta10 is the super reach period.

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta2 to Ta8 are the execution periods of the meter effect. Among Ta2 to Ta8, Ta2 to Ta3 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "1" as shown in FIG. 13-2(A). Ta3 to Ta4 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "2" as shown in FIG. 13-2(B). Ta4 to Ta7 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "3" as shown in FIG. 13-2(C). Ta7 to Ta8 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "4" as shown in FIG. 13-D(C). In other words, Ta3 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "1" to "2" in the meter performance. Ta4 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "2" to "3" in the meter performance. Ta7 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "3" to "4" in the meter performance.

There are multiple types of meter production execution modes (meter production patterns) (see Figure 13-5 (A)), but Figure 13-3 (A) shows one execution mode (specifically, meter production patterns). An example of a meter effect using "MEP5" is shown.

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta5 to Ta6 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Ta5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Ta6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. For example, when the movable body 026SH32 moves from the first state to the second state to the first state, the state is the first state (Ta5), the second state, and the first state (Ta6). Further, for example, when the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of first state → second state → first state → second state → first state, first state (Ta5) → second state → first state → second state The state is the first state (Ta6).

FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-4 is an example of the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT. In the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH, when the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT times shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is used. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT time shown in FIG. 13-4 is selected and a variation pattern is determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the non-KT state, any one of the first variable patterns #101 to #109 shown in FIG. 13-4 is executed. A variation pattern is determined.

Note that the first variation pattern #104 is a variation pattern in which the super reach is off, and is a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach to the super reach A and finally becomes out of reach. The first variation pattern #105 is a variation pattern in which the super reach is out of reach, and is a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach to super reach B and ultimately becomes out of reach. The first variation pattern #108 is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, and is a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach A and finally becomes a jackpot. The first variation pattern #109 is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, and is a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach B and finally becomes a jackpot. The reliability of the jackpot is super reach B > super reach A.

FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining meter effects and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-5(A) shows the contents of the meter effect pattern (mode of increase in meter value, etc.). FIG. 13-5(B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter effect. FIG. 13-6(A) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern when the set value is "1" or "2". FIG. 13-6(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern when the set value is "3" and "4". FIG. 13-6(C) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern when the set value is "5" or "6". FIG. 13-6(D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) when the meter value is "4".

As shown in FIG. 13-5(A), the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases 0 times. That is, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP1", the meter value does not increase from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(A). The meter production pattern "MEP2" is a meter in which the meter value increases once, and the meter value reaches "2" (reaches up to "2") (that is, it does not reach "3" or "4"). This is a pattern of performance. In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP2", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). stage). The meter performance pattern "MEP3" is a meter performance pattern in which the meter value increases twice, and the meter value reaches "3" (reaches "3") (that is, does not reach "4"). be. In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP3", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). stage)" and further increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(C). The meter performance pattern "MEP4" is a meter performance pattern in which the meter value increases once, and the meter value reaches "3" (that is, does not reach "4"). In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP4", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). 2 (stage 2)", the stage increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(C). The meter effect pattern "MEP5" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases three times and the meter value reaches "4" (reaches up to "4"). In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP5", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). stage)", further increased to "3 (third stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C), and further increased to "4 (final stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (D). increases to

The meter effect patterns "MEP6" and "MEP7" are meter effect patterns in which the meter value increases twice, and the meter value reaches "4". Specifically, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP6", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). (2nd stage)", and furthermore, without going through "3 (third stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C), it increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (D). )”. In addition, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP7", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). 2 (stage 2)", it increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C), and further increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (D). increases to The meter effect pattern "MEP8" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases once and the meter value reaches "4". In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP8", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). The process increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (D) without passing through "2 stage)" or "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C).

In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-5(B), whether or not to perform the meter performance is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in Figure 13-5 (B), if the setting value is "1" or "2", the unreachable result will occur (first fluctuation pattern #101, #102 in Figure 13-4). The decision ratio of execution is 0%, and when the normal reach is off (first fluctuation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4), the decision ratio of execution is 8%, and the super reach is off (Figure 13-4). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern #104, #105 of Figure 13-4), the decision ratio of execution is 24%, and in the case of a small hit (variation pattern #106 of Figure 13-4), the determination of execution is 24%. The percentage is 0%, and in the case of a normal reach jackpot (first variation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), the decision ratio of execution is 16%, and a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4). In the case of patterns #108 and #109), the determination ratio of execution is 40%.

In addition, when the setting value is "3" or "4", the decision ratio of execution is 0% when the non-reach is off, and the decision ratio of execution is 10% when the normal reach is off. , if the super reach is a miss, the decision percentage of execution is 30%, if it is a small hit, the decision percentage of execution is 0%, and if it is a normal reach jackpot, the decision percentage of execution is 30%. is 20%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the decision ratio of execution is 50%. In addition, when the setting value is "5" or "6", the decision ratio of execution is 0% when the non-reach is off, and the decision ratio of execution is 12% when the normal reach is off. , if the super reach is a miss, the decision percentage of execution is 36%, if it is a small hit, the decision percentage of execution is 0%, and if it is a normal reach jackpot, the decision percentage of execution is 36%. is 24%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the decision ratio of execution is 60%.

In the example shown in Figure 13-5 (B), when the out-of-reach result or the small hit occurs, it does not depend on the setting value (even if the setting value is between "1" and "6"). ), no meter display is performed. In addition, when the normal reach is off, when the super reach is off, when the normal reach is a jackpot, or when the super reach is a jackpot, the execution rate of the meter effect depends on the setting value, and the setting value is "5" or " It is most likely to be executed when the setting value is ``6'', and the least likely to be executed when the setting value is ``1'' or ``2''.

In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, the meter performance pattern is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C). As an example, if the set value is "1" and the normal reach is off, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 50%, as shown in Figure 13-6 (A), and the meter effect pattern is 50%. The determination ratio of the pattern "MEP2" is 40%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP3" is 8%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP4" is 2%, and the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP5" ~ The determination ratio of each "MEP8" is 0%. As another example, if the setting value is "3" and the super reach is off, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 0%, as shown in Figure 13-6 (B). , the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP2" is 0%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP3" is 20%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP4" is 20%, and the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP4" is 20%. The determination ratio of "MEP5" is 45%, the determination ratio of meter production pattern "MEP6" is 10%, the determination ratio of meter production pattern "MEP7" is 5%, and the determination ratio of meter production pattern "MEP8". is 0%

In the examples shown in Figures 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"), in the case of normal reach, A meter performance pattern ("MEP1" or "MEP2") in which the meter value does not reach "3" can be determined, but in the case of super reach, a meter performance pattern ("MEP1" or "MEP2") in which the meter value does not reach "3" can be determined. "MEP2") is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, if the meter value does not reach "3" in the meter performance, the super reach will not develop.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"), the super reach In the case of normal reach, the meter performance pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP8") in which the meter value reaches "4" can be determined, but in the case of normal reach, the meter performance pattern ("MEP5") in which the meter value reaches "4" can be determined. ” to “MEP8”) are not determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, when the meter value reaches "4" in the meter performance, the game always develops into a super reach.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), the set value is "1" or "2", and the set value is "3" or "4". The determination ratio of the meter production pattern (specifically, "MEP3" to "MEP7") when the super reach is off is made different depending on when the set value is "5" or "6". There is. Specifically, when the setting value is "1" or "2", the meter performance pattern where the meter value stops at "3" ("MEP3" or "MEP4") has a determination rate of 46% (23% + 23%). On the other hand, meter performance patterns ("MEP5" to "MEP8") in which the meter value reaches "4" are determined at a determination rate of 54% (42%+8%+4%). If the setting value is "3" or "4", the meter production pattern where the meter value stops at "3" is determined at a determination ratio of 40% (20% + 20%), but when the meter value stops at "4". The meter performance pattern to be reached is determined at a determination rate of 60% (45% + 10% + 5%). When the setting value is "5" or "6", the meter production pattern where the meter value stops at "3" is determined at a determination rate of 34% (17% + 17%), but when the meter value stops at "4". The meter performance pattern to be reached is determined at a determination rate of 66% (48% + 12% + 6%).

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), the super reach jackpot is achieved regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"). In this case, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" can be determined, but in other cases, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, the meter performance pattern "MEP8" is a meter performance pattern that ensures a jackpot (super reach jackpot) regardless of the set value. In addition, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP8" when a super reach jackpot occurs is set to be constant (5%) regardless of the setting value.

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, when the meter value becomes "4" in the meter performance, an accessory performance (a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 is operated) may be executed. In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, whether or not to perform the accessory performance when the meter value becomes "4" is determined based on the meter performance pattern as shown in FIG. 13-6(D). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the determination ratio of execution is 50%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", the determination of execution is 50%. The ratio is 70%, and when the meter performance pattern is "MEP7", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the meter performance pattern is "MEP8", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

In other words, when the meter production pattern is "MEP5", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" as shown in Figure 13-5 (A). However, when the meter value changes from "3" to "4", the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 50%. When the meter production pattern is "MEP6", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "2" to "4", but when the meter value changes from "2" to "4", the rate is 70%. A role performance is performed. When the meter production pattern is "MEP7", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "3" to "4", but when the meter value changes from "3" to "4", the rate is 80%. A role performance is performed. When the meter production pattern is "MEP8", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "4", but when the meter value changes from "1" to "4", the role performance is performed at a rate of 100%. is executed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value does not become "4" in the meter performance, the accessory performance is not executed (the determination ratio of execution is 0%). When the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter performance, there are times when the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter performance pattern ("MEP1" to "MEP4"), or when the meter value reaches "4". Although it is a meter production pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP7"), when the meter value does not become "4" (when the meter value changes from "1" to "2" in "MEP5" or when the meter value changes from "2" to When the meter value changes from “1” to “2” in “MEP6” and when the meter value changes from “1” to “3” in “MEP7”).

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance determination process (performance determination process for determining meter performance, character performance, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the performance control process shown in FIG. be. It is assumed that at the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-7, the gaming state is a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol changes).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026 SHS100). For example, when the set value is "1" and the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), the production control CPU 120 determines whether to execute at a determination rate of 8%, and the set value is "4". ” and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #108, #109), execution is determined at a determination rate of 50% (see FIG. 13-5 (B)).

Following step 026SHS100, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the meter performance is to be executed (step 026SHS101). If it is not determined that the meter effect is to be executed (step 026 SHS101; NO), the effect determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the meter performance is to be executed (step 026SHS101; YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines a meter performance pattern based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS102). For example, when the setting value is "1" and the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), "MEP1" is set to 50%, "MEP2" is set to 40%, "MEP3" is set to 8%, " ``MEP4'' is determined to be 2%, ``MEP5'' to 0%, ``MEP6'' to 0%, ``MEP7'' to 0%, and ``MEP8'' to 0% (see Figure 13-6 (A)). Also, when the setting value is "4" and the fluctuation pattern is super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #108, #109), "MEP1" is set to 0%, "MEP2" is set to 0%, and "MEP3" is set to 0%. 5%, "MEP4" 15%, "MEP5" 45%, "MEP6" 15%, "MEP7" 15%, and "MEP8" 5% (Figure 13-6 (B) reference).

Following step 026SHS102, the performance control CPU 120 sets the meter performance pattern determined at step 026SHS102 (step 026SHS103).

Following step 026SHS103, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a meter performance pattern in which the meter value reaches "4" has been determined (set) (step 026SHS104). That is, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether any one of "MEP5" to "MEP8" has been determined (set). If the meter effect pattern in which the meter value reaches "4" has not been determined (set) (step 026 SHS104; NO), the effect determination process is ended. That is, when any one of "MEP1" to "MEP4" is determined (set), the effect determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when the meter effect pattern in which the meter value reaches "4" is determined (set) (step 026 SHS104; YES), the effect control CPU 120 controls the meter effect pattern when the meter value reaches "4" based on the meter effect pattern. It is determined whether or not to perform the accessory performance (step 026 SHS105). Specifically, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute at a 50% decision rate, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", determines whether to execute at a 70% rate. When the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", execution is determined at a determination rate of 80%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", execution is determined at a determination rate of 100% (Fig. (See 13-6(D)).

Following step 026SHS105, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the accessory performance is to be executed (step 026SHS106). If it is not determined that the performance of the accessory is to be performed (step 026 SHS106; NO), the performance determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory performance is to be performed (step 026SHS106; YES), the performance control CPU 120 sets a flag indicating that the accessory performance is to be executed (specifically, a flag indicating that the accessory performance is to be executed, information for controlling execution, etc.) is set (step 026 SHS107), and the production determination process is ended.

FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the meter performance (the meter performance pattern is "MEP5") and the accessory performance in the non-KT state (normal state). In FIG. 13-8, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is shown in the order of FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D). Transition.

FIG. 13-8(A) shows a scene where the meter value is "3" in the meter performance (specifically, a scene between Ta4 and Ta5 in FIG. 13-3(A)). In FIG. 13-8(A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV notify the meter value "3" and the level "LEVEL3". Note that since FIG. 13-8(A) is a scene before the performance of the accessory, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-8 (B) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a performance effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Ta5 and Ta6 in Figure 13-3 (A) (The scene in between) In FIG. 13-8(B), an oval image 026SH32EF01 is displayed as an effect of the accessory production.

Figure 13-8 (C) is a scene where the meter value changes from "3" to "4" in the meter performance (specifically, the scene between Ta7 and Ta8 in Figure 13-3 (A)). . In FIG. 13-8(C), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV notify the meter value "4" and the level "LEVEL4". In FIG. 13-8(C), star image 026SHMTMAXEF is displayed as an effect of the meter value reaching MAX. Note that the star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as part of the meter effect, or the star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as another effect related to the meter effect. Note that since FIG. 13-8(C) is a scene after the execution of the accessory performance, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-8 (D) shows the scene that develops into super reach (specifically, the scene between Ta8 and Ta9 in Figure 13-3 (A), the scene at Ta9, or the scene slightly after Ta9). scene). In FIG. 13-8(D), an SP development notification image 026SHSP is displayed that notifies the type of super reach to be developed (super reach A in the example of FIG. 13-8(D)) and reliability.

Note that when the meter value reaches MAX, the development destinations (super reach A, super reach B) and the reliability of the development destination may be suggested or notified. In the examples shown in Figures 13-8(C) and (D), the aspect of the star image 026SHMTMAXEF in Figure 13-8(C) (the number of stars is three in the example in Figure 13-8(C)) is indicates the reliability of Super Reach A (in the example of Figure 13-8 (D), the number of stars is 3).

(About the accessory performance in the second KT state of the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH can perform the accessory performance (the performance of operating the movable body 026SH32) even when in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH). FIG. 13-3(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory production in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), as described above.

In FIG. 13-3(B), Tb0 to Tb1 are periods during variable display. Tb1 to Tb2 is a period in which the small winning symbols corresponding to the small winnings are stopped and displayed. Tb3 to Tb8 are opening periods of the special variable winning ball device 17 that is opened in response to a small winning (opening period depending on the small winning game state). Tb4 is the timing of winning a small hit (the timing when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 17). Tb5 to Tb6 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tb5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tb6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tb7 is the timing to update the total number of prize balls.

FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the accessory performance in the second KT state (during small win RUSH) and an example of the performance operation when the jackpot game state is reached. In Figure 13-9, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is as follows: Figure 13-9 (A) → Figure 13-9 (B) → Figure 13-9 (C) → Figure 13-9 (D) → Figure Transition occurs in the order of 13-9 (E) → Figure 13-9 (F) → Figure 13-9 (G) → Figure 13-9 (H).

FIG. 13-9(A) shows a scene (eg, the scene between Tb1 and Tb2 in FIG. 13-3(B)) where the small winning symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 13-9(A), a mode display 026SHMD including the words "Small hit rush mode" is displayed in the upper left, and a right-handed hit notification image 026SHMG including the words "Right-handed hit" and the total number of prize balls are displayed in the upper right. A total prize ball number display 026SH130 to be notified is displayed, and a second small pattern 026SH102 corresponding to the decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right. Note that since FIG. 13-9(A) is a scene before the performance of the accessory, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-9 (B) shows a scene where the movable body 026SH32 operates as a performance effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Tb5 and Tb6 in Figure 13-3 (B) (The scene in between) In FIG. 13-9(B), a small hit notification image 026SHKN is displayed that notifies you of a small hit (two game balls were won in FIG. 13-9(B)) or the number of balls acquired by a small hit. ing. In addition, if we summarize the relationship between the small hit prize, the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN, and the accessory performance, the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN is displayed as the performance corresponding to the small hit prize win, and the accessory performance is executed. It can also be interpreted as Furthermore, it may be interpreted that a role-playing effect is executed as the effect corresponding to winning a small hit, and the winning notification image 026SHKN is displayed in response to the execution of the role-playing effect (for example, as an effect of the role-playing effect). . In addition, when displaying in response to the execution of the accessory performance, the name of the winning notification image 026SHKN may be a corresponding name (for example, star image 026SHMTMAXEF2, etc.).

FIG. 13-9(C) shows a scene where the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN is deleted and the total prize ball number display 026SH130 is updated (the number of acquired balls reported by the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN is added) ( For example, scene Tb7 in FIG. 13-3(B)). In FIG. 13-9(C), the total prize pitch number update effect is executed using the total prize pitch number update image 026SHKSEF. Note that the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF is a part of the total award pitch number update effect that acts on the total award pitch number display 026SH130, but the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF can also be taken as an effect of the accessory production. can.

FIG. 13-9 (D) corresponds to the next hold and is a scene that is variably displayed (for example, the scene immediately after Tb8 in FIG. 13-3 (B)). FIG. 13-9(E) shows a scene where the jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is stopped and displayed. Figure 13-9 (F) shows the total number of balls that are announced at the end of the second KT state in a relatively large manner, the current total number of prize balls and the number of balls won by winning small hits out of the total number of prize balls. This is a scene where the prize ball number display 026SH130D is displayed. FIG. 13-9 (G) shows a scene where a fanfare performance is being performed. Figure 13-9 (H) shows a scene in the first round.

In Figure 13-9 (G), the current prize ball number display 026SH140 that informs the current prize ball number and 026SHOAZ that informs the jackpot symbol are displayed in the upper left, and the right-handed ball display including the words "Right-handed" is displayed in the upper right. A notification image 026SHMG and a total prize ball number display 026SH130 that reports the total number of prize balls are displayed, and a round number display 026SH106 that reports what round the current round is is displayed at the lower right.

(Regarding the background effect of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH can execute a background effect that changes the background image. Furthermore, the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH is capable of performing an accessory performance (a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 is operated) as well as a background performance.

FIG. 13-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-10(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of background effects and accessory effects. FIG. 13-10(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of active display effects and accessory effects based on active display. Note that FIG. 13-10(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc0 to Tc10 are periods during variable display. Tc10 to Tc11 are periods during stop display. Tc0 to Tc1 is the period before reach. Tc1 to Tc2 are normal reach periods. Tc2 to Tc10 are the super reach periods.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc3 to Tc10 are the execution periods of the background effect. Among Tc3 to Tc10, Tc3 to Tc6 are scenes in which the background image is in a first special mode (for example, yellow) that is different from the normal mode (for example, blue). Tc6 to Tc9 are scenes in which the background image is in a second special mode (for example, green) that is different from the normal mode. Tc9 to Tc10 are scenes in which the background image is in a third special mode (for example, red) that is different from the normal mode. In other words, Tc3 is the timing when the background effect is started and the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). Tc6 is the timing at which the background image changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green) in the background effect. Tc9 is the timing at which the background image changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red) in the background effect.

There are multiple types of execution modes (background effect patterns) for background effects (see Figure 13-11 (A)), but Figure 13-10 (A) shows one execution mode (specifically, background effect patterns). An example of a background effect using "MEP3" is shown.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc4 to Tc5 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tc4 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc5 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tc7 to Tc8 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tc7 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc8 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating background effects and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-11(A) shows the contents of the background effect pattern (the mode of change of the background image, etc.). FIG. 13-11(B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to perform background effects. FIG. 13-11(C) is an example of the determination ratio of the background effect pattern. FIG. 13-11(D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green). FIG. 13-11(E) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the third special mode (red).

As shown in Figure 13-11(A), in the background effect pattern "HEP1", the number of times the background image changes is one, and the background image reaches the first special mode (yellow) (reaches "yellow"). ) (that is, it does not turn "green" or "red"). That is, in the background effect using the background effect pattern "HEP1," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). The background effect pattern "HEP2" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice, and the background image reaches the second special mode (green) (reaches "green"). In other words, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP2," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ). The background effect pattern "HEP3" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes three times and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). In other words, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP3," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ), and further changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red). The background effect pattern "HEP4" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP4," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and then changes without passing through the second special mode (green). , changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the third special mode (red).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(B), whether or not to perform the background effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-5(B), when the super reach is off (first variation patterns #104 and #105 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 25%. In the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 50%. On the other hand, there are cases where the non-reach is off (first variation patterns #101 and #102 in Figure 13-4), cases where the normal reach is off (first variation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4), and cases where there is a small hit (the first variation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4). 13-4 fluctuation pattern #106) or a normal reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 0%. It is. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the background effect is not executed when the game does not develop into a super reach.

In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, the background effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-11(C). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(C), when the super reach is off (first variation patterns #104 and #105 in FIG. 13-4), the background image is "first special mode (yellow color)". )" stop background effect pattern ("HEP1") is determined at a 70% determination rate, and the background image is "second special mode (green)" stop background effect pattern ("HEP2") is determined at a 20% determination rate. The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) in which the background image reaches the “third special mode (red)” is determined at a determination rate of 10% (8%+2%). In addition, in the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109 in Figure 13-4), the background effect pattern ("HEP1") where the background image stops at "first special mode (yellow)" The background effect pattern ("HEP2") in which the background image stops at the "second special mode (green)" is determined at a decision rate of 20%, and the background image stops at the "third special mode (green)". The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) that reaches “Red)” is determined at a determination rate of 70% (50%+20%).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, when the background image becomes the "second special mode (green)", a role effect effect (effect that moves the movable body 026SH32) may be executed. In the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(D), it is determined whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image becomes the "second special mode (green)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(D), when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 40%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination rate of execution is 40%. The percentage is 60%.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, even when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", the accessory effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) may be performed. In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(E), it is determined whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image becomes the "third special mode (red)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(E), when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination rate of execution is 80%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the determination rate of execution is 80%. The percentage is 100%.

In other words, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "second mode" as shown in Figure 13-11(A). However, when changing from "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode (green)", the role effect is executed at a rate of 40% (Figure 13- 11(D)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode" as shown in Figure 13-11(A). (green)"→"Third special mode (red)", but when changing from "First special mode (yellow)" to "Second special mode (green)", the role effect is performed at a rate of 60%. is executed (see Figure 13-11 (D)), and when changing from "second special mode (green)" to "third special mode (red)", the role performance is executed at a rate of 80% ( (See Figure 13-11(E)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP4", as shown in Figure 13-11(A), the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode" (red)", but when changing from "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode (red)", the role performance is executed at a rate of 100% (Figure 13-11) (See E).

(Regarding the active display effect of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH is capable of performing an active display effect using active display. Furthermore, the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH is capable of executing an active display effect as well as an accessory effect (a effect that causes the movable body 026SH32 to operate).

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td0 to Td9 are periods during variable display. Td9 to Td10 is a period during stop display. Td0 to Td1 is the period before reach. Td1 to Td5 are normal reach periods. Td5 to Td9 is the super reach period.

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td0 to Td10 are the execution period of the active display effect (that is, the period in which the active display is displayed in response to the fluctuation). Among Td0 to Td10, Td0 to Td4 are scenes where the active display is in a normal mode (for example, gray). Td4 to Td8 are scenes in which the active display is in a first special mode (for example, green) that is different from the normal mode. Td8 to Td9 are scenes in which the active display is in a second special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words, Td4 is the timing at which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) in the active display effect. Td8 is the timing at which the active display changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) in the active display effect.

Although there are multiple types of execution modes (active display effect patterns) for active display effects (see Figure 13-12 (A)), one execution mode (specifically, active display effect patterns) is shown in Figure 13-10 (B). An example of an active display effect using the display effect pattern "AEP3" is shown.

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td2 to Td3 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Td2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td3 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Td6 to Td7 is an execution period of the accessory performance. Td6 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td7 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating active display effects and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-12(A) shows the contents of the active display effect pattern (presence or absence of change in active display, mode of change, etc.). FIG. 13-12(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern. FIG. 13-12(C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory performance during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10(B)). FIG. 13-12(D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory production during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10(B)).

As shown in FIG. 13-12(A), the active display effect pattern "AEP1" is an active display effect pattern in which the number of active display changes is 0 times. In other words, the active display remains in its normal state (gray) at both the first change timing (Td4 in Figure 13-10 (B)) and the second change timing (Td8 in Figure 13-10 (B)). This is a pattern of display effects. In the active display performance pattern "AEP2", the number of times the active display changes is once, and the active display reaches the first special mode (green) (reaches "green") (that is, does not become "red"). This is a pattern of active display performance. Specifically, the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and remains unchanged in the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. This is a pattern of performance. The active display effect pattern "AEP3" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes twice, and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) at the second change timing. ) is the pattern of active display effect that changes. The active display performance pattern "AEP4" is an active display performance pattern in which the number of times the active display changes is one, and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at the first change timing, and changes from the normal mode (gray) to the second special mode (green) without passing through the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. This is an active display effect pattern that changes to a special mode (red).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), the active display effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(B), when the non-reach is out of reach (first fluctuation patterns #101 and #102 in FIG. 13-4), the active display performance pattern ("AEP1") is set to 100. Determined by percentage. That is, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the active display remains in the normal mode (gray) and does not change in the case of non-reach.

Also, according to the example shown in Figure 13-12(B), there are cases where the non-reach is off (first fluctuation patterns #101 and #102 in Figure 13-4), and there are cases where the normal reach is off (the first variation pattern in Figure 13-4). 1 variation pattern #103), a small hit (variation pattern #106 in Figure 13-4), or a normal reach jackpot (first variation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), The active display performance pattern ("HEP3" or "HEP4") in which the active display reaches the "second special mode (red)" is not determined. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, if the game becomes a reach but does not develop into a super reach, the active display does not change to the "second special mode (red)".

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, a role effect (effect that moves the movable body 026SH32) may be executed during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10(B)). In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12(C), it is determined whether or not to perform the accessory presentation in the first operation period based on the active display presentation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(C), when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 10%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 10%. The determination ratio of execution is 30%, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 10%. It is.

Note that when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the accessory performance is executed at an execution rate of 10% during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3), but at the subsequent first change timing (Td4), the accessory performance is executed at an execution rate of 10%. The display remains in the normal mode (gray) and does not change. In other words, the 10% is based on the fake performance of the character (in a development where the active display does not change after the performance of the character), which is a false development (development where the active display does not change after the performance of the character). It is also the execution rate of the role-playing effect (in which the active display does not change afterward). The same applies when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4".

In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, a role model effect may be executed in the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10(B)). In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12(D), it is determined whether or not to perform the accessory presentation in the second operation period based on the active display presentation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (D), when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 0%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 0%. The determination ratio of execution is 10%, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 100%. It is.

In addition, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the accessory performance is executed at a 10% execution rate during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7), but at the subsequent second change timing (Td8), the accessory performance is executed at an execution rate of 10%. The display is in the first special mode (green and does not change. In other words, the 10% is also the execution rate of the false accessory effect (the accessory effect in which the active display does not change later).

FIG. 13-13(A) shows an example of the production determination process (production determination process for determining background production, character production, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the production control process shown in FIG. FIG. It is assumed that at the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-13(A), the gaming state is a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol changes).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the background effect based on the variation pattern (step 026 SHS200). For example, when the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute at a determination rate of 0% (see FIG. 13-11(B)). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution at a determination rate of 25% when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach hit (first fluctuation pattern #104, #105), and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #104, #105). Patterns #108 and #109), execution is determined at a determination rate of 50% (see FIG. 13-11(B)).

Following step 026SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the background effect has been determined to be executed (step 026SHS201). If it is not determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026 SHS201; NO), the effect determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026SHS201; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines a background effect pattern based on the variation pattern (step 026SHS202). Specifically, when the variation pattern is out of super reach (first variation pattern #104, #105), the production control CPU 120 reduces "HEP1" to 70%, "HEP2" to 20%, and "HEP3" to 8% and "MEP4" at a ratio of 2% (see Figure 13-11(C)). In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), the performance control CPU 120 sets "HEP1" to 10%, "HEP2" to 20%, "HEP3" to 50%, "MEP4" is determined at a rate of 20% (see Figure 13-11(C)).

Following step 026SHS202, the effect control CPU 120 sets the background effect pattern determined in step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS203).

Following step 026SHS203, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance based on the background performance pattern (step 026SHS205). Specifically, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the role effect effect when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)" at a rate of 40%. (See Figure 13-11(D)). In addition, when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the role effect effect when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)" at a determination rate of 60% ( (See Figure 13-11 (D)), and when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", whether or not to perform the accessory production is determined at a determination rate of 80% (See Figure 13-11 (E)) ). Furthermore, when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the role effect effect when the background image becomes the "third special mode (red)" at a determination rate of 100% ( (See Figure 13-11(E)).

Following step 026SHS205, the performance control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the accessory production (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not to perform the accessory production, information for controlling the execution of the accessory production, etc.) (step 026SHS207). , the performance determination process ends.

FIG. 13-13(B) is an example of the performance determination process (performance determination process that determines active display performance, character performance, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the performance control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows. It is assumed that at the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-13(B), the gaming state is a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol changes).

In the performance determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(B), the performance control CPU 120 determines an active display performance pattern based on the variation pattern (step 026SHS302). For example, when the variation pattern is super reach off (first variation pattern #104, #105), the performance control CPU 120 sets "AEP1" to 10%, "AEP2" to 80%, "AEP3" to 8%, "AEP4" is determined at a rate of 2% (see Figure 13-12(B)). In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), the performance control CPU 120 sets "AEP1" to 10%, "AEP2" to 30%, "AEP3" to 30%, "AEP4" is determined at a rate of 30% (see Figure 13-12(B)).

Following step 026SHS202, the performance control CPU 120 sets the active display performance pattern determined at step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS303).

Following step 026SHS303, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance based on the active display performance pattern (step 026SHS305). Specifically, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (FIG. 13-12(C)). (see FIG. 13-12(D)), whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 0% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Furthermore, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 30% (see FIG. 13-12(C)); Whether or not to perform the accessory production in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Furthermore, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP3", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12(C)); Whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Further, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP4", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), Whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-12(D)).

Following step 026SHS305, the performance control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the accessory production (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not to perform the accessory production, information for controlling the execution of the accessory production, etc.) (step 026SHS307). , the performance determination process ends.

FIGS. 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, the left side of Figure 13-14 ((A1) → (B1) → (C1) transition) shows the background effect (the background effect pattern is "HEP3") and the role in the non-KT state (normal state). It is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a product production. In addition, the right side of Figure 13-14 ((A2) → (B2) → (C2) → (D2) transition) shows the active display performance (the active display performance pattern is "AEP3") in the non-KT state (normal state). ) and a diagram illustrating an example of the performance operation of the role performance.

On the left side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (A1) is a scene where the background image is in the "first special mode (yellow)" in the background effect (specifically, Figure 13-10 (A) This is the scene between Tc3 and Tc4). Note that in FIG. 13-14 (A1), the code 026SHHK-Y indicates the background image of the first special mode (yellow). It is also the scene where the battle begins as part of the Super Reach production.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B1) is a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a role performance and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, as shown in FIG. This is the scene between Tc4 and Tc5 in (A). It is also a scene where a battle is taking place as part of Super Reach's production.

On the left side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (C1) shows a scene (specifically is the scene between Tc6 and Tc7 in FIG. 13-10(A)). Note that in FIG. 13-14 (C1), the code 026SHHK-G indicates the background image of the second special mode (green). It is also the scene where the battle (second time) begins as part of the Super Reach performance.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A2) shows a scene where the active display 026SH110 is displayed in the "normal mode (gray)" in the active display effect (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (B ) is the scene between Td1 and Td2 of ). In FIG. 13-14 (A2), the white circle of the active display 026SH110 indicates the active display 026SH110 in the normal mode (gray). In the example of FIG. 13-14 (A2), the display mode of the active display 026SH110 is the same as the pending display (symbol A in the figure) indicating the first pending storage.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B2) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a role performance and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, as shown in FIG. This is the scene between Td2 and Td3 in (B).

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C2) shows a scene in which an action effect (effect by the character image 026SHSY) on the active display 026SH110 is being performed (specifically, the scene shown in FIG. 13-10 (B) This is the scene immediately before Td4).

On the right side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (D2) shows a scene where the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the "first special mode (green)" in the active display effect (specifically, the 13-10 (B) between Td4 and Td5). In FIG. 13-14 (D2), the circle filled with diagonal lines in the active display 026SH110 indicates the active display 026SH110 in the first special mode (green).

(Regarding the performance of accessories during the interval period of gaming machines related to feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH can perform a role-playing performance (a performance that moves the movable body 026SH32) during the interval period.

FIGS. 13-15 are explanatory diagrams explaining various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-15(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory performance during the interval period of the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-15(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory performance before the jackpot (suddenly certain). Note that FIG. 13-15(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-15(A), Te1 to Te5 are the interval periods of the jackpot gaming state. Among Te1 to Te5, Te2 to Te3 are the execution periods of the accessory production. Te2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Te3 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Te4 is the timing to update the round number display 026SH106 (update the round number display 026SH106 to the number corresponding to the round game to be played after the end of the interval period).

(About the performance when a sudden jackpot occurs in a gaming machine related to feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH can perform a role performance (a performance that moves the movable body 026SH32) when a "2R definite jackpot (sudden definite jackpot)" occurs. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-5(A), if the variable symbol is the first special symbol, it will not be a 2R probability variable jackpot, but in the following explanation regarding the gaming machine related to feature section 026SH, the variable symbol Even if the symbol is the first special symbol, it will be a 2R probability-variable jackpot.

In FIG. 13-15(B), Tf0 to Tf3 are periods during variable display. Tf3 to Tf4 is a period in which the display is stopped (for example, a special symbol corresponding to a sudden jackpot is displayed in a stopped state). Tf1 to Tf2 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tf1 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tf2 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tf5 is the timing when the special variable winning ball device 7 starts to open.

FIGS. 13-16 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIG. 13-16 ((A3)→(B3)→(C3)→(D3) transition) is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of the accessory performance in the jackpot game state. Further, the right side of FIG. 13-16 (transition from (A4) to (B4) to (C4) to (D4)) is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the accessory performance in a non-KT state (normal state).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A3) shows a scene where the 5th round is being played as a round game (for example, the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) is the 5th round and the 6th round). 13-15(A)). In Figure 13-16 (A3), the current prize ball number display 026SH140, which informs the current prize ball number, and 026SHOAZ, which informs the jackpot symbol, are displayed in the upper left, and the right button, which includes the words "Right hit" in the upper right, is displayed. A hit notification image 026SHMG and a total prize pitch number display 026SH130 that reports the total number of prize pitches are displayed, and a round number display 026SH106 that reports what round the current round is is displayed at the lower right.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (B3) shows a scene (for example, FIG. If the interval period of 15(A) indicates the interval period between the 5th round and the 6th round, the scene is the scene between Te2 and Te3 in FIG. 13-15(A). In FIG. 13-16 (B3), a round number display update effect using the star image 026SH32EF02 is being executed. Note that the star image 026SH32EF02 is part of the round number display update effect that acts on the round number display 026SH106, but the star image 026SH32EF02 can also be regarded as an effect of the accessory effect.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C3) shows a scene after the round number display 026SH106 has been updated during the interval period (for example, the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) is the 5th round and the 6th round). If the interval period between eyes is shown, this is the scene between Te4 and Te5 in FIG. 13-15(A).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D3) shows a scene where the 6th round is being played as a round game (for example, the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) is the 5th round and the 6th round). 13-15 (A), this is the scene a little after Te5 in FIG. 13-15(A)).

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A4) shows a scene where a variable display with sudden certainty (2 round probability variable jackpot) is performed (specifically, Tf0 and Tf0 in FIG. 13-15 (B)). This is the scene during Tf1). Also, Figure 13-16 (B4) is a scene where a special symbol (for example, "123") is temporarily stopped (specifically, a scene slightly before Tf1 in Figure 13-15 (B)). be.

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C4) is a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a role performance and is in the second state (tilted state) (for example, FIG. 13-15 (B) (scene between Tf1 and Tf2). In FIG. 13-16 (C4), an oval image 026SH32EF03 is displayed as an effect of the accessory production.

On the right side of Fig. 13-16, Fig. 13-16 (D4) shows that after the jackpot (playing state of 2 rounds) ends, the battle mode (high probability mode) is activated based on the sudden probability (2 round probability variable jackpot). This is a screen on which a mode transition image 026SHMDIK is displayed to notify that the mode will enter (transition) to. Although not shown, between Figure 13-16 (C4) and Figure 13-16 (D4), the temporary stop display of the special symbol (for example, "123") is released, and the special It is notified that the stoppage of the symbol has been confirmed (stopped display).

(Regarding the modification regarding the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
Next, modifications in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-16 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the meter effect is different depending on the setting value "1" or "2", the setting value "3" or "4", and the setting value "5" or "6". However, the setting values that affect the rate of determining whether or not to execute the meter effect are divided as described above (setting value "1" or "2", setting value "3" or "4", setting value "5" or "6"). For example, setting value ``1'', setting value ``2'', setting value ``3'', setting value ``4'', setting value ``5'', and setting value ``6'' each determine the percentage of whether or not to execute the meter effect. Alternatively, the ratio of determining whether or not to perform the meter production may be set differently depending on the setting value "1", "2", or "3" and the setting value "4", "5", or "6". Alternatively, the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter effect may be made different depending on the set value "1", "3", or "5" and the set value "2", "4", or "6". The same applies to the determination ratio of meter performance patterns.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the rate of determining whether to execute the meter effect is different depending on the setting value, but similar to the rate of determining whether to execute the background effect and the rate of determining whether to execute the active display effect, the setting value may be common. good.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution rate of the role performance when the meter value reaches "4 (MAX)" in the meter performance is different for each meter performance pattern (Figure 13-8 (D)). It may be common regardless of the situation.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above description, the execution rate of the accessory performance when the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)" in the meter performance is the same as the set value, but it may be changed depending on the set value. For example, based on the meter performance pattern and the setting value, the execution rate of the role performance when the meter value reaches "4 (MAX)" in the meter performance may be different, or simply based on the setting value. In addition, in the meter performance, the execution rate of the accessory performance when the meter value reaches “4 (MAX)” may be varied.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, even if the meter value was "4 (MAX)", there were cases where the role performance was not performed (Figure 13-8 (D)), but in the meter performance, the meter value was "4 (MAX)". 4 (MAX)'', the accessory performance may be always performed.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the role performance can be executed in the meter performance when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" (Figure 13-8 (D)); )'', the accessory effect may be performed when the meter value becomes ``2'' or when the meter value becomes ``3''.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the meter value always changes (updates) in the meter performance when the role performance is performed (Figure 13-8 (D)), but even when the role performance is performed, the meter value is always changed (updated). In the same way that the active display may not change in the display performance (Figure 13-12 (C), Figure 13-12 (D)), the meter value may not change in the meter performance even when the role performance is performed. It may be arranged so that there is a case where it does not change.

(Modification example 8 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the ratio for determining whether to execute the background effect is the same as the setting value (Figure 13-11 (B)), but like the ratio for determining whether to execute the meter effect (Figure 13-5 (B)), It may be changed depending on the set value. The same applies to the determination ratio of the background effect pattern.

(Modification example 9 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution rate of the accessory effect when the background image becomes the second special mode (green) is the same set value (Figure 13-11 (D)), but it can also be changed depending on the set value. good. Similarly, the execution rate of the accessory effect when the background image becomes the third special mode (red) is the same as the setting value (Figure 13-11 (E)), but may be changed depending on the setting value. . For example, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied based on the background effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied simply based on the set value.

(Modification example 10 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the role effects can be executed in the background effect when the background image becomes the second special mode (green) and when the background image becomes the third special mode (red). 13-11(D), FIG. 13-11(E)), instead of or in addition to the above, the accessory effect can be executed even when the background image becomes the first special mode (yellow). Good too.

(Modification example 11 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, even if the background image becomes the second special mode (green) in the background effect, there are cases where the role effect is not performed (Figure 13-11 (D)). The accessory effect may always be performed when the image is in the second special mode (green). In addition, in the above explanation, even if the background image becomes the third special mode (red) in the background effect, there are cases where the role effect is not performed (Figure 13-11 (E)). In the case where the background image is in the third special mode (red), the accessory effect may always be performed.

(Modification example 12 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the background image always changes in the background effect when the role effect is performed (Figure 13-11 (D), Figure 13-11 (E)); In the same way that the active display may not change even if the active display effect is performed (Figure 13-12 (C), Figure 13-12 (D)), even when the accessory effect is performed, the background The background image may not change during the presentation.

(Modification example 13 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the determination ratio of the active display performance pattern is the same as the set value (Figure 13-12 (B)), but the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern (Figure 13-6 (A), Figure 13-6 (B) ) and FIG. 13-6(C)), it may be changed depending on the setting value.

(Modification example 14 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above description, the execution rate of the accessory production in the first operation period is the same set value (FIG. 13-12(C)), but it may be changed depending on the set value. Similarly, although the execution rate of the accessory production during the second operation period is the same as the set value (FIG. 13-12(D)), it may be varied depending on the set value. For example, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied based on the active display effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied simply based on the set value.

(Modification example 15 of characteristic part 026SH)
Above, we have explained an example in which the accessory effect is executed and the active display changes (Figure 13-10 (B), Figure 13-12, Figure 13-13 (B)). In place of or in addition to the change, an accessory effect may be performed and the pending display may be changed.

(Modification example 16 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character performance and the meter performance, the character performance starts (the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first moves from the initial position) → the character performance ends (the movable body 026SH32 finally moves from the initial position) Although the explanation has been made as follows (stop timing) → meter value update (change) (FIG. 13-3 (A)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of accessory performance → meter value update (when the meter value becomes one of "2", "3", or "4") → end of accessory performance. Further, it is also possible to update the meter value (for example, when the meter value becomes "4") → start the performance of the accessory → end the performance of the accessory.

(Modification example 17 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role performance and the performance during the small hit RUSH, it was explained that the role play starts → the end of the role play → the total number of prize balls is updated by winning the small hit during the small win RUSH. However, the execution timing is not limited to this (FIG. 13-3(B)). For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of the accessory performance → update of the total number of prize balls due to small winnings during the small winning RUSH → end of the accessory performance. Alternatively, the total number of prize balls may be updated by winning a small prize during the small winning RUSH (for example, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 18 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, the relationship (execution timing) between the role production and the background production was explained as follows: start of role production → end of role production → background image update (change) (Figure 13-10 (A)). The timing is not limited to this. For example, start of role play → background image update (when the background image becomes one of the first special mode (yellow), second special mode (green), or third special mode (red)) → end of role play, You can also use it as Alternatively, the background image may be updated (for example, when the background image becomes the third special mode (red)) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 19 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, the relationship (execution timing) between the role play and the active display display was explained as follows: start of role play → end of role play → active display update (change) (Figure 13-10 (B)). The execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of accessory production → update of active display (for example, when active display changes to the second special mode (red)) → end of accessory production. Alternatively, the active display may be updated (for example, when the active display changes to the second special mode (red)) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 20 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role performance and the performance during the interval period, it was explained that the role performance starts → the end of the role play → the number of rounds during the interval is updated (Figure 13-15 (A )), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, when the role performance starts → the number of rounds is updated during the interval period (for example, when the actual jackpot is 10 rounds, but it appears to be a 6 round jackpot, and the 7th round is reached. (When the round is promoted) → The role performance may end. Alternatively, the number of rounds during the interval period may be updated → Accessory performance start → Accessory performance end.

(Modification example 21 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role play and the sudden jackpot, it was explained that the role play starts → the role play ends → special symbol temporary stop (Figure 13-15 (B)), but the execution The timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of role play → special symbol temporary stop → end of role play. Alternatively, the sequence may be as follows: temporary stop of special symbol → start of accessory performance → end of accessory performance.

(Modification example 22 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, it has been explained that the movable body 026SH32 operates between the first state (initial state) and the second state (tilted state) in the role performance, but the role excitement production (which is different from the role play) The movable body 026SH32 may be operated as another performance similar to the accessory performance, another performance partially common to the accessory performance, etc.). An example of a role-enhancing performance is a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 moves a little from the first state to the second state and returns to the first state, or a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 begins to vibrate in the first state and moves in the direction of the second state. This is a performance that pretends to move, but actually ends the vibration without moving in the direction of the second state. Note that the role-playing inciting performance may not be a different performance from the role-playing performance, but may be a mode of the role-playing performance.

(Modification example 23 of characteristic part 026SH)
Although the accessory in the accessory performance in the above explanation was the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIG. 13-1, the accessory in the accessory performance is not limited to the movable body 026SH32. Instead of or in addition to the movable body 026SH32, one or more other accessories may be used to perform the accessory effect.

(Modification example 24 of characteristic part 026SH)
For example, FIG. 13-8 shows an example in which two objects (the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the level display 026SHLV) are updated by the execution of the accessory effect, and in FIG. 13-9, the execution of the accessory effect Although an example has been shown in which one target (total award ball count display 026SH130) is updated, three or more targets may be updated by executing the accessory production.

(Modification example 25 of characteristic part 026SH)
Figure 13-8 shows an example in which all of the multiple objects (the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the level display 026SHLV) are updated by the execution of the accessory effect. It may be arranged so that some of them may be updated. For example, if the meter value in a meter performance is set to 10 levels ("1" to "10"), the range of meter values "1" to "3" is LEVEL1, the range of meter values "4" to "6" is LEVEL2, and the meter value range of "4" to "6" is LEVEL2. The range of values "7" and "8" may be set as LEVEL 3, and the range of meter values "9" and "10" may be set as LEVEL 4. In this example, for example, if the meter value changes from "7" to "8" and you execute the accessory effect, the meter value will be updated from "7" to "8", but the level will be changed to "LEVEL 3". If the meter value changes from "7" to "9" and you perform a role play, the meter value will be updated from "7" to "9" and the level will also change from "LEVEL 3" to "LEVEL 3". It will be updated to "LEVEL4".

(Modification example 26 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above example, in the relationship between role production and meter production, the value (specifically, the meter value) increases as an update corresponding to the execution of the role production. The value may decrease. For example, a countdown performance may be performed, and the remaining number may decrease in the countdown performance in response to the execution of the accessory performance. For example, it may be as follows: count "3" → count "2" → count "1" → start of accessory performance → end of accessory performance → count "0". Furthermore, in a battle performance (for example, a performance in which an ally character wins when the enemy character's physical strength value reaches "0" and is notified of a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the physical strength value of the enemy character may be reduced. For example, the physical strength value of the enemy character may be "100" → the physical strength value of the enemy character "1" → the start of the performance of the accessory → the end of the performance of the accessory → the physical strength value of the enemy character may be "0".

(Modification example 27 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the effect (type of effect, production mode) of the role production differs depending on the scene (situation) (for example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in Figure 13-8(B), C) total prize ball count update image 026SHKSEF, star image 026SH32EF02 in FIG. 13-16 (B3)), the effect of the role production may be the same regardless of the scene (situation). For example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed instead of the total prize pitch count update image 026SHKSEF. Note that, for example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) and the oval image 026SH32EF03 in FIG. 13-16(C4) have a common effect.

(Modification example 28 of characteristic part 026SH)
In place of or in addition to the performance using a role model, effects using images (including cases where the display is not displayed, such as blackout), sound, light, vibration, a light guide plate, wind (blowing), etc. may be performed. That is, in the above example, the role performance and various updates (for example, update of meter value, level, background image, active display, round number display, etc.) were explained, but for example, images, sounds, Effects using one or more of light, vibration, a light guide plate, wind (air blowing), etc. may correspond to various updates.

(Application to other devices)
In addition, although the example applied to a pachinko game machine was described above, it is also applicable to a pachi-slot machine. For example, a meter effect is executed in a certain state (for example, during a normal game), a background effect is executed in another state (for example, a chance zone where expectations for ART and AT are higher than during a normal game, etc.), In the meter performance and background performance, for example, a character performance is performed using a movable body provided around the liquid crystal display of the pachislot machine, and a meter value in the meter performance is updated in accordance with the execution of the character performance. The background image in the background effect may be updated. Alternatively, for example, during the add-on game during ART, an accessory effect may be executed to update the remaining games, the number of remaining sets, etc. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the performance using movable bodies, there may be a performance using one or more of images, sound, light, vibration, light guide plates, wind (air blower), etc., or a performance using reels (so-called reel lock performance). may also be executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 026SH)
(Means F1)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, comprising a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance, and the performance execution means is , a change effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, background image, active display, etc.) in the first situation (for example, reach fluctuation, etc.) The display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, when the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), the first content advantageous to the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) is notified. and a specific display that is different from the predetermined display (for example, the overall A player who changes the display mode of the prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc. (for example, adding the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, adding 1 to the number of rounds, etc.) to differ from the first content. A predetermined effect (for example, the total prize balls shown in Figure 13-9, etc.) that informs the second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or increase in the total number of prize balls), progression to the next round, etc.) that is advantageous for It is possible to perform the total prize ball number update effect using the number update image 026SHKSEF, the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.), and the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) 13-8(B), and when the predetermined effect (for example, the total prize ball number updating effect, etc.) is executed, at least a part of the effect mode is common (for example, FIG. 13-8(B), FIG. -9(B), a game machine characterized in that a role-playing effect for operating a movable body 026SH32, etc.) is executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, in different situations, a specific performance having at least a part of the performance mode in common is executed, and contents advantageous to the player are notified, so that the player's interest can be improved.

(Means F2)
The gaming machine of the means F1 is easily controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, etc.), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state, etc.), and the special state. The special state (for example, the second KT state, etc.) is provided with a state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of controlling the game state, and the second situation is The game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, winning a small hit during a small win RUSH, etc.), and the performance execution means executes the predetermined performance. In response to being controlled to the special state in the special state, the display mode of the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) is changed in response to the game medium passing through a predetermined area. The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls) may be notified by adding the number of prize balls resulting from the small hit.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest in a gaming machine that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled by the special state.

(Means F3)
In the gaming machine of means F1 or means F2, the specific performance may be a performance that operates a movable body for performance (for example, movable body 026SH32, etc.).

According to the gaming machine described above, interest can be improved by using the movable body for presentation.

(Means F4)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to F3, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance, and The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of , and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation may have a common production mode. As described above, for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed instead of the total award ball count update image 026SHKSEF.

According to the gaming machine described above, there is no confusion due to different performance modes, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means F5)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to F3, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance, and The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation are different in at least a part of the production mode. Good too. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) and the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF in FIG. 13-9(C) differ in at least a part of the presentation mode.

According to the gaming machine described above, since there are various performance modes, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means F6)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, comprising a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance, and the performance execution means is , a change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.) (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, etc., FIG. 13-14 (left side)) (the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), the active display effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side)), and the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)" and the background image is red). a special effect that notifies the player of the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) in response to a change in the active display to red, etc.), and a special effect that is different from the predetermined display. The display mode of the display (for example, the total prize ball number display 026SH130, the round number display 026SH106, etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small hit is added, the number of rounds is added by 1, etc.) and the first content is changed. A predetermined effect (for example, the total prize shown in FIG. 13-9, etc.) that notifies the player of a second content that is advantageous for the player (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH, an interval period of a jackpot game state, etc.) It is possible to execute the total prize pitch count update effect using the pitch count update image 026SHKSEF, the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.), and the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) and when the predetermined effect (for example, total prize ball number update effect, etc.) is executed, a specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-8(B), FIG. 13-9(B), the game machine is characterized in that the accessory effect for operating the movable body 026SH32) is executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since a specific performance is executed and content advantageous to the player is notified, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(Means F7)
It is a gaming machine capable of playing games, and is equipped with performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) that can execute a changing performance in response to the execution of a specific performance, and the changing performance is displayed in a predetermined display ( For example, a first change effect that changes the display mode of the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, background image, active display, etc. (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, etc., the meter effect shown in FIG. background effects, active display effects shown in Figure 13-14 (right side)) and specific displays different from the predetermined displays (for example, total award pitch count display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.). A second change effect (for example, a total award ball number update effect using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., a round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) The effect executing means changes the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, the meter value changes to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, and the active display changes by executing the first change effect). In response to the change in color to red, etc.), a special effect is executed to notify the player of a first content advantageous to the player (e.g., development of super reach, etc.), and the second change effect is executed. By changing the display mode of the specific display, a second content different from the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, total number of prize balls (or increase in total number of prize balls), progression to the next round, etc.) ). A gaming machine characterized by notifying.

According to the gaming machine described above, since a specific performance is executed and content advantageous to the player is notified, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Although the embodiment of the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH has been described above using drawings and the like, various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Also, all of the parts described as the embodiments are not necessarily essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can play a game and be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that has performance execution means that can execute a performance (for example, , performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the performance execution means displays a predetermined display (for example, a meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.) in a first situation (for example, reach fluctuation, etc.). A change effect that changes the aspect (for example, a meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, a background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), an active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.); The display mode of the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (for example, the meter value changes to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), which is advantageous for the player. A special performance that notifies the first content (e.g. development to super reach, etc.) and a second situation different from the first situation (e.g. winning a small win during a small win RUSH, an interval period of a jackpot game state) etc.), change the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, add the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, change the number of rounds by 1) (addition, etc.) to notify the player of a second content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progression to the next round, etc.) It is possible to execute effects (for example, the effect of updating the total number of award pitches using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the effect of updating the round number display using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.). Yes, and at least a part of the presentation mode is common between when the changing presentation (for example, meter presentation, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined presentation (for example, total award pitch update presentation, etc.) is executed. A special effect (for example, an accessory effect that moves the movable body 026SH32 as shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B), etc.) is executed,
In response to the execution of the specific production, it is possible to execute an effect production that enhances the production effect of the specific production,
moreover,
A specific performance execution means (for example, a process including super reach A to C at step 097IWS104 in the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image), and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) during execution of a specific effect. ) and an image display means capable of displaying (for example, a part of the production control CPU 120 that selects a process table including super reach A to C and chance up production in step 097IWS104 and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image while the first specific effect is being executed, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) while the second specific effect is being executed. A second specific image (e.g., image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during execution of the specific image in the normal mode (e.g., white) and the expectation that the second specific image is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that the degree of advantage is high, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, the display modes of character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 do not change.) When displaying a specific image according to a special mode, the image display means A specific image can be displayed by adding a production element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, it is different from the first special production element. An example is a gaming machine that can display a specific image by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Furthermore, for the change production and predetermined production, special production elements (for example, an effect image with a display color according to the expectation level) are added in a manner that is controlled to be advantageous when displaying images in the production according to the expectation level. In this way, it is possible to make the player aware that the change performance or predetermined performance is a preview performance and the level of expectation for the performance. This can attract the attention of players.

Further, the change performance and the specific performance may be associated with each other. For example, when both the change performance and the specific performance are performed, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot may be higher than when only one of them is performed. By doing so, the player pays attention to the changing performance and the specific performance, and the interest is increased.

Further, when associating a changing performance with a specific performance, the added performance element may be changed. For example, the second special effect element may be added after pretending that the first special effect element is added. By doing so, attention will be paid to changes in production and added production elements, and interest will be increased.

Furthermore, another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when playing a game. A specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the performance will be carried out (for example, by selecting a process table including super reach A to C in step 097IWS104 in the performance control CPU 120) 097IWS106, S305), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) are displayed during execution of a specific effect. possible image display means (for example, a part that selects a process table including super reach A to C and chance up effects in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), and a specific effect execution means. is capable of executing multiple types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and the image display The means is capable of displaying at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during execution of the first specific effect, and is capable of displaying at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) during execution of the second specific effect. A second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and there is a high expectation that the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) will be controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. The predetermined image can be displayed in a special manner (e.g., blue, green, red, rainbow color) suggesting that the predetermined image is in a display manner not related to the degree of expectation to be controlled to be advantageous (e.g., As shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, the display mode of character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means displays the first special effect element (for example, , blue, green, red, and rainbow-colored display colors) to display a specific image, and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, a second special effect different from the first special effect element is added. An example is a gaming machine that can display a specific image by adding an element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) (see FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

First, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, points different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above among the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which will be described later, will be explained. Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control are basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 14). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 14), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 909 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 14).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 909 is performed. This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 14, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S9024). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 15 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The production control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 15 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 14 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17-1 to 17-19.

First, FIG. 17-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 103SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIGS. 17-1 and 17-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board (gauge) that constitutes the game board surface. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. Furthermore, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is hit relatively weakly (hit left) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is a game area where the game ball is launched by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 and flows down. This is a game area in which a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the general winning hole 10 is arranged in the left gaming area 103SG002L, and in the right gaming area 103SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 103SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game balls flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 17-2 and 17-3, the main board 11 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 103SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 103SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball payout rate), etc., which will be described later, in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate it when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by using the button to open the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Furthermore, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, only the clerk in possession of the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 103SG029 that can display set values and a base value to be described later is arranged in the board case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, there is a A first special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first reservation display capable of displaying the number of first reservation memories. device 103SG025A, a second reservation display 103SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 103SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 103SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jacket type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 103SG002R, such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 103SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B each include an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the LED on the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Then, each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment In the case of section 103SG, the light goes out toward the left.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. For this reason, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 103SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory is When the left two LEDs of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure reservation memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments forming the round display 103SG131 differs depending on these jackpot types.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

In addition, the production control board 12 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the respective origin positions and production positions during variable display etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and a second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 17-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 103SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 17-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 17-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 17-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for specifying a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120). Command E101H is a hot start notification command that notifies that pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started without clearing the contents of RAM 102 (recovery from power outage, also referred to as hot start). Command E102H is a cold start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started up (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data read operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 17-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 17-5, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 17-5, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 17-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 17-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into different types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided to determine the type of variation. It is also possible to first determine the type of a variation pattern from a random number value for pattern type determination, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from among the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-6, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (performance content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach is off, if the set value is 1, it will be the variation pattern in which the normal reach is out, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect will be used. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern in which a non-reach result is performed twice and a non-reach result, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times and a super reach result is used, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 17-7 to 17-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 17-7(A), the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 17-7(B), and the table shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 17-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, and the small hit It includes a fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal pattern display result determination table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 17-7(A) and 17-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Although the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment uses separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in Figure 17-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (A), when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7(A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 17-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/ 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If the value is 1, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by 1.5 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. The magnification is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). Good too.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in Figure 17-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 17-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win gaming state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see the display result for the first special figure when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33094, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

That is, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1 in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are determined based on the winning determination value of 1020, regardless of the gaming state and setting value. The judgment value included in the numerical range of consecutive 1 consisting of The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical value range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. In other words, the winning of the jackpot and small winning is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 17-7 indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

FIGS. 17-8(A) and 17-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 17-8 (A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 17-8(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 17-9. In the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the transition to a low-probability-high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Further, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

In addition, as shown in Figure 17-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the set value is "1", it is within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "2", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 229 is assigned to jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 209 is assigned to jackpot B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "4", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 189 is assigned to jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 169 is assigned to jackpot B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "6", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to jackpot B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game with the first special symbol, while the ratio for determining jackpot A is the same, in which only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends. Among jackpot B and jackpot C in which both the and probability variable control are executed, the ratio for determining jackpot C becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball payout rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, As the number decreases in the order of 1, the ball output rate decreases.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 17-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of 0 to 299 for MR2 is determined. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "2", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 179 is assigned to jackpot B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "3", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 159 is assigned to jackpot B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "4", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 139 is assigned to jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 119 is assigned to jackpot B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of MR2 judgment values 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game with the second special symbol, while the ratio for determining jackpot A is the same, in which only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends. Among jackpot B and jackpot C in which both the and probability variable control are executed, the ratio for determining jackpot C becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball payout rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, As the number decreases in the order of 1, the ball output rate decreases.

In addition, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B. In other words, when the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it is indicated that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B. .

In this way, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the percentage of determining the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It has become.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability increases, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player.

Further, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the gameplay itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the gameplay may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of changing the probability is 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is set to a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a certain variable state based on the passing of the jackpot game, while the rate of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different depending on the variable special symbol (so-called V If the setting value set on the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type). Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small winning probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, when changing the gameplay according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the performance switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a gaming switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect). It may also be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 17-10(A) and 17-10(B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (Jackpot A ) and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpots (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each of the variation patterns (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in Figure 17-10(A), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. ~400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 380 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "4", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 340 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 300 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775. is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in Figure 17-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C), if the setting value is "1", the judgment value of MR3 is within the range 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-2). It is assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 160 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 100 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 is assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when jackpot A is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). , and decreases in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). The setting value is higher than the ratio and becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, if these judgment values indicate that the type of jackpot is "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot C", the super reach β is likely to be determined, and if the type of jackpot is "Jackpot A" In this case, a player who thinks that because the super reach α is assigned in a way that makes it easy to determine, the result will be “jackpot B” or “jackpot C” when the fluctuation pattern of super reach β is executed. can increase expectations.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in Figure 17-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern judgment table, even if the set value is between 1 and 6, the judgment value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small winning variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the small winning variation pattern in this implementation, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small winning variation pattern, With set values 1 to 6, the small winning variation pattern may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base gaming state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 17-11 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure (for low base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 is assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 17-11 (B), in the variation pattern judgment table B for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the judgment value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 is assigned to the non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in Figure 17-11(C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for failure (for the total pending memory number of 5 or more during low base), when the set value is "1", the judgment value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 is assigned to the non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, there is a shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation pattern that corresponds to the time saving control. (PA2-2) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 17-11(D), in the variation pattern determination table D for failure (high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation pattern (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 is assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for misses, the ratio of determining non-reach fluctuation patterns and normal reach fluctuation patterns is higher than the ratio of determining super reach fluctuation patterns, and the ratio of determining normal reach fluctuation patterns. The setting values are set to decrease in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach α, and 901 to 997 is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach β. In other words, if the variable display result assigned to each variation pattern is a failure, the super reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being degraded due to the variable display not being executed.

In the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern for losing super reach α and the determination ratio for the variation pattern for super reach β are completely the same between each set value. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which super reach α deviates and the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which super reach β deviates are determined by the difference between each setting value. may differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

Note that the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. However, this invention is not limited to this, but if the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is an error, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the error in super reach α and the variation pattern of the error in super reach β, regardless of the set value, are determined. Although a form in which both the determination ratios are the same regardless of the setting values set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern that is out of reach and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is off, the determination ratio of the variation pattern where super reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off, regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a jackpot, the set value may be the same. Regardless of the setting value set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the setting value set.

Note that, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns is exemplified depending on the set value. Depending on the setting values that have been set, there may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. In other words, the determination ratio of fluctuation patterns differs depending on the set value, such as not determining one of the fluctuation patterns (determination ratio is 0%), or determining a particular fluctuation pattern at 100%. It also includes determining the percentage of

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the deviation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 17-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17-11(A) to 17-11(C), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each variation pattern determination table for losing in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any number from 1 to 6, the fluctuation in the super reach is The ranges of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of losing the jackpot differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the percentage of times when the variable display is actually executed in the variable pattern of the super reach being off (super reach is off the The appearance rate of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in a variable pattern that is off the super reach is different depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and considering the jackpot probability and miss probability for each set value, the variable display shows that the super reach is off at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It may also be executed in a variation pattern.

Furthermore, the feature section 103SG of this embodiment has a configuration in which a variation pattern is determined at a different rate for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 17-10 and 17-11. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to perform a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to perform. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 17-1 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display on the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 17-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. The first display section 103SG029A to the fifth display section 103SG29E are each composed of 7 segments formed by 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E can be lit or blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

Note that the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test target in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

The display monitor 103SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out in all game states, as shown in Figures 17-12(B) and 17-12(C). Base L, which is the real-time value during measurement; Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls of the first out in all game states; Base 2 is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6,000 pitches out for the second time, and the normal state for every 6000 pitches for the third out (low probability low base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed as percentages on the display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, in order to display the abbreviation "bL." for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B. " is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 1 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b1." which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 2 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 3 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of this embodiment, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls to sequentially display the base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3. For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors depending on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". 5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, a clerk at the gaming parlor can identify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by simply checking the display color on the display monitor 103SG029, without the need for the CPU 103 to execute the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 17-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (103SGSa001). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process advances to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not the setting value changing flag is set, which indicates that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power was cut off (the power cut occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed). (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clearing process described later has been executed. If set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010); if the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), proceed to 103SGSa011 without executing 103SGSa010. move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), execute setting value change processing (103SGSa013b) to change the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceed to 103SGSa013d, and clear the RAM clear flag. If not set (103SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the setting value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, each time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, based on the lock switch 103SG051 being turned OFF, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value that is newly stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. A command is output to the production control CPU 120.

Furthermore, in the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be ended.

Note that in 103SGSa011, if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether to clear the RAM 102 (or execute the RAM clear process (103SGSa009)) when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time. 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), proceed to 103SGSa014 after executing RAM clear processing (103SGSa013e), and if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), RAM clear processing (103SGSa013e) Proceed to 103SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. This clears the contents of all addresses except for the dress in question.

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is checked when the power supply is stopped (power cutoff). Restoration processing is performed to return to the state (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power outage (booted with a hot start), and transmits a command at the time of restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in RAM 102, RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, if the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by an official procedure by an employee of the game parlor, etc. (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated while pachinko is played) When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

Note that if the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), or if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process advances to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start, and transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the performance control board 12 (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to a period for notifying a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGSa023), and all segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 start blinking to start notification of a cold start. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 increments the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processes of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029 are executed. stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

Note that the feature section 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 blink for a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of a call and start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be made to blink. However, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) to initialize the random number circuit 104, and sets the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029) and interrupts are enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends a message to the production control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error), or that the power has recovered from a power outage during a setting change, which will be described later. An error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 increments the value of the error notification execution wait timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 are executed repeatedly, and if the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a setting value abnormal error occurs. The first display section 103SG029A, the second display section 103SG029B, the third display section 103SG029C, and the fourth display section 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, are used as a notification (error notification) of recovery from a power outage during the occurrence of an error or a setting change. "E." is displayed in each of (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and also causes the game to start via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the venue, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation by a clerk at the game parlor, etc.). , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B notify the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment has the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the staff of the gaming hall can check the occurrence of an error and the setting value from both the front and back sides of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the device has recovered from a power outage during a change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the RAM clearing process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag, the present invention is not limited to this; is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when determining that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 17-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271;N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the winning command reception command buffer (not shown) are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (103SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern designation command from the variable pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects an even number of 3 symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns that are aligned in the pattern (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol) is used as the stop symbol. decide. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance determination process shown in FIGS. 17-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display performance in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display performance)
The variable display performance includes, as a performance result, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a setting suggestion result that indicates the setting of the setting value performed by the CPU 103 in the setting value change process. This is a performance (predetermined performance) that can be one of the following. In this feature section 103SG, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice performance) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot with the variable display mode becoming a reach, as a performance in which the performance result suggests an advantageous state. be. Further, as a performance whose performance result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, when the performance result can be either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance that can execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion. When it is possible, a ready-to-reach notice whose presentation result is an advantageous state suggestion result can be executed with priority over a setting suggestion whose presentation result is a setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 17-16, the variable display performance has multiple types of performance patterns (performance modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display performance. When it is decided to execute, it is determined which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 the variable display effect is to be executed based on, that is, which effect mode among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9. It is determined by a lottery whether to execute the variable display performance based on.

As shown in Figures 17-18 (A) to (C), the variable display effect starts when a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of variable display of symbols (timing before the variable display mode becomes reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing paragliders on which passengers are riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The variable display effect ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while multiple images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed that shows a predetermined number of gliders breaking and falling, and depending on the number of fallen paragliders, the set value Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, seven bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, eight bodies break and fall.

In addition, as shown in Figures 17-18 (B) and 17-19 (A), the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same for patterns PT-1 to PT-8, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-8 is destroyed at the same timing. A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number at a time). On the other hand, as shown in Figure 17-19 (B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall, similar to pattern PT-8, but the manner in which the paragliders are destroyed is different from pattern PT-9. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. .

The performance period of such a variable display performance is executed based on which of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. In other words, the performance result is a reach notice that will be an advantageous state suggestion result, or the performance result will be a setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is, a common mode of production (for example, a mode of production in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area) A common presentation period in which the presentation is performed, and presentation of a non-common manner in which it is possible to specify whether the presentation result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, when the number of images Z2 according to the presentation pattern is displayed on the image display device) 5) is performed.

In addition, in the background where images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as a variable display effect, decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed smaller than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Further, during the execution period of the variable display performance, another preview performance or the like that is different from the variable display performance may be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 17-16, among patterns PT-1 to PT-9, for patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7, the setting value is 1. Regarding patterns PT-8 and PT-9, in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, which is a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to a setting suggestion that suggests which of 6 to 6 is to be set, It is said to be a special pattern (special aspect) that corresponds to a reach notice that indicates the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, for the variable display performance, the performance mode during the common performance period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the production mode (number of paragliders destroyed) during the non-common performance period, and there are 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 units are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set value is an even number. (for example, 2, 4, 6), and the pattern PT-5 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even middle setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting). The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} has a low expectation that it will be the same, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the setting value is either 5 or 6. The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} has a high expectation that the setting value is 5 or 6.

In addition, in this feature section 103SG, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low settings and setting values 4 to 6 may be high settings. However, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the symbol will be greater than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the symbol will be super reach. suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern {reach notice (low), first For pattern PT-9, it is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach, so it is a second special pattern {reach that is highly expected to become super reach. Advance notice (high), second special aspect}.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 controls the special modes (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggest that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled and the specific modes that indicate the setting (for example, the pattern PT-9). It is possible to perform a variable display performance based on any one of multiple types of performance modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice (predetermined performance of special mode) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9. If both the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (predetermined performance in a specific mode) are executable, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variable pattern becomes normal reach or super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result becomes a jackpot. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a miss than when it is a jackpot, pattern PT-8 has a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result becomes a jackpot than when it becomes a loss. , it is a pattern with a super reach, that is, a higher jackpot expectation than pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the variable display performance, the number of destroyed paragliders indicates the possibility of a jackpot or which setting value is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more of paragliders without being destroyed may indicate a jackpot or a high setting. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a jackpot and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of characters appearing, the type of characters appearing, etc. It may also be something that can suggest a jackpot or a set value.

In addition, in setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider out of the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. When falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a jackpot or a high setting by outputting a specific sound or emitting light from a game effect lamp 9 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 17-15, in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (loss, non-probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. This can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining the type of reach notice is extracted, and table A for determining the type of effect (reach notice) shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach notice if the

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 17-17(A), when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 60 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach, you will win PT-9 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than Super Reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the probability of winning PT-8 is higher than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

Further, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, you will not win the reach notice.

By setting the determination value in this way, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than in cases other than normal reach fluctuation patterns, and if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than patterns other than super reach variation patterns.

Therefore, if an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to become a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and if an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is more likely to become a super reach variation pattern than a normal reach variation pattern. There is a high possibility that this is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach variation pattern, but it is likely to be a normal reach, so it is considered a reach forecast (low) with low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach variation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that this will happen, it is considered a pattern with a high reach forecast (high) that has a high expectation of a jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 17-15, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {Reach Alert (High)} has been won as a result of the lottery on whether or not the Reach Alert is executed and the type in the 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that pattern PT-9 has won, it is decided to give priority to the execution of the reach notice based on pattern PT-9 over the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that pattern PT-9 has not won, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out and the current setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are specified (103SGS295). Next, a random number for setting suggestion type determination is extracted, and using table B for determining the effect (setting suggestion) type corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display; A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In table B for effect (setting suggestion) type determination shown in FIG. pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, and pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 20 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 15 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 5 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 decision values. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, if the setting value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 will be won at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 1 or 3. If the setting value is an even number, 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to win at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 2 or 4, and if the setting value is 5. , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 5, and when the setting value is 6, pattern PT-6 is likely to be won at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since pattern PT-7 may win only when the setting value is 6, if a setting suggestion based on pattern PT-7 appears, it is confirmed that the setting value is 6.

Therefore, if effects based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less tend to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paragliders are destroyed. If effects based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of objects displayed is 5 or more are likely to appear, the setting value is likely to be either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be high settings (setting value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are considered to be high settings (setting value 5 or 6). 6) is considered to be a setting with a high possibility (high).

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach notice type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for each random number for determination is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each random number for determination may be determined as appropriate. Bye. Moreover, each random number counter for determination for generating each of these random numbers for determination is set in the RAM 122, and each random number counter for determination is updated every timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 17-15, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery on whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type in the 103SGS 296, and as a result, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected. Determine whether or not you have won (103SGS297). If it is determined that one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, if the non-execution of reach notice has been won in 103SGS293, one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is decided. It is decided to give priority to execution of setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-8 over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , Determine whether or not pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} has been won in 103SGS293, based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in 103SGS297. (103SGS300).

If it is determined in 103SGS300 that pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} has been won, if 103SGS297 has won the non-execution of setting suggestion, execution of Reach Notice (Low) based on Pattern PT-8. is determined uniquely, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8. Execution is determined with priority over the setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

103SGS300, if it is determined that pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} has not won, check whether any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has won. It is determined (103SGS302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 has been won, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. In addition, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are won, that is, if the non-execution of both reach notice and setting suggestion is won, the execution of the variable display effect will not be decided and the variable display will continue. The performance determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the production type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the production during variable display is executed. A variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display performance determination process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 17-14, after the variable display performance determination process of 103SGS277, the performance control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether the variable display performance execution determination flag is set, that is, the variable display performance determination of 103SGS277. In the process, it is determined whether it has been decided to execute any of the variable display effects of patterns PT-1 to PT-9.

If the variable display performance execution determination flag is set, proceed to 103SGS279, set the period until the start of the variable display performance in the variable display performance start wait timer (103SGS279), and execute the variable display performance execution. Clear the determination flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the variable display performance execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without passing through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display performance, in this feature section 103SG, the timing when the paraglider appears is the start timing of the variable display performance, and the process table of the variable display performance that is executed from the start of the variable display performance. Since the variable display performance is started based on the variable display performance, we have exemplified a form in which the period until the start timing of the variable display performance is set as the variable display performance start wait timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect (not shown) indicating a precursor may be performed before the start of the variable display effect, and the timing to start the omen may be set as the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the start of the variable display performance may be set as the variable display performance start wait timer.

In 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control is executed for the device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the first embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when executing the variable display of symbols based on the reach variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 performs a predetermined change after starting the variable display and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the production timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or setting suggestion as a variable displaying production, and when deciding whether to execute the variable displaying production, a reach notice whose production result is an advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (special mode presentation) with priority over setting suggestion (specific mode presentation) whose presentation result is a setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the variable display performance determination process in FIG. 17-15, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery on whether or not to execute a reach notice and its type, and a lottery on whether to execute a setting suggestion and its type. Give priority to

That is, in the lottery for reach notice, when the variation pattern is super reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), The notification (high) setting will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a 20% rate, but the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Since the winning (tentatively determined) is achieved by winning the reach notice (low), even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 will be held at 103SGS297. ) does not win, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot is higher than the reach notice (low), and the performance control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT When both the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is executed. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is possible. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 with priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variable display performance from decreasing due to excessive priority being given to the reach notice and the execution of setting suggestions being restricted.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) which suggests that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the production control CPU 120 -5 to PT-7 when both the setting suggestion (high) and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is set. The setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed with priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, pattern PT-8 is used. It is possible to execute the reach notice (low) based on this pattern with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variable display performance from decreasing due to excessive priority being given to setting suggestions and execution of the reach notice being restricted.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 executes the ready-to-reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Specifically, reach notification (high) is executed with priority over setting suggestion (high), setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over reach notification (low), and reach notification (low) is executed with priority over setting suggestion ( (low). That is, the priority of execution of each performance pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low)".

In this feature section 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion. In other words, the variable display effect is an effect that is executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and while the reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot, the setting suggestion is at least This indicates which setting value is not changed during the business period. Furthermore, it is not desirable for a gaming parlor that setting suggestions are frequently made and players can easily guess which setting value is. Therefore, when performing a variable display effect when the super reach variation pattern is used and the setting value is set to high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either one, but the setting value may be suggested at a different timing. However, since jackpot suggestions can only be made during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that reach notices appear at a higher rate than setting suggestions.

In addition, the variable display performance is a performance that is executed only during the variable display period of symbols based on the super reach variation pattern or normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the non-reach variation pattern, so the variable display mode is different from reach. If this happens, the player's expectations for the jackpot will be higher than if it is not a reach. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice especially when the jackpot reach fluctuates pattern, the player's expectations for the jackpot will be lowered, and the performance will be inappropriate, resulting in an increase in reach. By allowing the preview to be executed with priority over the setting suggestion, it is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate.

In addition, in Example 1, if the tendency of the variable display performance is that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, In some situations such as settings, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice.

In addition, in this first embodiment, the reach preview lottery and the setting suggestion lottery are executed separately, and the reach preview lottery is executed with priority (before) the setting suggestion lottery. Although the example has been given, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery for the setting suggestion may be held before the lottery for the reach notice. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, the number of judgment values in tables A and B for determining the production type will be as shown in Figures 17-17 (A) and (B) if the execution rate of reach notice is set higher than the execution rate of setting suggestions. It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, as the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance, a configuration is exemplified in which a setting suggestion that suggests setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the last time the pachinko game machine 1 was started.

(First invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the first invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when it is possible to execute both the setting suggestion effect, no consideration is given to which effect should be given priority, and the setting suggestion effect is executed to set the setting value when controlled to be in an advantageous state. There was a problem that the direction would be inappropriate. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of variable display of symbols (variable display mode (timing before reaching reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode in priority to the predetermined effect of the specific mode). In the variable display performance determination process shown in 15, if pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for reach preview, execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over setting suggestion. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 will be drawn at 103SGS301. ) is given priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. ＞Reach notice (low)＞Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of a performance based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 based on the relationship (see Figure 17-20 of Modification Example 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent a predetermined performance of a specific aspect from being executed and the performance from becoming inappropriate.
Specifically, even if a variable display is executed where the variable display result is a jackpot, setting suggestions that can be suggested at times other than the variable display will be executed with priority over the reach notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of winning the jackpot from becoming inappropriate and the performance from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (e.g., reach notification (low)) and a second special aspect (e.g., reach notification (high))
The predetermined performance execution means is
If both the predetermined presentation of the second special mode and the specific presentation are executable, the predetermined presentation of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the specific mode (for example, In the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-15 of Embodiment 1, if pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the reach preview, the performance control CPU 120 generates the reach preview (based on pattern PT-9) in 103SGS294. (high) is given priority over the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
If both the predetermined presentation of the first special mode and the specific presentation are executable, the predetermined presentation of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the first special mode. (For example, if the performance control CPU 120 wins any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-15 of the first embodiment, in the 103SGS298 (The part where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is given priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming less interesting due to excessively restricting execution of the predetermined effect in a specific mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that makes a suggestion regarding setting a setting value that is more advantageous than the first specific mode. )),
The predetermined performance execution means is
If both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, In the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-15 of the first embodiment, if any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery, the performance control CPU 120 selects the pattern PT in 103SGS298 -5 to PT-7 (the part where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-7 is given priority over reach notification (low) based on pattern PT-8),
If both the predetermined presentation of the first specific mode and the predetermined presentation of the special mode are executable, the predetermined presentation of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the first specific mode. (For example, in the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 17-15 of the first embodiment, if the pattern PT-8 is won in the lottery for the reach preview, the performance control CPU 120 selects the pattern PT-8 in the 103 SGS 301. (The part where the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the pattern is given priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming less interesting due to the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
A motion prompting notification means capable of issuing a motion prompting notice that prompts the player to perform a motion (for example, the performance control CPU 120 provides an operation promotion performance that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B). executable part) and
Operation detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation by the player (for example, operation of operating the push button 31B) regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation promotion notification means is executed. and,
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the detection of a specific motion by the motion detection means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may operate the push button 31B during the valid operation period of the push button 31B). When a specific operation to be performed is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B, regardless of whether an operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and making it fall. Variation example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific motion can execute a predetermined performance at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined performance is a common performance period during which a common performance is performed regardless of whether the predetermined performance of the special mode or the predetermined performance of the specific mode is performed (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion). Regardless of whether there is a common presentation period (common presentation period) in which a presentation is performed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area), and the predetermined special mode A non-common performance period in which it is possible to specify whether it is a performance or a predetermined performance of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the performance pattern) (see FIGS. 17-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having a common performance period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations as to whether the predetermined performance in the special mode or the predetermined performance in the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine according to the means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special manner that not only indicates that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state but also indicates settings (for example, it is possible to execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) is displayed (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of a paraglider, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears is moving) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of a special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific mode) are executable means, for example, a suggestion regarding the display result of one variable display. Various timings may be used as long as the timing is such that the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory If it is to suggest the display result, the reach notice can be executed during the period spanning multiple variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory is executed, and at any timing during the execution period of the variable display. . Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, if both the reach notice (predetermined effect of a special mode) and the setting suggestion (prescribed effect of a specific mode) are executable, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Execute the lottery with priority over the setting suggestion lottery, and execute the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 before the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. and executing the reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the execution rate of the reach notice is 100%.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a jackpot or a set value is suggested depending on the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, a variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when it is practicable. The variable display performance may include both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result as a production result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display performance has a common performance period common to the reach notice and setting suggestion, but the reach notice and setting suggestion have different presentation modes (the common performance period is different from that of the reach notice and setting suggestion). It is also possible to use a separate effect (without a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach preview is suggested by a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Even when a ready-to-reach notice and a setting suggestion with different performance modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the ready-to-reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment of the feature section 103SG will be described based on FIGS. 17-20. In FIGS. 17-20, (A) is a flowchart showing the variable display performance determination process as modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by giving priority to the lottery for whether or not to execute the reach notice and the type of the reach notice over the lottery for the execution or not and the type of the setting suggestion. is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery for the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be performed using one performance type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-20(A), in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (103SGS311). Next, a random number for determining the performance type is extracted, and a table C (not shown) for determining the type of performance (reach notice/setting suggestion) is used to determine whether or not the variable display performance (reach notice/setting suggestion) is to be executed; A lottery is held to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not particularly shown in the table C (not shown) for determining the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type, the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. In other words, although the decision ratios of production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and setting values 1 to 6, the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in Figure 17-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, overall, reach notices are determined at a higher rate (priority) than setting suggestions, that is, the decision ratio is set to increase in the order of reach notice, setting suggestions, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined at a rate of 50%, setting suggestion at 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%).

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the ratio of reach notification (high) is higher than reach notification (low) (for example, reach notification (high) is 40%, reach notification (low) is 10%). It is preferable to decide by Also, if the setting value is high setting value 5 or 6, setting suggestion (high) is set at a higher rate than setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5%). %) is preferable. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a rate that satisfies the relationship of reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low). All you have to do is decide to implement it.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be made different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the setting value, and the variable display result. In detail, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern, when it becomes a jackpot, the reach notice should be given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when it is a loss. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are executable as the production result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display production. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and setting suggestion result are executable as the production result, the production result of the variable display production is It may be possible to execute a specific performance that results in a specific result that is an advantageous state suggestion result and also a setting suggestion result.

In addition, as a specific effect, for example, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in Figures 17-18, when the image Z1 of a paraglider is displayed, a character (e.g. displaying an image of a paraglider moving), or displaying an image in which the paraglider's display mode (e.g., color, size, speed of movement, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may also be possible to display a different background color, or display an effect image. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may be caused to emit light in a special light emission mode.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when the performance result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, in other words, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display performance, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of these may be independently executable at a different presentation timing from the on-display presentation.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 17-18 (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) at a different timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in Figures 17-18 (for example, the ending image of a jackpot) may be given at a timing different from the variable display performance (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be executable.

In the first embodiment of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display effect may be executed multiple times during the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 (A) as Example 2, the first period is from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, targeting the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A variable display performance can be executed during a second period after the first period.

In addition, since the variable display time is too short for non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display performance more than once, in this second embodiment, the variable display performance is executed using the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. Although it is limited to , non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as targets for execution of the variable display performance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variable display performance determination process described above, the variable display performance execution determination table shown in FIG. determined by different ratios. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the variable display performance execution determination table contains 40 random numbers out of 100 variable display performance execution determination tables. are assigned to the execution of the variable display performance, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the variable display performance. In addition, when the variation pattern is super reach, in the variable display performance execution determination table, 60 of the 100 variable display performance execution determination random numbers are allocated to the execution of the variable display performance, and 40 are assigned to non-execution of variable display effects.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 17-21(A).

If the variable pattern is normal reach or super reach and it is decided to execute the variable display effect, it will be executed in the first period as shown in Figures 17-22 (A) and 17-22 (B). The execution of setting suggestion and reach notice is determined at different rates for the variable display performance to be performed and the variable display performance to be executed in the second period. Incidentally, during the same period, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and reach notice is set to be the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 17-23, if it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect pattern) is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation level (low) or expectation level (high)) is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-24, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance executed in the second period is set to a pattern at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) is determined, and 60% of the time, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation level (low) or expectation level (High)).

Here, as shown in Figures 17-23 and 17-24, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- is determined at a rate of 1%. 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 35%, pattern PT-9 {reach is determined at a rate of 5% Advance notice (high) is decided. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and at a rate of 2% At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.2% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 55%, it is decided to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}. %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and at a rate of 37%. At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 3.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

Also, as shown in Figures 17-25 and 17-26, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach, if the setting value set in Pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the execution will be executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the variable display production to be performed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Decide on one of PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, decide on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, and decide on pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 25% (High)}. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and at a rate of 2% At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined. Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.2% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and at a rate of 37%. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined. Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 3.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined. Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display performance, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach Notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided to be executed at a higher rate (60%) than pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach This is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which the execution of "Advance Notice (Low)" or "Reach Notice (High)" is decided.

Therefore, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that indicates an advantageous state becomes more likely to be executed. It is possible to increase expectations for winning the jackpot.

In particular, as shown in Figures 17-23 to 17-26, for the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period, one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided. Regarding the performance type of the variable display performance executed in the second period, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided to be executed is determined by the pattern. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

In other words, patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to setting suggestions are determined in the second period. By determining the ratio in the period to be lower than the first period, setting suggestions are executed at a higher rate than reach notifications in the first period, and reach notifications are executed at a higher rate than setting suggestions in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as a variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as a variable display effect in the second period, that is, during the variable display. The variable display may be caused by the reach notice being executed in such a way that the expectation level of the reach notice decreases as the production is repeated (so-called decline), or by the reach notice (high) being executed for the first time. By allowing the player to predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be a super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectations regarding the variable display being a super reach may be lowered. It is now possible to prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26, the variable display effect executed in the second period is better than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which one of patterns PT-5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. In other words, as the variable display effect is executed, it becomes easier to execute the variable display effect in pattern PT-9, so the game for the variable display effect to be executed in patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It is possible to maintain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period. The present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to perform the variable display performance, the variable display performance may be performed three or more times. In addition, when performing the variable display performance three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the performance type so that pattern PT-9 is easily determined each time the variable display performance is executed, It may also be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have a pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 Since the ratio at which {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The setting suggestions are difficult to be executed continuously due to the variable display effect. In other words, since the setting suggestion is executed in both of these two variable display performances, it is possible to prevent the variable display performance from becoming monotonous and thereby reducing the game's interest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined at different rates, so the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Variable display effects make it difficult for reach notices to be executed continuously. In other words, it is possible to suppress the decrease in game interest due to the variable display performance becoming monotonous due to the reach notice being executed in both of these two variable display performances.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate at which the reach notice is executed as these variable display performances differs depending on the case where the performance is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 In the case where the variable display performance is executed and the case where the variable display performance is executed in the second period, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display performance may be the same. By doing this, when the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display performance, but the first period and the second period This can make players expect the same thing.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26, if the variable display notice performance is executed during the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the example shows a form in which the execution rate of reach notices is determined to be the same as the variable display performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice performance that is executed during the same period. , the rate at which the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined as the variable display performance may vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. By doing this, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as a variable display performance in the first period and the second period changes depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so the variable display This can prevent the middle performance from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17-22 to 17-26, when focusing on the variable display effects executed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of setting suggestions (patterns PT-1 to PT-1) The ratio that determines the execution of one of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of any pattern) The rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 is determined) is set to 40%, which is the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, when focusing on the variable display effects executed in the second period, the proportion of decisions to execute setting suggestions (the proportion of decisions to execute any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is higher than that of pachinko gaming machine 1. The same percentage is set at 40% regardless of the set value, and the percentage that determines the reach notice (the percentage that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. The ratio is set to 60%, which is the same regardless of the setting value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 6, the variable display performance executed during the first period (the first variable display performance) will always be The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display performance executed in the second period (the second variable display performance) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60% when the suggestion is executed, it is possible to make the player equally expect the setting suggestion to be executed.

In addition, in this second embodiment, by being able to perform the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach previews and setting suggestions in one variable display increase, which improves interest. .

More specifically, if only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of the first variable display, the setting suggestion should be made at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, at the ending of the jackpot game state or when the variable display is Although the variable display can be executed independently during the period when the variable display is not being executed, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention while playing the game. Therefore, in the variable display performance in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is not only possible to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that attracts the most attention of the player, but also allows By making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing setting suggestions, but also to increase the number of times during the second period in the first period as described above. If executed at a higher rate than , it is possible to execute setting suggestions and reach notices in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of reach notices even in fluctuating patterns of jackpots.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution may be determined in which neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed in at least one of the first period and the second period.

If non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution rate of setting suggestions is set to be the same in the first and second periods, the execution rate of reach notices will be different between the first and second periods. can be set. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the second invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when it is possible to execute both the setting suggestion effect, no consideration is given to which effect should be given priority, and the setting suggestion effect is executed to set the setting value when controlled to be in an advantageous state. There was a problem that the direction would be inappropriate. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as a variable display performance) that can execute a predetermined performance using any one of multiple types of performance modes. , or a part that can execute reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means may execute the predetermined performance in a case where both the predetermined performance in the special mode and the predetermined performance in the specific mode are executable when executing the predetermined performance a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), the predetermined effect is performed during the second time after the first time among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed during the first time among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better when executing the variable displaying effect in the second period after the first period than when executing the variable displaying effect. (Part where notices are executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the predetermined performance in the special mode becomes more likely to be executed, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to the first game result.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 17-22, in the variable display performance executed in the second period, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the variable display performance executed in the first period. It is possible to increase expectations for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state during the second period, which is closer to the timing at which the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a lower rate than the rate at which the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed in the first number of times when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period than in the case where the effect is executed during the variable display in the first period. When executing a variable display effect, the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, is executed at a lower rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of a specific mode is more likely to be executed at a timing close to one game result, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be suppressed from decreasing.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine a reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine according to the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The predetermined performance execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2). When the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT-. 8 or the part executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect in the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect in the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2). When the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is changed from the specific pattern PT-1 to PT-1. parts that execute at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode becomes easier to execute, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode becomes difficult to execute, so that the advantageous state can be controlled at a timing close to the first game result. Expectations can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to perform variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner);
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect multiple times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may (The part where variable display effects can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect in a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display performance may be executed even while the reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to perform variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner);
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect multiple times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display (target variation) based on a pending memory that is the target of a pre-read notice). (The part that executes the reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-emptive notice of target change over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set specific mode can be executed before the variable display that becomes one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode that indicates that the control will be in the advantageous state and also provides a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the predetermined effect of the reach notice and the setting suggestion). When both are possible, when displaying a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, image Z1 of a paraglider, the paraglider on which the character appears moves) (e.g., the part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the third invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes,
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested in the first suggestion mode. a second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
The predetermined effect execution means may execute the predetermined effect in the case where both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode are executable when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the example 2). As shown in 17-21, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed the first time among the plurality of times, the predetermined effect after the first time among the plurality When the predetermined effect is executed the second time, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 17-23 to 17-26 and FIGS. 17-28 to 17 As shown in -31, if the performance control CPU 120 can execute the variable display performance in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as in the second or third embodiment, (The part where setting suggestions (strong) are executed at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect during the second period than when executing the variable display effect during the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode becomes more likely to be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode to be executed is maintained. I can do it.
In detail, as shown in Figures 17-23 to 17-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period has a stronger setting suggestion than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Since it is easier to execute, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high setting value such as 4 to 6.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting settings, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that suggests a setting different from the setting suggested by the mode, is a form that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the second suggestion mode may be one that makes a suggestion regarding a setting different in type from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode. The setting value suggested by the mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different setting values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting value 1, and the second suggestion mode suggests setting value 1). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5, and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests A common setting value may be included in both the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4. (e.g., when suggesting setting values 3 to 6 that are intermediate or higher), even if one of the first suggestion mode and second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a set value. good. In other words, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting that is the target of suggestion when there are multiple setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. This includes items with different numbers of values, ranges, etc., or items with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a specific effect including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and (The part where setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executed at the same rate in the case where variable display effects are executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.
In detail, the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period), and the variable display effect is set in the first period. Setting suggestions (strong) are executed at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, to avoid excessive execution of setting suggestions. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the high setting value.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) that suggests that the control will be in the advantageous state;
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect in the special aspect at a higher rate than the rate in which the predetermined effect in the special aspect is executed in the first number of times (for example, in Example 2 As shown in FIG. 17-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period than when executing the variable display effect in the first period. In this case, the part in which reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the rate of execution of the predetermined performance in the special mode increases, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to the first game result.
In addition, in Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to perform variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect multiple times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes (The part where variable display effects can be executed in the first and second periods, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to perform variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect multiple times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display (target variation) based on a pending memory that is the target of a pre-read notice). (The part that executes the reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-emptive notice of target change over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set specific mode can be executed before the variable display that becomes one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode that indicates that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state and also provides a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are possible, when displaying a specific image (for example, image Z1 of a paraglider) that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6), the paraglider on which the character appears moves. (e.g., the part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the fourth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 as a second embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect). part),
The predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in a first number of times among the plurality of times, and when the predetermined effect is executed in a second time after the first number of times among the plurality of times. It can be executed at different rates (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and after the first period) (The portion where the rate of execution of setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs depending on when the variable display effect is executed in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the likelihood of appearance of the predetermined effect in a specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-22, the production control CPU 120 determines execution of setting suggestions as variable display production at a higher rate than execution of reach notice in the first period, and By determining the execution of the setting suggestion as a variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, it not only becomes difficult for the setting suggestion to be executed in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is more likely to be executed, the player's expectations for winning the jackpot can be increased. In addition, while in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. .

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 or the part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
In the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, it is possible to make the execution rate of the ready-to-reach notice the same while making the execution rate of the setting suggestion different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, , as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and during the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. (The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the execution of reach notices, while in the second period, the execution of setting suggestions is decided at a lower rate than the execution of reach notices. In the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is more likely to be executed, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be increased.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-22 as Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 is When executing the variable display effect during the period, there is a part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the CPU 120 for effect control. When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different rate depending on when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the setting value, and the setting when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9).
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 as a second embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect). part),
When it is set to the first setting value among the plurality of setting values and when it is set to the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values, The predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same rate in a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in Pachinko machine 1, and the variable display effect executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in Pachinko machine 1. (The part where the suggestion is carried out at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first setting value or the second setting value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode in the predetermined number of times does not change, so that the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode is You can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17-22 to 17-26, regardless of which value from 1 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the process is executed in the first period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect (appearance situation) and the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect executed in the second period (appearance situation) are the same, that is, the setting value is Since the appearance of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether a low setting value or a high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value based on the appearance situation of setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio of setting suggestions (appearance situation) and the ratio of setting suggestions performed as a variable display effect executed in the second period (appearance situation) remain the same, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the ratio (occurrence status) of setting suggestions being executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2, etc.) among the plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as variable display effects executed in the second period (occurrence status) is the same, setting values other than the above two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) will be the same. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence status) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value of 1 to 6 only in the variable display performance that is executed in the first period or the variable display performance that is executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as variable display effects executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effects executed in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence status) may not change.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when it executes the variable display effect in the second period). (The section that executes reach notifications based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute predetermined effects of different modes at different rates (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part where the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate depending on when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. Regarding the display performance, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and for the variable display performance to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. (The part where the reach notification is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, the user can have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate depending on when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, In the part where the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the setting value, and in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, (The part that executes reach notifications based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display and display of the variable display result. For example, the first period may be from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period may be from the start to the end of super reach, or the first period may be from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period may be from the start of normal reach. or until the end of the super reach, or when the variable pattern is temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo continuous variation pattern with a pseudo continuous effect that looks like a variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display, etc. , it may be made to correspond to a re-variable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display performance can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the variable display performance is performed the same number of times, the reach is achieved regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is given in which the execution of the advance notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 17-27(A) and 17-27(B) as a third embodiment, two variable display effects are displayed during one variable display. In the case where it is possible to execute the same number of times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the same number of variable display effects are performed. You may.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the variable display effect, as shown in Figure 17-27 (A) and Figure 17-27 (B), the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the second period The execution of setting suggestions and reach notices is determined at the same rate in the variable display performance executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 17-28 and 17-29, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 30%, pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and at a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 30%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%, and 2. At a rate of 2%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 35%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT is determined. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%, and 2. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 40%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT is determined. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 2%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 45%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and at a rate of 3%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 45%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%, and 4. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 50%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT is determined. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 55%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

Also, as shown in Figures 17-30 and 17-31, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, if the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 is determined at a rate of 1%. ～Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided on, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided on at a rate of 17.5%, Pattern PT is selected at a rate of 17.5% Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 30%, pattern PT-8 is determined. Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 58.8%. Decide on one of PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} and decide on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 20% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2.2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and 35 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 1.5% of the time it is determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)}, and 22.5% of the time At a rate of 22.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and at a rate of 22.5%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and 40 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 2%, decide on one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 25%, select pattern PT-8. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, at a rate of 45% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided on, 3.5% decided on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)}, and 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and at a rate of 27.5%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , at a rate of 4.5%, one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 50 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)}, decide on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} at a rate of 5%, and select Pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display performance, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from 1 to 6, the first period is The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the variable display production executed during the variable display and the variable display executed in the second period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the presentation type of the medium presentation is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which Pattern PT-8 and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (Low) and Reach Notice (High)} are determined as the performance type of the variable display performance executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 (reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)) are determined as the performance type of the variable display performance that is executed is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can have the same expectations for the advantageous state suggestion result.

On the other hand, when executing the variable display effect in the first period or the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting value suggestion (high)} is determined as the production type differs depending on the setting value (for example, setting value 6). Since the appearance of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on whether the setting suggestion is set to the first setting value or the second setting value, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, for the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period, each time the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, a pattern is set as the performance type. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined has decreased, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 5, 6), the setting value is more likely to be suggested than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4). Since it becomes difficult to execute, it becomes difficult for a player who recognizes the variable display performance to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display performance executed in the second period is better than the variable display performance executed in the first period with pattern PT-9 as the performance type. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on pattern PT-9 becomes more likely to be executed, thereby maintaining the player's expectation that the variable display effect will be executed in pattern PT-9. can be done.

In addition, in this third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-27, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting value suggestion (high)} are determined between the production and the variable display production executed in the second period is the same; Although pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same rate, this invention is not limited to this example. , even if the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period will have a pattern PT-1. ~ The rate at which PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined may be different, or pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (High)} may be determined at different rates.

In addition, in this third embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period, these variable display performances are the same. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the setting suggestion is executed based on the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. Setting suggestions may be performed at different rates as these variable display effects depending on when the variable display effect is executed. By doing this, the rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence rate) changes between when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed during the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-27, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes the variable display performance (the first variable display performance) in the first period and the variable display performance performed in the second period. When executing a reach notice as a medium performance (second variable display display), an example is shown in which the reach notice is executed at different rates depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes variable display effects that the effect control CPU 120 executes during the first period (first variable display effect) and variable display effects that the effect control CPU 120 executes during the second period. When performing a reach notice as the second variable display performance, if the same number of variable display performances is performed, the reach notice will be given at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1. May be executed. By doing this, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) will not change depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 if the same number of variable display performances are performed. In this way, it is possible to keep the player's expectation that the ready-to-reach notice will be executed in the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect),
The predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in a first number of times among the plurality of times, and when the predetermined effect is executed in a second time after the first number of times among the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, and (The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-27, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period, these variable display Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same rate (65% in the example shown in Figure 17-27) as the medium effect, the settings are set for the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. The player can similarly be made to expect that the suggestion will be carried out.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as Embodiment 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and in the second period after the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the medium effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (e.g. , a pattern in which the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. (Part where reach notification based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance situation of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In the third embodiment, if it is possible to determine non-execution, it is possible to make the execution rate of the setting suggestion the same in the first period and the second period, and to make the execution rate of the reach notice different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which setting value is set from 1 to 6, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined performance of the special mode can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as the third embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 When executing a variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate depending on the set value, and the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second period (The part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value when executing the variable display effect in .)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the seventh invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined performance can be performed multiple times (for example, a part where a variable display performance can be performed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach performance),
When it is set to the first setting value among the plurality of setting values and when it is set to the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values, It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the specific mode at different rates in a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. When executing, the part where setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different rates depending on the set setting values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the predetermined number of times changes depending on whether the first setting value or the second setting value is set, so it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. .
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17-27 to 17-31, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display in the first period depending on which value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 from 1 to 6. Since the execution rate (occurrence status) of setting suggestions changes depending on when executing the medium effect and when executing the variable display effect during the second period, the player can check not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It becomes possible to predict the setting value based on the appearance of setting suggestions in .

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the second When executing variable display effects during the period, reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different rates (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when it executes the variable display effect in the second period, (Part where reach forecast can be executed based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which setting value is set from 1 to 6, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined performance of the special mode can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-27 as the third embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 When executing a variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate depending on the set value, and the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second period (The part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value when executing the variable display effect in .)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the first period Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. determines whether to perform a reach notice or setting suggestion based on the setting value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while determining whether to perform the reach notice or setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value for the second period. It may be determined which one to perform, that is, which one to perform in the first period or the second period, based on different criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17-32 as Example 4, for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, and A variable display performance can be executed in a second period after the first period. In addition, since the variable display time is too short for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns to execute the variable display effect more than once, in this embodiment 4, the variable display effect is executed on the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. It is limited to.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display performance determination process described above, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display performance is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, processing is executed to determine the type of variable display performance based on the fluctuation pattern. Below, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 17-33.

As shown in FIG. 17-33, in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified using the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. Next, it is determined whether the identified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. If so, the variable display performance determination process is terminated because the variable display performance is not applicable.

When the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out and the current setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are specified (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting values specified in the 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the variable display performance in the first period and the performance type (performance pattern) when executing the variable display performance execution determination table (not shown) is determined. (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 17-34(A), in the 103SGS314, the performance control CPU 120 uses the common variable display performance execution determination table when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, to predict the reach, suggest settings, and determine non-execution. Decide on one of the following. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determination of setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, the execution of reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, the reach notice will be determined based on the common execution ratio. It is set such that the larger the value, the higher the execution rate of setting suggestions and the execution rate of setting suggestions (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-35, if we pay attention to the variable display performance type determination ratio in the first period, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 18%, and 40. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 15%, and 43. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 12.5%, Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 45.5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 10%, and 46. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50% At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 40%. So pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided.

Returning to FIG. 17-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether execution of the variable display effect in the first period has been decided (103SGS315), and if execution has been decided, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT -9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and sets a variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display performance in the first period has been decided (103SGS317); Proceed to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process advances to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined that it is normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or not, based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the setting value. Whether or not to execute the variable display performance during the period and the performance type (performance pattern) to be executed are determined using a variable display performance execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 17-34(B), in 103SGS319, the performance control CPU 120 uses the variable display performance execution determination table for normal reach to decide between the ready-to-reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determination of setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of a setting value of 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, reach notices and setting suggestions are determined by a common execution ratio, and setting suggestions ( (High) is set so that the larger the set value, the higher the execution rate.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-36, if we focus on the case of normal reach regarding the variable display notice performance type determination ratio during the second period, if the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is decided to be non-executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.2%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.5%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 32%. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 30. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 29%. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 6%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not normal reach, that is, it is super reach, then based on the specified fluctuation pattern and setting value, whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the second period, and the execution The performance type (performance pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display performance execution determination table (for super reach, not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 17-34(C), in the 103SGS320, the performance control CPU 120 uses the variable display performance execution determination table for super reach to decide between reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of set value 1 and set value 6, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and determines non-execution. do not decide. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, reach notices and setting suggestions are determined by a common execution ratio, and setting suggestions ( (High) is set so that the larger the set value, the higher the execution rate.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-36, if we pay attention to the super reach case regarding the variable display notice performance type determination ratio during the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and at a rate of 4%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and Pattern PT-9 { Reach Forecast (High)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 5%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 8%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 5%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 17-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether execution of the variable display effect in the second period has been decided (103SGS321), and if execution has been decided, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 ~PT-9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and sets a variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display performance in the second period has been decided (103SGS323). ), ends the variable display performance. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the variable display performance ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when executing the variable display effect in the first period of multiple times, the setting value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. 6, and when executing the variable display effect in the second period, the variable pattern is normal reach and super reach. Determine the reach preview or setting suggestion based on a separate decision table. In other words, since the criteria for determining whether to perform a reach notice or a setting suggestion are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the execution rate of setting suggestions in the first period is higher than the execution rate of setting suggestions in the second period, so while setting suggestions are more likely to be executed in the first period, in the second period Since it is easier to execute, the setting suggestion will not be executed more easily in both the first period and the second period even if it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not likely to be executed in the second period, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, the execution rate of reach notices in the second period is higher than the execution rate of reach notices in the first period, so the display can be changed by executing reach notices in both the first and second periods. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the middle production. However, as shown in FIGS. 17-35 to 17-37, when paying attention to each setting value, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, When determining the execution of the reach notice at the same rate (40%) and executing the variable display effect in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided based on the same ratio (60%). For this reason, the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, are different from the execution of the reach notice. In the same way, it can attract the attention of players.

In addition, even if the setting value is set high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, reach notice is more likely to be executed than setting suggestion in the second period, and even if super reach is In this case, the reach forecast (high) is likely to be executed, so it is possible to suppress the player's expectations for the jackpot from decreasing.

Furthermore, even if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed compared to the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion is made in super reach. Even if this is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the high setting.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of reach notice and setting suggestion are determined at the same rate, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting value is 1, 2, As the settings increase in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, so the higher the setting, the more likely setting suggestions will appear, so it is easier for players to set the setting value. It becomes easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-34, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period (the first variable display performance) and in the second period. Although a form is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different rates depending on when the variable display performance (second variable display performance) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. , the performance control CPU 120 may decide to execute the reach notice at the same rate in the case where the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display performance is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player have the same expectations for the execution of the ready-to-reach notice in the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance.

In addition, in this embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 17-34, if the variable display performance is the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, in the same number of variable display performances, a reach notice may be executed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. may be determined in different proportions. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same type of performance from being decided for the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance, so that the variable display performance is not monotonous. You can prevent it from happening.

(Eighth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the eighth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, whether the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small win" in the variable pattern setting process of S111) (a part that determines the fluctuation pattern to be one of multiple types using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the predetermined result of whether or not to do so);
A variable display means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that can execute variable display according to the determined variable display pattern, in the effect processing during variable display, displays decorative patterns based on the display result and variable pattern specified by the effect control command) (the part that executes variable display),
A predetermined performance determining means that determines the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be one of a plurality of types (for example, in the variable display performance determination process, one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is selected as the performance pattern of the variable display performance. ), and
A predetermined effect execution means that can execute the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7) (a part where setting suggestions or reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed),
Equipped with
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-32 as Example 4, there is a part where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the reach effect) ),
Based on at least the setting value that has been set, the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be executed at the first time among the plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-33 as Example 4, the performance control (a part in which the CPU 120 determines the performance type of the variable display performance in the first period based on the set value),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be executed in a second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 17-33, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance type of the variable display performance based on the set value and fluctuation pattern set in the variable display performance in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the presentation mode of the predetermined presentation are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined presentation from becoming monotonous.
In detail, as shown in Figure 17-33, when determining the performance type of the variable display performance in the first period (the first variable display performance), the variable display performance is determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. Determine the production type of production *Is it not a setting value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the performance type of the variable display performance in the second period (the second variable display performance), the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are determined. The performance type of the variable display performance is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the criteria for determining the type of performance are different between the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance, the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance differ. This prevents the execution of the same type of performance from being decided, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 may issue a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. parts executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (e.g. As shown in FIG. 17-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the pattern PT in the case where the effect is executed during the variable display in the first period and when the effect is executed during the variable display during the second period. -8 or the part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-9 is executed at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance situation of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting values are set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-34 as Example 4, the effect control CPU 120 is When executing the variable display effect during the period, there is a part in which the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and a part in which the effect control CPU 120 When executing a variable display effect during two periods, the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, the user can have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate depending on when the setting value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value, and the part that is set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present Example 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether to perform setting suggestion or reach notice according to the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to perform setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the setting value. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the second period, a mode was exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion in response to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate depending on whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, it is determined whether to perform a reach notice or a setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Not limited to this, in the second period, either reach notification or setting suggestion is executed not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit. It may also be possible to decide whether

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the start of the variable display can be executed for the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variable display performance can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the normal reach reach performance and the second period after the first period, this invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display performance may be executed three or more times during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated as a variable display multiple times. It may also be executed at a timing corresponding to the re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the fluctuating pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like this.

For example, as shown in Figure 17-38 as Modification Example 2, all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach, and super reach are targeted, and from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the normal reach reach effect. There is a first period before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and a second period that is after the first period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern. The performance during variable display can be executed in a third period which is after the second period and corresponds to a re-variable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is executed before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is executed before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern. The second period is executed in response to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the third period is executed at the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed at the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may also be executed in response to the re-variable display.

In this modification example 2, in the variable display performance determination process described above, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, any of the setting values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. The performance type of the variable display performance is determined depending on whether the variable display performance is set, and for the second and third periods, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the variable display performance is based on the setting value Executes processing to determine the type of performance.

Specifically, in the first period, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (does not determine the execution of the reach notice). Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases. In the third period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases.

In addition, while the proportion of setting suggestions determined in the second and third periods is set to be lower than the proportion of setting suggestions determined in the first period, reach notices are determined in the first period. By setting the ratio that determines the reach notice in the second and third periods to be higher than the ratio, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in this modified example 2, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and When executing the variable display effect during the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variable pattern. That is, since the criteria used by the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous performance is such that the expectation of a jackpot increases as the number of re-variable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable display is In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice, and the third re-variation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern will be a super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing this, setting suggestions can be made while suppressing the possibility that reach notices occur frequently and the reliability of reach notices decreases in the case of a fluctuating pattern that involves one or two pseudo-continuous performances. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern involving three pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from occurring frequently and lowering the player's expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in this modification 2, in the first period where the jackpot reliability is the lowest, execution of setting suggestions is determined with priority over reach notice according to the setting value, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, so setting suggestions are preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods when the jackpot reliability is higher than in the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. Since it is determined with priority, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations for the jackpot.

In addition, in this modification example 2, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, the execution of the setting suggestion need not be determined 100% of the time. Further, in the second period, although the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the ready-to-reach notice, the execution of the ready-to-reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. In addition, in the third period, we exemplified a form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, It is not necessary to determine execution at a 100% rate.

In addition, in this modification 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined according to the setting value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined with priority over the reach notice. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined with priority over the setting suggestion depending on whether the reach is normal reach or super reach, this invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period In this case, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice according to the setting value, and in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is determined according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. may be determined with priority over setting suggestions.

Furthermore, in the second modification example, the execution of the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice in the first period according to the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are multiple In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern. A reach notice may also be determined.

Furthermore, in the second modification example, in the second period and the third period, execution of the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If so, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in Examples 2 to 4, as a variable display effect executed in the first period, the rate at which setting suggestions are determined to be executed is set higher than the rate at which reach notices are determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution is determined with priority, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. The performance may be determined by giving priority to the execution of setting suggestions depending on the order of processing for determining the type of performance.

In addition, in Examples 2 to 4, as a variable display effect executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is higher than the rate at which setting suggestions are determined, so that the reach notice is determined. Although a mode in which execution is given priority is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 17-15 as a first embodiment, during variable display executed in the second period As for the performance, the execution of the ready-to-reach notice may be given priority depending on the order of processing for determining the performance type.

Although the embodiments of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of this invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment described above, the variable display effect can be executed multiple times in one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed multiple times. It may be possible to execute the process over variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information regarding the variable display whose execution was suspended when the starting winning occurred (for example, display results (including jackpot type), random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.). By pre-reading and determining the display results and fluctuation patterns based on the extracted random numbers, and transmitting the determination result to the performance control board 12 as a performance control command at the time of starting winning, the performance control CPU 120 can If it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview effect that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that was the target of the look-ahead notice will be A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a pre-read notice of a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display performance at a predetermined timing. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a process is executed in which a number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process are destroyed and changed to an image Z2 indicating falling, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the push sensor 35B detects an operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A) by the player, the image changes to image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation. You may also do so.

In addition, when changing to image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the valid operation period of the push button 31B. As an operation promotion effect, an operation promotion image (for example, a text image saying "Continuously hit!" or a button image) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the user is operating the push button 31B, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and causing it to fall) can be executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the variable display performance may be ended without any reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing this, a player who knows the specific action can execute an effect that changes the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

In addition, as an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, an operation promotion image that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect may be executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 where the variable display effect is executed. Even if an operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting section built into or around the push button 31B, which is provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 where the player's attention is focused, good. By doing this, only the players who know the specific action or the players who have noticed the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, which improves the interest of the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a predetermined performance in which the performance result suggests an advantageous state, a reach notice indicating the possibility of becoming a reach is applied as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the predetermined effects that result in an advantageous state suggestion include a stop symbol preview that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol will stop, a character preview where a character appears, and a step in which the preview image changes step by step. Various preview performances can be applied as long as they are suggestive performances that suggest the possibility of a jackpot, such as a close-up preview or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the variable display performance has a common performance period common to the reach notice and setting suggestion, but the reach notice and setting suggestion have different presentation modes (corresponding to the common performance period). (Specifically, the reach preview may be a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion may be a suggestion using a paraglider, etc.). Even when a ready-to-reach notice and a setting suggestion with different performance modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the ready-to-reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, a first effect image corresponding to a reach notice and a second effect image different from the first effect image and corresponding to a setting suggestion are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 during the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by changing the display mode such as emitted light color, brightness, contrast, etc. By making the visibility higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 is capable of drawing images in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, it may draw the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and set When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer are drawn in the image display device 5. When the first effect image is displayed overlappingly with the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when drawing the second effect image on the upper first drawing layer and drawing the first effect image on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set to be lower than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (by making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by making the sound aspects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice will be the same as the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method to increase the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, in addition to increasing the volume of the sound effect, you can also increase the audibility by decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM. Good too. Note that this also includes cases in which a sound effect corresponding to a reach notice is output, but a sound effect corresponding to a setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, if the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of playback channels (for example, playback channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the playback channels. For example, the first performance sound corresponding to the reach notice can be played on the first playback channel, and the second performance sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be played on the second playback channel different from the first playback channel. At the same time, when playing the first effect sound and the second effect sound at the same timing from different playback channels (first playback channel and second playback channel), the first effect sound played on the first playback channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound played on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by making the light emission color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emission mode corresponding to the reach notice and the visibility of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion can be changed. In other words, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be more visible than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that there are also cases where the light is turned on in response to a reach notice, but the light is not turned on but turned off in response to a setting suggestion.

In other words, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that, as explained in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2, the production result will be either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result. In addition to increasing the execution rate of reach notices in cases where the performance result is both an advantageous situation suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, the presentation mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is better than the production mode of setting suggestion. This includes things that are prioritized. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over setting suggestions means that the execution rate, display, and sound are adjusted so that the reach notice has a higher performance effect on the player than the setting suggestion has on the player. It also includes performing the performance with different presentation modes such as , light, and movement of movable objects.

Further, in the above embodiment, the setting suggestion suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 is set as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be one that suggests the possibility that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has not been changed (left unchanged).

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout of prize balls is higher than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) where conditions are more likely to be met, a high probability game state (high probability state) where the probability of becoming a jackpot game state is high, a high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), a special reach state (e.g. , super reach, etc.), and a state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a predetermined number of game balls are Rental balls that are recirculated inside and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the game information is stored. Note that in these enclosed game machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

In addition, in a slot machine, a state that is advantageous for a player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small prize, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state) ), a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, an ART (assisted replay time) state), and the like.

In addition, when the predetermined performance of the present invention is made possible to be executed in a slot machine, when a special prize such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not completed and is carried over, the special prize Suggestions that suggest the possibility that the corresponding combination of symbols will be derived and displayed and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), and AT status It is possible to execute a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) between winning the AT state or the ART state and starting the AT state or the ART state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 097IW)
Next, the characteristic part 097IW will be explained.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 18-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 097IW. Of these, FIG. 18-1(A) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for failure. Further, FIG. 18-1(B) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table for jackpot. As shown in FIG. 18-1(A), in this example, in the case of a deviation, one of the fluctuation patterns PA1 to PA5 is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 18-1(B), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, one of the variation patterns PB2 to PB5 is determined as the variation pattern.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that specifies normal variation. Moreover, the variation patterns PA2 and PB2 are variation patterns that designate execution of normal reach during the variation display of decorative symbols. Further, the variation patterns PA3 and PB3 are variation patterns that specify execution of the super reach A during the variation display of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, the variation patterns PA4 and PB4 are variation patterns that designate execution of the super reach B during the variation display of decorative symbols. Further, the variation patterns PA5 and PB5 are variation patterns that specify execution of the super reach C while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

In this example, as shown in Figure 18-1, when a super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, the expectation for the jackpot is higher than when a normal reach is executed. The degree of reliability (reliability) is high. Also, among the three types of super reach, when super reach C is executed, the expectation (confidence) for a jackpot is the highest, and when super reach B is executed, the expectation (confidence) for a jackpot is the next highest. The expectation level (confidence level) for a jackpot is lowest when Super Reach A is executed. Therefore, in this example, normal reach and super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are effects that suggest whether or not there will be a jackpot, and which type of reach will be executed. The level of expectation (confidence) for a jackpot differs depending on the situation.

Next, the operation of the performance control means (performance control CPU 120) will be explained.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 18-2 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the production control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern command (production control command that specifies a variation pattern) read in step 097IWS101 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command ( The display result of the decorative symbol (stop symbol) is determined in accordance with the performance control command () which specifies whether or not it is a jackpot, whether or not it is a small win, and the type of jackpot (step 097 IWS102). That is, by executing the process of step 097IWS102 by the production control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 097IWS102, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 097IWS102, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a variable probability jackpot, the production control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same variable probability pattern (for example, an odd number pattern) as a stop symbol. Decide on a combination. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same non-probable variable symbol (for example, an even number symbol) as a stop symbol. Determine. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, a small winning symbol (for example, a combination of "135" symbols) is determined as the stop symbol. Further, if the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up performance setting process for setting the presence or absence and type of chance-up performance during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the "chance-up performance" is a performance that is performed in such a manner that the expectation for a jackpot is further increased (the chance is increased) during the execution of the super reach.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the chance-up performance if execution of the chance-up performance is determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set.

In addition, especially in the case of a variation pattern involving super reaches A to C (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5), a process table including super reaches A to C is selected in step 097IWS104, and the selected By executing step 097IWS106 and the process of step 097IWS305 of the variable display processing (step S172) according to the process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols.

Furthermore, when executing Super Reach A to C, if execution of the chance up effect is further determined in the chance up effect setting process in step 097IWS103, a process table including the chance up effect is selected in step 097IWS104, By executing step 097IWS106 and the process of step 097IWS305 of the variable display processing (step S172) according to the selected process table, super reach A to C are executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the chances are increased. The performance is executed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 097IWS106).

In addition, in this feature part 097IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command; The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 097IWS108), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up effect setting process)
FIG. 18-3 is a flowchart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including super reach A (step 097 IWS201 ). If the variation pattern includes super reach A, the performance control CPU 120 selects the chance-up performance determination table A as a table for determining the presence or absence and type of chance-up performance (step 097IWS202). Then, the process moves to step 097IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include super reach A, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation patterns PA4, PB4) including super reach B ( Step 097IWS203). If the variation pattern includes super reach B, the performance control CPU 120 selects the chance up performance determination table B as a table for determining the presence or absence and type of chance up performance (step 097IWS204). Then, the process moves to step 097IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include super reach B, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA5, PB5) including super reach C ( Step 097IWS205). If the variation pattern includes super reach C, the performance control CPU 120 selects the chance up performance determination table C as a table for determining the presence or absence and type of chance up performance (step 097IWS206). Then, the process moves to step 097IWS207.

If the variable pattern does not include super reach C (N in step 097IWS205), that is, if the variable pattern includes non-reach or normal reach, the chance-up performance setting process is immediately terminated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 uses the chance-up performance determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204, and S206 to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence and type of chance-up performance (step 097IWS207).

FIGS. 18-4 to 18-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 18-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected in step 097IWS202. Further, FIG. 18-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected in step 097IWS204. Further, FIG. 18-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected in step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up performance determination table A (chance-up performance determination table for super reach A) will be explained using FIG. 18-4. As shown in FIG. 18-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, determination values are assigned to no chance-up effect and to chance-up effects A1 to A7, respectively.

As shown in Figure 18-4, in this example, when super reach A is executed, four images, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4, are created during the execution of super reach A. displayed in order. Further, as shown in FIG. 18-4, these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in one of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. In addition, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and if these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red, your chances will increase. This corresponds to a state in which a performance is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during super reach A, expectations for a jackpot are further increased (chances are increased).

In addition, in this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4 displayed during super reach A, image B1 displayed during super reach B described later, image B2, image B3, and super Image C1 and image C2 displayed during reach C are also referred to as chance-up images.

As shown in FIG. 18-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 as chance-up effects executed during super reach A. "Chance-up effect A1" is a chance-up effect in which image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in green display color. Further, "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 18-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Furthermore, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation level (confidence level) for a jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green has the second highest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot, and the lowest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot is when each chance-up image is displayed in blue (however, when each chance-up image is displayed in white) (The level of expectation (confidence) for winning the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed.)

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. "Chance-up effect A4" is a chance-up effect in which image A1 and image A2 are displayed in blue display color, and then image A3 and image A4 are displayed in green display color. In addition, "chance up effect A5" is a chance that after image A1 and image A2 are displayed in blue display color, image A3 is displayed in green display color, and image A4 is further displayed in red display color. This is a close-up performance. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect starts, the chance-up image that is displayed afterwards may be displayed in green or red, so the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot ) Even if the chance-up image is displayed in a display color with a low value, the user can have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed afterwards.

In addition, as shown in Figure 18-4, in this example, even if the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with high expectations (confidence) for a jackpot to a low display color. (For example, after a chance-up image is displayed in red, a chance-up image that is displayed after that is configured so that it will not be displayed in blue or green.) With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes disappointed after having high expectations for a jackpot.

Additionally, in this example, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C is in principle, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. There may be cases where "Chance-up effect A6" is a chance-up effect that displays image X that can be displayed in common with super reach B instead of image A1, and then displays image A2, image A3, and image A4 in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in a rainbow display color. By displaying in a rainbow color different from blue, green, and red in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that an image of a common mode is displayed as a chance-up image.

Note that in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow colors, the expectation for a jackpot is further increased (the chances are increased), so the rainbow display color also corresponds to a special mode.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. "Chance-up effect A7" is a chance-up effect in which image A1, image A2, and image A3 are displayed in white display color, and then image A4 is displayed in red display color. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-4, in this example, when chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when there is a jackpot. There is no value assigned, and the jackpot is guaranteed. With such a configuration, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), a sense of anticipation can be maintained.

Next, the chance-up performance determination table B (chance-up performance determination table for super reach B) will be explained using FIG. 18-5. As shown in FIG. 18-5, in the chance-up performance determination table B, determination values are assigned to no chance-up performance and to chance-up performances B1 to B7, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 18-5, in this example, when super reach B is executed, three images, image B1, image B2, and image B3, are displayed in sequence during the execution of super reach B. Ru. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-5, these images B1, B2, and B3 are displayed in one of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, B2, and B3 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. In addition, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, B2, and B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red, a chance-up effect is executed. corresponds to the state in which Therefore, in this example, when image B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during super reach B, expectations for a jackpot are further increased (chances are increased).

As shown in FIG. 18-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 as chance-up effects executed during super reach B. "Chance-up effect B1" is a chance-up effect in which image B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which image B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which image B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 18-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Furthermore, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation level (confidence level) for a jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green has the second highest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot, and the lowest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot is when each chance-up image is displayed in blue (however, when each chance-up image is displayed in white) (The level of expectation (confidence) for winning the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed.)

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. "Chance-up effect B4" is a chance-up effect in which image B1 is displayed in blue display color, and then image B2 and image B3 are displayed in green display color. "Chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which image B1 is displayed in blue display color, image B2 is displayed in green display color, and image B3 is further displayed in red display color. be. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect starts, the chance-up image that is displayed afterwards may be displayed in green or red, so the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot ) Even if the chance-up image is displayed in a display color with a low value, the user can have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed afterwards.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 18-5, in this example, even if the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a high expectation (confidence) for a jackpot to a low display color. (For example, after a chance-up image is displayed in red, a chance-up image that is displayed after that is configured so that it will not be displayed in blue or green.) With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes disappointed after having high expectations for a jackpot.

Additionally, in this example, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C is in principle, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. There may be cases where "Chance-up effect B6" is a chance-up effect that displays image X that can be displayed in common with super reach A instead of image B1, and then displays image B2 and image B3 in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in a rainbow display color. By displaying in a rainbow color different from blue, green, and red in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that an image of a common mode is displayed as a chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. "Chance-up effect B7" is a chance-up effect in which image B1 and image B2 are displayed in white display color, and then image B3 is displayed in red display color. In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a jackpot occurs. There is no value assigned, and the jackpot is guaranteed. With such a configuration, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), a sense of anticipation can be maintained.

Next, the chance-up performance determination table C (chance-up performance determination table for super reach C) will be explained using FIG. 18-6. As shown in FIG. 18-6, in the chance-up effect determination table C, determination values are assigned to no chance-up effect and to chance-up effects C1 to C5, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 18-6, in this example, when super reach C is executed, two images, image C1 and image C2, are sequentially displayed in principle during execution of super reach C. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-6, these images C1 and C2 are displayed in one of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Furthermore, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in blue, green, or red, a chance-up effect is being executed. Corresponds to the state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach C, the expectation for a jackpot is further increased (the chances are increased).

As shown in FIG. 18-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 as chance-up effects executed during super reach C. "Chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which image C1 and image C2 are displayed in a blue display color. Furthermore, the "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a green display color. Furthermore, the "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 18-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Furthermore, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation level (confidence level) for a jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green has the second highest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot, and the lowest expectation (confidence) for a jackpot is when each chance-up image is displayed in blue (however, when each chance-up image is displayed in white) (The level of expectation (confidence) for winning the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed.)

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect C4" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a green display color, and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect has started, the chance-up image that is displayed afterwards may be displayed in red, so the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is Even if the chance-up image is displayed in a low display color, the user can have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed afterwards.

In addition, as shown in Figure 18-6, in this example, even if the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with high expectations (confidence) for a jackpot to a low display color. (For example, after a chance-up image is displayed in red, a chance-up image that is displayed after that is configured so that it will not be displayed in blue or green.) With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes disappointed after having high expectations for a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect C5" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a white display color, and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. In addition, as shown in Figure 18-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a jackpot occurs. There is no value assigned, and the jackpot is guaranteed. With such a configuration, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), a sense of anticipation can be maintained.

In this example, the presence or absence of a chance-up effect and the display color of each chance-up image are determined in one lottery process using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in Figures 18-4 to 18-6. Although the case where the determination is made is shown above, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to perform a chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display color of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be changed individually. It may be configured such that each is determined by a lottery process.

In addition, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that the expectation level (confidence level) for the jackpot does not change from a high display color to a low display color (there is no case of decline). Although a case has been shown in which the pattern (chance up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) is determined, the method is not limited to such a determination method. For example, if the display color of each chance-up image is determined by an individual lottery process, the chance-up image that is displayed later is processed by prohibition so that the chance-up image that is displayed later is not inferior to the chance-up image that is displayed first. It may be configured to perform the following. In this case, for example, if you decide the display color of the chance-up image that will be displayed first, then when you decide the display color of the chance-up image that will be displayed later, it will be The display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined by performing a lottery process using a determination table that includes only display colors. Also, for example, if a display color with a lower expectation level than the chance-up image that is displayed first is determined, that decision result is discarded and a display color with a higher expectation level or the same expectation level as that display color is selected. The process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be repeatedly executed until the color is determined.

Furthermore, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 18-4 to 18-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in the order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured so that there is a pattern that skips green and changes from blue to red.

For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the chance-up image is displayed in a certain display color first, and then We have shown a case in which the displayed chance-up image is displayed in a different display color from the previous one (the display color of the chance-up image itself does not change halfway through once displayed). It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when executing Super Reach A, the image A1 may be displayed in blue as a chance-up image, and then the display color of the image A1 itself may be configured so that there is a pattern in which the display color changes to green or red. .

In addition, in this example, when super reach A and B are executed, a common image X is displayed as the first chance-up image (chance-up effect A6, B6). However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, all chance-up images displayed during Super Reach A and B may be displayed as a common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed as a common image X. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this example, the configuration is such that the common image X may be displayed only when super reach A and B are executed, but the common image It may be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

In addition, in this example, if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then the chance-up image is displayed in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the jackpot is confirmed. Although the case where the judgment values are allocated in this manner is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even if the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured such that there is a low probability that the image will be missed.

Further, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern in which it changes from white (normal mode) to blue, green, or rainbow color as a special mode.

Also, for example, even if the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red, or from green to red, as in chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, and C4, the jackpot is confirmed. The configuration may be such that the determination value is allocated in such a way that the

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which three types of super reaches A to C are configured to be executable, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode. Alternatively, only two types of super reach may be executed. Alternatively, a type of super reach that does not display a chance-up image and perform no chance-up effect may be provided.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to four times during the super reach, it is not limited to such a mode, and it is also possible to configure the chance-up image so that it can be displayed five or more times. good.

As mentioned above, various modes can be considered as modes of chance-up production.

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 18-7 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 097IWS301), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097IWS304). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 097IWS305).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether any of the super reach A to C is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the process moves to step 097IWS316. If any of the super reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the display timing of any chance up image has arrived (step 097IWS307). If it is time to display the chance up image, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the chance up image to be displayed in the display color (white, blue, green, red, etc.) determined in the chance up effect setting process. Control is performed to display the image in rainbow colors (step 097IWS308). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display an effect display around the chance up image in the same display color (white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) as the displayed chance up image. (Step 097IWS309).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display color of the displayed chance up image or effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal mode), the process moves to step 097IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is special mode), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, the process moves to step 097IWS316.

By executing the processing in steps 097IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode, so the player is alerted only when the expectation level for a jackpot is high. can be done.

If it is not the display timing of the chance up image (N in step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation validity period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation validity period is set in the latter half of the performance period of each super reach A to C, and if the push button 31B is pressed within the operation validity period, or if the push button 31B is not operated. When the operation validity period has elapsed, control is performed on the image display device 5 to display a win/fail result notification to notify whether or not it will be a jackpot. In addition, in this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is set in the first half of the performance period of each super reach A to C (period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. The period is configured so that the operation validity period and the period during which the validity result notification can be displayed do not overlap.

If it is not within the operation validity period, the process moves to step 097IWS316. If it is within the operation validity period, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether a detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097IWS313 ). If the push button 31 is on, the process moves to step 097IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the end timing of the operation validity period (step 097IWS314). If it is not the end timing of the operation validity period, the process moves to step 097IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y in step 097IWS313), or if the timing of the operation validity period has come to an end (Y in step 097IWS314), the performance control CPU 120 displays the validity result on the image display device 5. Control is performed to display the notification (step 097IWS315).

In step 097IWS315, the performance control CPU 120, for example, checks the display result indicated by the display result designation command, and if it is a jackpot, controls to display a character display such as "Jackpot" as a win/fail result notification. . In addition, if the result is a loss, control is performed to display a character display such as "miss" as a success/fail result notification.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the variable time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097 IWS317), and ends the variable display effect processing.

(Production execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image and the success/failure result notification during the execution of Super Reach will be explained. FIG. 18-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance up image and the success/failure result notification during the execution of Super Reach. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 18-8, a case is shown in which the chance up effect A3 is executed when the super reach A is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-8, at timing T1, the image display device 5 starts displaying the decorative symbols on the left and center right, and then, at timing T2, it becomes the ready-to-reach timing and the normal reach is started. Thereafter, when the development timing to super reach comes at timing T3, super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-8, while super reach A is being executed, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 can be displayed as chance-up images. As shown in FIG. 18-8, in this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the period T3 to T4 in the first half of the production period of super reach A before the operation valid period. is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 18-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed, the effect image is also displayed at the same time. Furthermore, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. The example shown in FIG. 18-8 shows a case where each effect image is displayed in red in response to each chance-up image being displayed in red.

Note that Figure 18-8 is an example; when each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, each effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, each effect image is also displayed in green. If each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, each effect image will also be displayed in rainbow color, and if each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), each effect image will also be displayed in rainbow color. Displayed in white (normal mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-8, in the second half of the performance period of Super Reach A, for example, the valid operation period starts from timing T4, and if a pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the valid operation period, The display of the success/failure result notification starts from the timing when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected (timing T5). Note that if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation validity period, the display of the validity result notification is started at the end of the operation validity period. Then, when the variation time ends (timing T6), the variable display of the decorative symbols is ended, and the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that this example shows a case where the display of the success/failure result notification starts at the end of the operation validity period if no operation is performed, but this is not the only case; if no operation is performed The configuration may also be such that the display of the success/failure result notification is not performed.

As shown in Figure 18-8, in this example, chance-up images and effect images can be displayed in the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and success/failure results can be displayed in the second half. be. Additionally, during the second half of the performance, chance-up images and effect images are restricted from being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate the player's attention on the notification of the success or failure result.

In this example, as shown in Figure 18-8, the chance-up image and effect image are configured to be displayed only during the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and the success/failure results are announced during the second half. Although the case is shown in which the screen is designed in advance to be able to display, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration can be configured so that a chance-up image or an effect image can be displayed regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, and when the chance-up image or effect image is displayed, the effective operation period It may be configured such that prohibition processing is performed so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image while the display is in progress or the result notification is being displayed.

Furthermore, for example, instead of not displaying the chance-up image or effect image at all during the operation validity period or while displaying the success/fail result notification, the configuration may be such that the chance-up image or effect image is displayed at a very low rate. . Further, for example, during the operation validity period or when the success/failure result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in a display mode that is less noticeable, such as by reducing the display size. It is sufficient if the display of the chance-up image or the effect image is restricted in some way.

(Super reach production example)
Next, the presentation mode of Super Reach will be explained. FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of super reach performance modes. Of these, FIGS. 18-9 and 18-10 show specific examples of the performance mode of super reach A with chance-up performance. Furthermore, FIGS. 18-11 and 18-12 show a specific example of a performance mode of super reach B with a chance-up performance. Further, FIGS. 18-13 and 18-14 show a specific example of the performance mode of super reach A without the chance-up performance. Further, FIGS. 18-15 and 18-16 show specific examples of the performance mode of super reach B without the chance-up performance. Note that in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

First, the production mode of Super Reach A with chance-up production will be explained using FIGS. 18-9 and 18-10. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 18-9 and 18-10, a case will be described as an example in which it is decided to execute the chance-up effect A3. As shown in FIG. 18-9(A), the image display device 5 performs a variable display of the left-center right decorative pattern, and as shown in FIG. 18-9(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed and becomes a ready-to-win state. Next, at the timing of development to Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 18-9(C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach A" are displayed as the character's lines. The display will appear and Super Reach A will start. In this example, as shown in FIG. 18-9(C), when super reach A is started, a variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the timing for displaying the image A1 comes, the image 097IW12 imitating a bird is displayed as the image A1 on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 18-9(D). Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect A3, the bird's wing part is displayed in red in image 097IW12, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (D) (see step 097IWS308). . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-9(D), an effect image 097IW13 is displayed in red around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the timing for displaying the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-10(E), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW14 imitating a bird, which is different from the image A1, as the image A2. Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute chance-up effect A3, the bird's wing part is displayed in red in image 097IW14, as shown in FIG. 18-10(E) (see step 097IWS308). . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-10(E), an effect image 097IW15 is displayed in red around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the timing for displaying image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-10(F), image 097IW16 imitating a bird, which is different from images A1 and A2, is displayed as image A3 on image display device 5. . Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute chance-up effect A3, the bird's wing part is displayed in red in image 097IW16, as shown in FIG. 18-10(F) (see step 097IWS308). . Further, as shown in FIG. 18-10(F), an effect image 097IW17 is displayed in red around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the timing for displaying image A4 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-10(G), image display device 5 displays image 097IW18 imitating a bird, which is different from images A1, A2, and A3, as image A4. Is displayed. Also, since it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect A3, the bird's wing part is displayed in red in image 097IW18, as shown in FIG. 18-10 (G) (see step 097IWS308). . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-10(G), an effect image 097IW19 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, the production mode of super reach B with chance-up production will be explained using FIGS. 18-11 and 18-12. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 18-11 and 18-12, a case will be described as an example in which it is decided to execute the chance-up effect B3. As shown in FIG. 18-11(A), a variable display of the left-center right decorative pattern is performed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 18-11(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed and becomes a ready-to-win state. Next, at the timing of development to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 18-11(C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach B" are displayed as character lines. A message is displayed and Super Reach B starts. In this example, as shown in FIG. 18-11(C), when super reach B is started, the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the timing for displaying image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-11(D), image 097IW22 imitating the moon is displayed on image display device 5 as image B1. Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect B3, the moon is displayed in red in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 18-11(D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 18-11(D), an effect image 097IW23 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the timing for displaying image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-12(E), image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter is displayed on image display device 5 as image B2. Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect B3, Jupiter is displayed in red in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 18-12(E) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-12(E), an effect image 097IW25 is displayed in red around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the timing for displaying image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-12(F), image 097IW26 imitating Saturn is displayed on image display device 5 as image B3. Furthermore, since it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect B3, Saturn is displayed in red in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 18-12(F) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-12(F), an effect image 097IW27 is displayed in red display color around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, using FIGS. 18-13 and 18-14, an explanation will be given of the production mode of super reach A without the chance-up production. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 18-13 and 18-14, it is assumed that it is decided not to perform the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 18-13 (A), the image display device 5 performs a variable display of the left center right decorative pattern, and as shown in FIG. 18-13 (B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed and becomes a ready-to-win state. Next, at the timing of development to Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 18-13(C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach A" are displayed as character lines. The display will appear and Super Reach A will start. In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-13(C), when super reach A is started, the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the timing for displaying the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-13(D), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW32 imitating a bird as the image A1. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to perform the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in image 097IW32, as shown in FIG. 18-13(D) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-13(D), an effect image 097IW33 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the timing for displaying the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-14(E), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW34 imitating a bird, which is different from the image A1, as the image A2. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to perform the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in image 097IW34, as shown in FIG. 18-14(E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 18-14(E), an effect image 097IW35 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the timing for displaying image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-14(F), image 097IW36 imitating a bird, which is different from images A1 and A2, is displayed as image A3 on the image display device 5. . Furthermore, since it has been decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in image 097IW36, as shown in FIG. 18-14(F) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-14(F), an effect image 097IW37 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the timing for displaying image A4 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-14(G), image display device 5 displays image 097IW38 imitating a bird, which is different from images A1, A2, and A3, as image A4. Is displayed. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in image 097IW38, as shown in FIG. 18-14(G) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-14(G), an effect image 097IW39 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, using FIGS. 18-15 and 18-16, an explanation will be given of the production mode of super reach B that does not involve chance-up production. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 18-15 and 18-16, it is assumed that it is decided not to perform the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 18-15(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left-center right decorative pattern, and as shown in FIG. 18-15(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed and becomes a ready-to-win state. Next, at the timing of development to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 18-15(C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach B" are displayed as the character's lines. A message is displayed and Super Reach B starts. In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-15(C), when super reach B is started, a variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the timing for displaying image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-15(D), image 097IW42 imitating the moon is displayed on image display device 5 as image B1. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to perform the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in white in image 097IW42, as shown in FIG. 18-15(D) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-15(D), an effect image 097IW43 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the timing for displaying image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-16(E), image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter is displayed on image display device 5 as image B2. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to perform the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in white in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 18-16(E) (see step 097IWS308). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-16(E), an effect image 097IW45 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the timing for displaying image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 18-16(F), image 097IW46 imitating Saturn is displayed on image display device 5 as image B3. Furthermore, since it has been decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in white in image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 18-16(F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 18-16(F), an effect image 097IW47 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Note that since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a normal manner, no notification sound is output.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 18-9 to 18-16, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 differ from the chance-up image in that the display mode does not change depending on whether it is a loss fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. , is an image displayed in a display mode that is not related to the level of expectation for a jackpot.

Further, in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, super reach A and super reach B are shown as an example, but when super reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar manner. For example, in Figures 18-9 to 18-16, an image imitating a bird or an image of a celestial body is displayed as a chance-up image, but when executing Super Reach C, other images can be used as chance-up images. images (for example, images imitating vehicles such as cars and airplanes) are displayed, and these chance-up images are displayed in special modes (blue, green, red) or in the same manner as in Figures 18-9 to 18-16. The effect image may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or the effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or a normal mode (white).

For example, when chance-up effect A6 or chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as image X instead of image A1 or image B1. The common image X and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and effect image that will be displayed thereafter are also displayed in rainbow colors.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 18-13 to 18-16, there are cases where chance-up images (Image A1, Image A2, Image A3, Image A4) are displayed while Super Reach A is being executed, and when Super Reach A is displayed. When displaying chance-up images (Image B1, Image B2, Image B3) during Reach B, an effect image with a common white display color is added and the chance-up image is displayed. The aspect of the common effect image that is displayed is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a chance-up image may be displayed by adding an image with the exact same shape and the same display color (for example, an effect image), and some aspects such as adding an image with a different shape but the same display color may be used. It is also possible to display a chance-up image by adding a common image. When displaying a chance-up image in the normal mode in this way, it is not limited to adding a production element such as the exact same image, but it is also possible to add a production element such as a similar image, or in some form. Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to add a common effect element and display a chance-up image.

As explained above, according to this feature section 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the control will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state). , it is possible to display a specific image (eg, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (eg, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) during execution of a specific effect. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and At least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during execution of the second specific effect. For example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to be advantageous (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 (The display mode does not change.) In addition, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) and display the specific image, and the specific image can be displayed in a normal mode. When displaying a specific image, it is possible to add a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) to display the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when displaying a chance-up image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color), simply displaying the effect image of the special mode, the chance-up image in a normal mode (for example, white) is displayed. If the system is configured so that no effect image is displayed when the game is displayed, the player cannot be made aware that the chance-up image is a preview image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed, so that the player does not know that the chance-up image is a preview image. This allows the player to pay attention to the chance-up image.

Additionally, in this example, when displaying the chance-up image or effect image in the normal mode (when the chance-up does not occur), the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (in this example, white). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance does not increase, and conversely, it is possible to increase the degree of recognition when the chance up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode.

Note that adding the first special effect element and the second special effect element may mean, for example, generating and displaying an image in which an effect image is added to a chance-up image, or a configuration in which an image in which an effect image is added to a chance-up image is generated and displayed, or an image in which an effect image is added to a chance-up image may be generated and displayed. Although it does not perform the process of compositing the images, it displays the chance-up image and the effect image close to each other or displays them superimposed on each other to make it appear as if the effect image has been added to the chance-up image. Good too.

In addition, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to effect images, but also other images (for example, character images or item images) that are displayed in some form to be added to the chance-up image. ). Further, for example, as a first special effect element or a second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image may be displayed, or a predetermined effect sound may be output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. It may be any other method as long as it adds a presentation element in some form.

Further, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background image and the item image may be displayed as predetermined images in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation during execution of the super reach.

Furthermore, in this example, a case where super reach A to C are executed is shown as a specific example of the "specific effect," but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a preview performance or a pseudo sequence can be executed as a specific performance, and a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode while the preview effect or pseudo sequence is executed, and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. It may be configured to do so. Further, for example, a promotion effect that suggests whether or not to be promoted to a probability-variable jackpot during a jackpot game may be configured to be executable as a specific effect, and during the execution of the promotion effect, a chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. In addition, the effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. In this way, various aspects can be considered as the specific performance.

Furthermore, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous", specifically, the display mode of character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is However, "not related" means that the feeling of anticipation for a jackpot like the chance-up image is not a factor that increases the chance. Therefore, even when images other than these chance-up images are displayed, there are images whose expectations (reliability) for a jackpot differ depending on the type of super reach itself in which those images are displayed.

Further, according to the present feature section 097IW, during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image is displayed in a different manner (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state. Displaying the first specific image with the addition of a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) that can be displayed and has a display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image. It is possible. Therefore, the difference in the aspect of the specific image can be emphasized depending on the display aspect of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to this characteristic part 097IW, it is possible to display an image in a common aspect (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and when displaying images in a common aspect, it is possible to The first specific image and the second specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a rainbow display color). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that an image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to this feature section 097IW, when a specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element, it is possible to perform a notification effect (for example, outputting a notification sound). Furthermore, when the specific image is displayed with the second special effect element added, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player conscious only when the degree of expectation of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is high.

Note that this example shows a case where a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in blue, green, red, or rainbow color. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, if a common image may be configured. Furthermore, even when displaying the chance-up image or the effect image in blue, green, or red, it may be configured to output different notification sounds depending on whether the color is blue, green, or red.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 097IW, it is possible to execute a performance (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) that changes a specific image to which the second special performance element is added to a specific image to which the first special performance element is added. It is. Therefore, even when a specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, a feeling of anticipation can be maintained.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 097IW, the effect of the first period (for example, the effect of the first half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) and whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state after the first period. It is possible to execute a specific performance including a second period performance (for example, a performance in the latter half of the Super Reach A to C performance period) including a performance that notifies the player (for example, notification of success/failure results). Further, a specific image can be displayed during the first period, and display of the specific image during the second period is restricted (see FIG. 18-8). Therefore, it is possible for the player to concentrate on whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

In this example, a case is shown in which the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operational validity period of the latter half of the super reach and the period during which the success/failure result notification is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when executing a super reach that progresses from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations, chance-up images and effect images will be displayed more frequently during the weak reach period, and During the reach period, the display of chance-up images and effect images may be restricted or not displayed.

In addition, according to this feature section 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, super reach A to C) that indicates whether or not the control will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it is possible to execute a specific performance. A specific image (eg, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (eg, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) can be displayed inside. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach AC) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to be advantageous (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-9 to 18-16, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 (The display mode does not change.) In addition, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) and display the specific image, and the specific image can be displayed in a normal mode. When displaying a specific image, it is possible to add a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) to display the specific image. The specific image can be displayed different times depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-4 and 18-5, In Reach A, chance-up images can be displayed four times (Image A1, Image A2, Image A3, Image A4), and in Super Reach B, chance-up images can be displayed three times (Image B1, Image B2, Image B3). be). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to this characteristic part 097IW, when displaying a specific image multiple times, when displaying the specific image a second time after displaying the specific image the first time, a high percentage of the specific image is displayed for the first time. It is possible to display a specific image in a manner in which the degree of expectation is high and is controlled to be more advantageous than the previous image (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-4 to FIG. ). Therefore, even if the specific image is displayed in a manner with low expectations the first time, the user can have a sense of anticipation for the specific image displayed the second time.

In addition, in this example, when executing Super Reach C, which has the highest expectation for a jackpot among Super Reach A to C, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the least, 2 times, and the expectation for a jackpot is the second highest. When executing Super Reach B, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is 3, and when executing Super Reach A, which has the lowest expectation for a jackpot, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the highest, 4 times. ing. In this way, in this example, the higher the expectation for a jackpot, the fewer the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, so that even though the expectation is high, the chance-up image is displayed frequently and becomes more dramatic. This prevents it from becoming a nuisance. Conversely, in the case of a reach where the level of expectation for a jackpot is low, by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even if the level of expectation for a jackpot is low. .

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 097IW can be configured in appropriate combination with the configuration shown in the feature section 103SG. For example, the configuration for setting the setting value shown in the feature section 103SG or the configuration for executing a predetermined effect of a specific mode that gives suggestions regarding settings may be combined as appropriate with the configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the feature section 097IW. It is possible to configure

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frames 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance and a changing performance in response to the preview performance;
a movable body that is operable;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that indicates whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect;
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The first change performance is a performance executed during variable display, the second change performance is a performance executed during the advantageous state,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode that are different from each other,
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to the player in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to the specific mode by executing the first change production;
a predetermined effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect to notify a second content that is advantageous to the player and is different from the first content;
a movable body performance using the movable body in which at least some performance aspects are common when the first change performance is executed and when the second change performance is executed;
In response to the execution of the movable body performance, it is possible to perform an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the movable body performance,
When the display mode of the predetermined display changes from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode, without the movable body effect,
When the display mode of the predetermined display changes from the first predetermined mode or the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, accompanied by the movable object effect,
When the special effect is executed in response to the first change effect causing the display mode of the predetermined display to change to the specific mode without changing from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode ; When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect; when the special effect is executed in response to the display mode changing from the first predetermined mode to the second predetermined mode and changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode; The advantageousness of the first content to be notified is different,
The specific performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific performances including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance,
The image display means includes:
As the specific image, at least a first specific image can be displayed while the first specific effect is being executed, and a second specific image can be displayed while the second specific effect is being executed;
It is possible to display the specific image in a normal mode and the specific image in a special mode that suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal mode;
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state,
The image display means is capable of displaying the specific image by adding a first special effect element when displaying the specific image according to the special mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images